User Manual for Nikon models including: Digital Camera, D780RM
Warranty. ❏ User's Manual ... updates, ViewNX-i and other Nikon software, and manuals for Nikon products including ... What Is Remote Flash Photography? ... With vibration reduction enabled on vibration reduction (VR) lenses. • If the sound ...
Reference Manual. En. Read this manual thoroughly before using th
About This Manual. D This icon marks notes, information that should be read before using this product. A This icon marks tips, additional information you may ...
DIGITAL CAMERA
Reference Manual
· Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera.
· To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read
"For Your Safety" (page xxxviii).
· After reading this manual, keep it in a readily accessible
En
place for future reference.
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
Camera
EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion battery with terminal
cover
BF-1B body cap
MH-25a battery charger (comes with either an AC wall adapter or power cable of a type and shape that varies with the country or region of sale)
DK-5 eyepiece cap
DK-31 rubber eyecup (comes attached to
camera)
UC-E24 USB cable AN-DC21 strap Warranty User's Manual
· Memory cards are sold separately. · Purchasers of the lens kit option should confirm that the
package also includes a lens (manuals for the lens may also be provided).
D780 Model Name: N1722 ii
D The Nikon Download Center Visit the Nikon download center to download firmware updates, ViewNX-i and other Nikon software, and manuals for Nikon products including cameras, NIKKOR lenses, and flash units. https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
iii
About This Manual
Symbols
The following symbols and conventions are employed in this manual. Use them to help locate the information you need.
D This icon marks notes, information that should be read before
using this product.
A This icon marks tips, additional information you may find helpful
when using this product.
0 This icon marks references to other sections in this manual.
Conventions
· This camera uses SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards, referred to throughout this manual as "memory cards".
· Throughout this manual, battery chargers are referred to as "battery chargers" or "chargers".
· Throughout this manual, smartphones and tablets are referred to as "smart devices".
· Throughout this manual, the term "default settings" is used to refer to the settings in effect at shipment. The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
A For Your Safety "For Your Safety" contains important safety instructions. Be sure to read them before using the camera. For more information, see "For Your Safety" (0 xxxviii).
iv
Table of Contents
Package Contents ................................................................................... ii About This Manual................................................................................. iv Menu List.............................................................................................. xxxii For Your Safety............................................................................... xxxviii Notices .................................................................................................... xliv
Getting to Know the Camera
1
Parts of the Camera ................................................................................ 1 Camera Body...................................................................... 1 The Power Switch............................................................. 7 The Control Panel............................................................. 8 The Viewfinder .................................................................. 9 The Live View Displays (Photos/Movies)................ 12 Touch Controls ................................................................ 14
First Steps
21
Readying the Camera .......................................................................... 21 Attaching the Strap ....................................................... 21 Charging the Battery..................................................... 22 Inserting the Battery...................................................... 24 Attaching a Lens ............................................................. 25 Inserting Memory Cards............................................... 27 Camera Setup .................................................................. 30
v
The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining ....... 33 Battery Level..................................................................... 33 Memory Card Indicators and Number of Exposures Remaining ........................ 34
Basic Photography and Playback
36
Taking Photographs (b Mode)........................................................ 36 Framing Photographs in the Viewfinder (Viewfinder Photography) ...................................... 36 Framing Photographs in the Monitor (Live View) .................................................................... 40
Recording Movies (b Mode)............................................................. 45 Taking Photos During Filming................................... 50
Playback.................................................................................................... 51 Viewing Movies............................................................... 53 Deleting Unwanted Pictures ...................................... 56
Camera Controls
57
The G Button ..................................................................................... 57
Using the Menus............................................................. 58 The i Button (the i Menu) ................................................................ 63
The Still Photography i Menu................................... 65 The Movie i Menu ......................................................... 66 The Playback i Menu.................................................... 67
vi
The R Button......................................................................................... 68 Viewfinder Photography............................................. 68 Live View Photography................................................ 69
The Mode Dial........................................................................................ 71 Using the Mode Dial ..................................................... 72
The Release Mode Dial........................................................................ 73 Choosing a Release Mode........................................... 73
The Focus-Mode Selector .................................................................. 75 The AF-Mode Button ........................................................................... 76
Choosing an AF Mode.................................................. 77 Choosing an AF-Area Mode ....................................... 78 The AF-ON Button ................................................................................ 82 The A Button ......................................................................................... 82 Exposure (AE) Lock........................................................ 83 Focus Lock........................................................................ 83 Locking Focus and Exposure ..................................... 83 The Q/g (U) Button ....................................................................... 86 Adjusting White Balance............................................. 86 The S (Q) Button............................................................................ 91 Adjusting ISO Sensitivity ............................................. 91 Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control.................... 93
vii
The E Button .......................................................................................... 94 Adjusting Exposure Compensation......................... 94
The X (T) Button ........................................................................... 95 Adjusting Image Quality.............................................. 95 Choosing an Image Size............................................... 97
The W (Y) Button ............................................................................... 99 Choosing a Metering Option ..................................... 99
The N (Y) Button .............................................................................. 101 Choosing a Flash Mode............................................. 101 Adjusting Flash Compensation.............................. 103
The BKT Button ................................................................................... 104 The Pv Button ...................................................................................... 105 The Fn Button ...................................................................................... 106
Shooting Settings
107
Choosing a Shooting Mode............................................................ 107 Shooting in Modes P, S, A, and M .......................... 109 User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes ........................... 115 Using Special Effects Modes.................................... 119
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)............................................................................................ 129 Adjusting Image Area Settings............................... 129 Adjusting Image Quality........................................... 134 Choosing an Image Size............................................ 137
viii
Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus) ............................ 139 Choosing a Focus Mode ............................................ 139 Autofocus Mode........................................................... 140 AF-Area Mode ............................................................... 145 Focus Point Selection ................................................. 159 Manual Focus ................................................................ 162
Exposure-Related Settings (Metering and Exposure Compensation)............................................................ 166 Choosing How the Camera Sets Exposure ......... 166 Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only).................. 170 Autoexposure Lock ..................................................... 173 Exposure Compensation........................................... 175
Choosing the Operation Performed When the Shutter Is Released (Release Mode)............................................................. 178 Choosing a Release Mode Such as Single-Frame, Continuous, or Quiet Shutter-Release............. 178 Self-Timer Mode (E) ................................................... 183 Mirror up Mode (Mup) ............................................... 185
Adjusting the Camera's Sensitivity to Light (ISO Sensitivity) ............................................................................... 187 ISO Sensitivity................................................................ 187 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control..................................... 190
ix
Achieving Natural Colors with Different Light Sources (White Balance)............................................................................... 195 White Balance............................................................... 195 Fine-Tuning White Balance...................................... 200 Choosing a Color Temperature.............................. 204 Preset Manual ............................................................... 209
Varying Exposure or White Balance over a Series of Photographs (Bracketing)........................................................... 224 Bracketing ...................................................................... 225 Exposure and Flash Bracketing .............................. 226 White Balance Bracketing ........................................ 232 ADL Bracketing............................................................. 238
Image Processing (Picture Controls) ........................................... 243 Selecting a Picture Control ...................................... 243 Modifying Picture Controls...................................... 245 Creating Custom Picture Controls ........................ 250
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows (Active D-Lighting and HDR) ..................................................... 254 Active D-Lighting ........................................................ 254 High Dynamic Range (HDR)..................................... 256
x
Options for Movie Recording and Editing
262
Image Area: Choosing a Movie Crop ........................................... 262 Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality ............................... 264 Slow-Motion Movies.......................................................................... 266 Points to Note When Recording Movies .................................... 268 Editing Movies ..................................................................................... 271
Trimming Movies ......................................................... 272 Saving Selected Frames............................................. 277 Adding Indices to Movies ......................................... 278
Other Shooting Options
279
Using Two Memory Cards................................................................ 279 Deleting Copies ............................................................ 281
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings......................... 282 Settings Accessible from the Photo Shooting Menu............................................................................ 282 Settings Accessible from the Movie Shooting Menu............................................................................ 284 Other Settings ............................................................... 285
xi
Combining Multiple Exposures in a Single Photo (Multiple Exposure)....................................................................... 287 Multiple Exposure Options ...................................... 287 Creating a Multiple Exposure.................................. 290 Using the i Button...................................................... 296 Ending Multiple Exposures ...................................... 297
Taking Photos at a Set Interval (Interval Timer Shooting)... 298 Interval Timer Shooting Options ........................... 298 Interval-Timer Photography.................................... 303 Pausing Interval-Timer Photography................... 312 Resuming Interval-Timer Photography............... 313 Ending Interval-Timer Photography..................... 314
Creating a Movie from Photos (Time-Lapse Movie) .............. 315 Time-Lapse Movie Options...................................... 315 Recording Time-Lapse Movies ............................... 318
Varying Focus over a Series of Photos (Focus Shift Shooting) .......................................................................................... 328 Focus Shift Shooting Options ................................. 329 Focus-Shift Photography.......................................... 331
The Electronic Shutter (Silent Live View Photography) ....... 340 Photographing Film Negatives (Negative Digitizer) ............. 343 Customizing the i Menu: Customize i Menu ....................... 347
xii
Using Non-CPU Lenses (Non-CPU Lens Data) .......................... 349 Entering Lens Data ...................................................... 351 Recalling Non-CPU Lens Data ................................. 352
Playback
353
Viewing Pictures.................................................................................. 353 Full-Frame Playback.................................................... 353 Thumbnail Playback ................................................... 354 Calendar Playback ....................................................... 355 Playback Controls ........................................................ 356 Using the Touch Screen............................................. 358 The i Button.................................................................. 361
Photo Information.............................................................................. 366 File Information ............................................................ 367 Exposure Data............................................................... 368 Highlights ....................................................................... 368 RGB Histogram.............................................................. 369 Shooting Data ............................................................... 371 Location Data ................................................................ 373 Overview Data .............................................................. 374
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom......................................... 376 Playback Zoom ............................................................. 376
Protecting Photographs from Deletion...................................... 378 Rating Pictures..................................................................................... 380
xiii
Selecting Pictures for Upload ........................................................ 381 Deleting Pictures ................................................................................ 383
During Playback........................................................... 383 The Playback Menu..................................................... 385
Connecting to Computers and TVs
389
Connecting to Computers .............................................................. 389 Connecting via USB .................................................... 389 Wireless Networks (Wi-Fi)......................................... 394
Connecting to HDMI Devices......................................................... 396 Connecting to HDMI TVs .......................................... 397 Connecting to HDMI Recorders ............................. 397
Network Connections
402
Camera and Network System Chart ............................................ 402 Connecting to Smart Devices ........................................................ 403
The SnapBridge App .................................................. 403 What SnapBridge Can Do for You ......................... 404 Wireless Connections................................................. 405 Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode) ....................... 406 Connecting via Bluetooth ........................................ 415
xiv
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi............................................. 430 What Wi-Fi Can Do for You....................................... 430 The Wireless Transmitter Utility.............................. 430 Infrastructure and Access-Point Modes............... 431 Connecting in Access-Point Mode ........................ 433 Connecting in Infrastructure Mode....................... 439 Uploading Pictures...................................................... 447 Disconnecting and Reconnecting ......................... 451
Connecting to Networks Using the WT-7 .................................. 453 The WT-7 ......................................................................... 453 What the WT-7 Can Do for You............................... 454 Connecting Using the WT-7..................................... 456
Troubleshooting Wireless Issues................................................... 457
On-Camera Flash Photography
459
"On-Camera" Versus "Remote" ...................................................... 459 Camera-Mounted Flash Units.................................. 459 Remote Flash Photography ..................................... 459
Using an On-Camera Flash.............................................................. 460 Flash Control Mode............................................................................ 463 Flash Modes.......................................................................................... 465
Choosing a Flash Mode ............................................. 468
xv
Flash Compensation ......................................................................... 469 Adjusting Flash Compensation.............................. 470
FV Lock................................................................................................... 471 Flash Info for On-Camera Units..................................................... 474
Flash Control Mode Displays................................... 474
Remote Flash Photography
477
What Is Remote Flash Photography? .......................................... 477 Using Remote Flash Units ........................................ 478
Radio AWL............................................................................................. 479 Establishing a Wireless Connection...................... 479 Adjusting Flash Settings ........................................... 484 Adding a Shoe-Mounted Flash Unit ..................... 493
Optical AWL.......................................................................................... 494 Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500 ......................................................................... 495
Optical/Radio AWL............................................................................. 506 Flash Info for Remote Units ............................................................ 507
Flash Control Mode Displays................................... 507
xvi
Menu Guide
511
Defaults .................................................................................................. 511 Playback Menu Defaults............................................ 511 Photo Shooting Menu Defaults .............................. 512 Movie Shooting Menu Defaults.............................. 516 Custom Settings Menu Defaults............................. 518 Setup Menu Defaults.................................................. 524
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images................................ 529 Delete ...............................................................................................530 Playback Folder.............................................................................530 Playback Display Options..........................................................531 Copy Image(s)................................................................................532 Copying Pictures .......................................................... 533 Image Review ................................................................................538 After Delete ....................................................................................539 Rotate Tall .......................................................................................540 Slide Show ......................................................................................540 Viewing Slide Shows................................................... 541 Rating ...............................................................................................543
xvii
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options.................. 544 Reset Photo Shooting Menu.................................................... 545 Storage Folder .............................................................................. 545 Renaming Folders ....................................................... 545 Select Folder by Number.......................................... 546 Select Folder from List............................................... 548 File Naming.................................................................................... 550 Role Played by Card in Slot 2................................................... 551 Image Area..................................................................................... 551 Image Quality................................................................................ 551 Image Size ...................................................................................... 551 NEF (RAW) Recording................................................................. 552 NEF (RAW) Compression........................................... 552 NEF (RAW) Bit Depth .................................................. 552 ISO Sensitivity Settings.............................................................. 553 White Balance ............................................................................... 553 Set Picture Control ...................................................................... 553 Manage Picture Control ............................................................ 554 Color Space.................................................................................... 554 Active D-Lighting......................................................................... 555
xviii
Long Exposure NR........................................................................556 High ISO NR ....................................................................................557 Vignette Control...........................................................................558 Diffraction Compensation ........................................................559 Auto Distortion Control .............................................................560 Flicker Reduction..........................................................................561 Flash Control..................................................................................563
Flash Control Mode..................................................... 564 Wireless Flash Options............................................... 565 Remote Flash Control................................................. 566 Radio Remote Flash Info............................................ 566 Auto Bracketing............................................................................567 Multiple Exposure........................................................................569 HDR (High Dynamic Range) .....................................................569 Interval Timer Shooting .............................................................569 Time-Lapse Movie........................................................................570 Focus Shift Shooting...................................................................570 Silent Live View Photography .................................................570
xix
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options..... 571 Reset Movie Shooting Menu ................................................... 572 File Naming.................................................................................... 572 Destination .................................................................................... 572 Image Area..................................................................................... 573 Auto DX Crop................................................................ 573 Frame Size/Frame Rate.............................................................. 573 Movie Quality................................................................................ 574 Movie File Type ............................................................................ 574 ISO Sensitivity Settings.............................................................. 575 White Balance ............................................................................... 576 Set Picture Control ...................................................................... 577 Manage Picture Control ............................................................ 577 Active D-Lighting......................................................................... 577 High ISO NR ................................................................................... 578 Diffraction Compensation........................................................ 578 Flicker Reduction ......................................................................... 579 Electronic VR.................................................................................. 580 Microphone Sensitivity.............................................................. 581 Attenuator...................................................................................... 582
xx
Frequency Response...................................................................582 Wind Noise Reduction................................................................583 Headphone Volume....................................................................583 Timecode ........................................................................................584 A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings................ 586 Reset Custom Settings ...............................................................590 a: Autofocus .................................................................................. 590
a1: AF-C Priority Selection .................................................590 a2: AF-S Priority Selection..................................................591 a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On....................................592 a4: 3D-Tracking Face-Detection......................................592 a5: Auto-Area AF Face/Eye Detection...........................593 a6: Focus Points Used .........................................................594 a7: Store Points by Orientation .......................................595 a8: AF Activation...................................................................597 a9: Focus Point Wrap-Around..........................................597 a10: Focus Point Options...................................................598
Focus Point Illumination ........................................... 598 Manual Focus Mode.................................................... 598 Dynamic-Area AF Assist............................................. 599 a11: Low-Light AF.................................................................599 a12: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode..............................600
xxi
b: Metering/Exposure ............................................................... 601 b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl....................................... 601 b2: Easy Exposure Compensation.................................. 602 b3: Matrix Metering............................................................. 603 b4: Center-Weighted Area................................................ 603 b5: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure.................................... 604
c: Timers/AE Lock........................................................................ 605 c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L..................................... 605 c2: Standby Timer ................................................................ 605 c3: Self-Timer ......................................................................... 606 c4: Monitor Off Delay.......................................................... 606
d: Shooting/Display ................................................................... 607 d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed .......................................... 607 d2: Max. Continuous Release........................................... 607 d3: Sync. Release Mode Options .................................... 608 d4: Exposure Delay Mode ................................................. 608 d5: Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter............................. 609 d6: Extended Shutter Speeds (M)................................... 610 d7: File Number Sequence ............................................... 611 d8: Save Original (EFFECTS).............................................. 613 d9: Exposure Preview (Lv) ................................................. 614
xxii
d10: Framing Grid Display.................................................615 d11: Peaking Highlights .....................................................615 d12: LCD Illumination .........................................................616 d13: Live View in Continuous Mode..............................616 d14: Optical VR ......................................................................617 e: Bracketing/Flash ..................................................................... 618 e1: Flash Sync Speed ...........................................................618 e2: Flash Shutter Speed......................................................620 e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash...........................................620 e4: Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control ..................................621 e5: Modeling Flash ...............................................................621 e6: Bracketing Order............................................................622 f: Controls....................................................................................... 623 f1: Customize i Menu .......................................................623
View Memory Card Info ............................................. 624 View Release Mode ..................................................... 624 Bluetooth Connection................................................ 625 Wi-Fi Connection ......................................................... 625 f2: Customize i Menu (Lv)...............................................626 f3: Custom Controls .............................................................628
xxiii
f4: OK Button.......................................................................... 635 Viewfinder Photography .......................................... 635 Live View......................................................................... 635 Playback Mode ............................................................. 636
f5: Customize Command Dials ........................................ 637 Reverse Rotation.......................................................... 637 Change Main/Sub ....................................................... 637 Aperture Setting .......................................................... 638 Menus and Playback .................................................. 639 Sub-Dial Frame Advance .......................................... 640
f6: Release Button to Use Dial.......................................... 641 f7: Reverse Indicators.......................................................... 642 f8: D Switch ........................................................................... 642 g: Movie.......................................................................................... 643 g1: Customize i Menu ..................................................... 643
Multi-Selector Power Aperture............................... 644 Multi Selector Exposure Comp............................... 644 g2: Custom Controls ........................................................... 645 g3: AF Speed .......................................................................... 650 g4: AF Tracking Sensitivity................................................ 652 g5: Highlight Display .......................................................... 653 Display Pattern ............................................................. 653 Highlight Display Threshold.................................... 653
xxiv
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup................................................ 654 Format Memory Card .................................................................656 Save User Settings .......................................................................657 Reset User Settings......................................................................657 Language ........................................................................................657 Time Zone and Date....................................................................658 Monitor Brightness......................................................................658 Monitor Color Balance................................................................659 Virtual Horizon ..............................................................................661 Information Display.....................................................................662 AF Fine-Tuning Options.............................................................663 Creating and Saving Fine-Tuning Values............ 665 Choosing a Default Fine-Tuning Value ................ 667 Auto AF Fine-Tuning................................................... 668 Non-CPU Lens Data .....................................................................672 Clean Image Sensor.....................................................................673 Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning .....................................................674 Image Dust Off Ref Photo .........................................................675 Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data ......... 675 Pixel Mapping................................................................................679
xxv
Image Comment .......................................................................... 681 Input Comment............................................................ 681 Attach Comment ......................................................... 681
Copyright Information............................................................... 682 Entering the Names of the Photographer and Copyright Holder .................................................... 682 Attach Copyright Information ................................ 683
Beep Options................................................................................. 684 Beep On/Off................................................................... 684 Volume ............................................................................ 685 Pitch ................................................................................. 685
Touch Controls ............................................................................. 686 Enable/Disable Touch Controls.............................. 686 Full-Frame Playback Flicks ....................................... 686
HDMI ................................................................................................ 686 Location Data................................................................................ 687 Wireless Remote (WR) Options............................................... 688
LED Lamp ....................................................................... 688 Link Mode....................................................................... 689 Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button .............................................. 691 Airplane Mode .............................................................................. 691
xxvi
Connect to Smart Device ..........................................................692 Pairing (Bluetooth) ...................................................... 692 Select to Send (Bluetooth)........................................ 693 Wi-Fi Connection ......................................................... 694
Connect to PC................................................................................696 Wi-Fi Connection ......................................................... 696 Network Settings ......................................................... 696 Options ............................................................................ 698 MAC Address ................................................................. 699
Wireless Transmitter (WT-7) .....................................................700 Wireless Transmitter ................................................... 700
Conformity Marking....................................................................700 Battery Info.....................................................................................701 Slot Empty Release Lock............................................................702 Save/Load Menu Settings .........................................................703
Save Menu Settings..................................................... 707 Load Menu Settings.................................................... 707 Reset All Settings..........................................................................708 Firmware Version .........................................................................708
xxvii
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies.............. 709 Creating Retouched Copies..................................... 710
NEF (RAW) Processing: Creating JPEG Copies of NEF (RAW) Images Without a Computer ........................ 713
Trim................................................................................................... 719 Resize ............................................................................................... 720
Resizing Multiple Images.......................................... 720 D-Lighting ...................................................................................... 726 Quick Retouch .............................................................................. 727 Red-Eye Correction ..................................................................... 728 Straighten....................................................................................... 729 Distortion Control........................................................................ 730 Perspective Control .................................................................... 732 Monochrome ................................................................................ 733 Image Overlay............................................................................... 734
Add ................................................................................... 734 Lighten and Darken.................................................... 738 Trim Movie ..................................................................................... 743 OMY MENU/mRECENT SETTINGS ............................................... 744 O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu.............. 745 m Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used
Settings....................................................................... 750
xxviii
Troubleshooting
751
Before Contacting Customer Support ........................................ 751 Problems and Solutions ................................................................... 753
Battery/Display ............................................................. 753 Shooting.......................................................................... 754 Playback .......................................................................... 762 Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)............ 764 Miscellaneous................................................................ 764 Alerts and Error Messages ............................................................... 765 Alerts ................................................................................ 765 Error Messages.............................................................. 769
Technical Notes
773
Camera Displays.................................................................................. 773 The Viewfinder.............................................................. 773 The Information Display............................................ 776 Live View (Still Photography/Movies) .................. 780 The Control Panel ........................................................ 784
Compatible F Mount Lenses........................................................... 786 CPU Lenses..................................................................... 786 Non-CPU Lenses and Other Accessories ............. 792 The Electronic Rangefinder...................................... 796
xxix
Compatible Flash Units.................................................................... 798 The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)......... 798
Other Compatible Accessories...................................................... 808 Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter................................................................ 814 Charging AC Adapters............................................... 816
Software................................................................................................. 819 Caring for the Camera ...................................................................... 821
Storage............................................................................ 821 Cleaning.......................................................................... 822 The Low-Pass Filter ..................................................... 823 Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions .......................... 832 Camera Care.................................................................. 832 Battery Care ................................................................... 836 Using the Charger ....................................................... 839 Using the Charging AC Adapter............................. 839 Specifications....................................................................................... 840 Nikon D780 Digital Camera ..................................... 840 Approved Memory Cards ................................................................ 860 Memory Card Capacity..................................................................... 861 [FX (36 × 24)] Selected for Image Area ................ 862 [DX (24 × 16)] Selected for Image Area ............... 864
xxx
Battery Endurance.............................................................................. 867 Trademarks and Licenses................................................................. 870
Kit Lens Manual
874
Kit Lenses............................................................................................... 874 AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual .............................................................. 874
Index
887
xxxi
Menu List
The camera offers the following menus. For a more complete description of individual menu items, refer to the "Menu Guide" chapter in the Reference Manual. Some items may not be displayed depending on camera settings or on the type of lens, flash unit, or other accessory attached.
PLAYBACK MENU
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
Delete
White balance
Playback folder
Set Picture Control
Playback display options
Manage Picture Control
Copy image(s)
Color space
Image review
Active D-Lighting
After delete
Long exposure NR
Rotate tall
High ISO NR
Slide show
Vignette control
Rating
Diffraction compensation
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU Reset photo shooting menu Storage folder File naming Role played by card in Slot 2 Image area Image quality Image size NEF (RAW) recording ISO sensitivity settings
Auto distortion control Flicker reduction Flash control Auto bracketing Multiple exposure HDR (high dynamic range) Interval timer shooting Time-lapse movie Focus shift shooting Silent live view photography
xxxii
MOVIE SHOOTING MENU Reset movie shooting menu File naming Destination Image area Frame size/frame rate Movie quality Movie file type ISO sensitivity settings White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Active D-Lighting High ISO NR Diffraction compensation Flicker reduction Electronic VR Microphone sensitivity Attenuator Frequency response Wind noise reduction Headphone volume Timecode
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
Reset custom settings
a Autofocus
a1 AF-C priority selection
a2 AF-S priority selection
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on
a4 3D-tracking face-detection
a5
Auto-area AF face/eye detection
a6 Focus points used
a7 Store points by orientation
a8 AF activation
a9 Focus point wrap-around
a10 Focus point options
a11 Low-light AF
a12
Manual focus ring in AF mode
xxxiii
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
b Metering/exposure
b1 EV steps for exposure cntrl
b2
Easy exposure compensation
b3 Matrix metering
b4 Center-weighted area
b5
Fine-tune optimal exposure
c Timers/AE lock
c1
Shutter-release button AE-L
c2 Standby timer
c3 Self-timer
c4 Monitor off delay
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
d Shooting/display
d1 CL mode shooting speed
d2 Max. continuous release
d3 Sync. release mode options
d4 Exposure delay mode
d5
Electronic front-curtain shutter
d6
Extended shutter speeds (M)
d7 File number sequence
d8 Save original (EFFECTS)
d9 Exposure preview (Lv)
d10 Framing grid display
d11 Peaking highlights
d12 LCD illumination
d13
Live view in continuous mode
d14 Optical VR
xxxiv
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
e Bracketing/flash
e1 Flash sync speed
e2 Flash shutter speed
e3 Exposure comp. for flash
e4
Auto c ISO sensitivity control
e5 Modeling flash
e6 Bracketing order
f Controls
f1 Customize i menu
f2 Customize i menu (Lv)
f3 Custom controls
f4 OK button
f5 Customize command dials
f6 Release button to use dial
f7 Reverse indicators
f8 D switch
CUSTOM SETTING MENU g Movie
g1 Customize i menu g2 Custom controls g3 AF speed g4 AF tracking sensitivity g5 Highlight display
SETUP MENU Format memory card Save user settings Reset user settings Language Time zone and date Monitor brightness Monitor color balance Virtual horizon Information display
xxxv
SETUP MENU AF fine-tuning options Non-CPU lens data Clean image sensor Lock mirror up for cleaning Image Dust Off ref photo Pixel mapping Image comment Copyright information Beep options Touch controls HDMI Location data Wireless remote (WR) options Assign remote (WR) Fn button
SETUP MENU Airplane mode Connect to smart device Connect to PC Wireless transmitter (WT-7) Conformity marking Battery info Slot empty release lock Save/load menu settings Reset all settings Firmware version
xxxvi
RETOUCH MENU NEF (RAW) processing Trim Resize D-Lighting Quick retouch Red-eye correction Straighten Distortion control Perspective control Monochrome Image overlay Trim movie
MY MENU Add items Remove items Rank items Choose tab
xxxvii
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read "For Your Safety" in its entirety before using this product. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use this product will read them. A DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon carries a high risk of death or severe injury. A WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could result in death or severe injury. A CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could result in injury or property damage.
A WARNING
Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle. Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury. Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal parts that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident. Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other injury. Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery or power source. Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
xxxviii
Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with wet hands. Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock. Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product while it is on or plugged in. Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns. Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such as propane, gasoline or aerosols. Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire. Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the lens or camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment. Do not aim the flash or AF-assist illuminator at the operator of a motor vehicle Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents. Keep this product out of reach of children. Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard. Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate medical attention. Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck. Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
xxxix
Do not use batteries, chargers, or AC adapters not specifically designated for use with this product. When using batteries, chargers, and AC adapters designated for use with this product, do not: · Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place
them under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame. · Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters. Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock. Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC adapter during thunderstorms. Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock. Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high or low temperatures. Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns, or frostbite.
A CAUTION
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources. Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product's internal parts. When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame. Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the frame could cause fire. Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited. The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
xl
Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will not be used for an extended period. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction. Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or objects. Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire. Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction. Do not look directly at the AF-assist illuminator. Failure to observe this precaution could have adverse effects on vision. Do not transport cameras or lenses with tripods or similar accessories attached. Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product malfunction.
xli
A DANGER (Batteries)
Do not mishandle batteries. Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire: · Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product. · Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat. · Do not disassemble. · Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces,
hairpins, or other metal objects. · Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to
powerful physical shocks. · Do not step on batteries, pierce them with nails, or strike them with
hammers. Charge only as indicated. Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire. If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of clean water and seek immediate medical attention. Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
xlii
A WARNING (Batteries)
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention. Keep batteries out of reach of household pets and other animals. The batteries could leak, overheat, rupture, or catch fire if bitten, chewed, or otherwise damaged by animals. Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain. Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object should it become wet. Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the batteries, such as discoloration or deformation. Cease charging EN-EL15b rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specified period of time. Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire. When batteries are no longer needed, insulate the terminals with tape. Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into contact with the terminals. If battery liquid comes into contact with a person's skin or clothing, immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of clean water. Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
xliii
Notices
· No part of the manuals included with this product may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language in any form, by any means, without Nikon's prior written permission.
· Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice.
· Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product.
· While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete, we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of the Nikon representative in your area (address provided separately).
xliv
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be punishable by law. · Items prohibited by law from being copied or reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper money, coins, securities, government bonds, or local government bonds, even if such copies or reproductions are stamped "Sample." The copying or reproduction of paper money, coins, or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited. Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained, the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited. The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited. · Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies (shares, bills, checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or coupon tickets, except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provided for business use by a company. Also, do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government, licenses issued by public agencies and private groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as passes and meal coupons. · Comply with copyright notices Under copyright law, photographs or recordings of copyrighted works made with the camera cannot be used without the permission of the copyright holder. Exceptions apply to personal use, but note that even personal use may be restricted in the case of photographs or recordings of exhibits or live performances.
xlv
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including lenses, chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry. The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking. For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized Nikon dealer.
D Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
D Life-Long Learning As part of Nikon's "Life-Long Learning" commitment to ongoing product support and education, continually-updated information is available online at the following sites: · For users in the U.S.A.: https://www.nikonusa.com/ · For users in Europe and Africa:
https://www.europe-nikon.com/support/ · For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East:
https://www.nikon-asia.com/ Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following URL for contact information: https://imaging.nikon.com/
xlvi
Getting to Know the Camera
Parts of the Camera
Camera Body
78 9
10
11
6
12
5
4
5
3
13
2
14
1
15
1 Accessory shoe (for optional 8 S (Q) button (0 91)
flash unit)
9 Sub-command dial
2 Release mode dial (0 73)
10 Power switch (0 7)
3 Release mode dial lock release 11 Shutter-release button (0 36)
(0 73) 4 Mode dial lock release (0 72)
12 E button (0 94)
5 Eyelet for camera strap (0 21) 13 E (focal plane mark)
6 Mode dial (0 71)
14 Main command dial
7 Movie-record button (0 45) 15 Control panel (0 8, 784)
Getting to Know the Camera 1
1
2
3
4
15
5
16
6
17
14
13
12 11 10
1 Self-timer lamp 2 Stereo microphone (0 45) 3 c (Y) button (0 101) 4 BKT button (0 104) 5 Audio connector cover 6 Accessory terminal connector
cover 7 Cover for USB and HDMI
connectors 8 Lens release button (0 26) 9 AF-mode button (0 76) 10 Focus-mode selector (0 75)
7
18
8
19
9
11 Lens mounting mark (0 25) 12 Mirror (0 822)
13 Meter coupling lever
14 Power connector cover (0 814)
15 Connector for external microphones (0 808)
16 Headphone connector 17 Accessory terminal (0 808)
18 USB connector
19 HDMI connector
2 Getting to Know the Camera
9
8
7
6 1 CPU contacts 2 Lens mount (0 25) 3 Tripod socket 4 AF coupling 5 Fn button (0 106)
1 2
10
54 3 6 Battery-chamber cover 7 Battery-chamber cover latch 8 Memory card slot cover (0 27) 9 Pv button (0 105) 10 Body cap (0 25)
Getting to Know the Camera 3
1 2 34567
22
21
20
8
19
9
18
10
17
16
11
15
12
14
13
1 Viewfinder eyepiece (0 11) 2 Rubber eyecup 3 Diopter adjustment control
(0 11) 4 Live view selector (0 40, 45) 5 a button (0 40, 45) 6 AF-ON button (0 82) 7 A button (0 82) 8 Multi selector (0 58) 9 J button (0 58) 10 Focus selector lock 11 Speaker
12 Memory card access lamp (0 27, 36)
13 i button (0 63) 14 Tilting monitor (0 5, 14) 15 R button (0 68) 16 W (Y) button (0 99) 17 X (T) button (0 95) 18 Q/g (U) button (0 86) 19 G button (0 57) 20 Charge lamp (0 816) 21 K button (0 51) 22 O (Q) button (0 56)
4 Getting to Know the Camera
D The Connector Covers Be sure to close the covers when the connectors are not in use. Foreign matter in the connectors could cause malfunction. D The Speaker Close proximity to the speaker could corrupt data stored on magnetic stripe cards or other such magnetic storage devices. Keep magnetic storage devices away from the speaker. D The Monitor The angle of the monitor can be adjusted as shown.
Getting to Know the Camera 5
D The Serial Number The product serial number is located behind the monitor.
D Tilting the Monitor · Rotate the monitor gently within the limits of the hinges. Do not use
force; failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or monitor. · Do not touch the area to the rear of the monitor. Be particularly careful not to touch the area shown. Failure to observe this precaution could cause product malfunction. · Do not allow liquid to contact the monitor's inner surface. Failure to observe this precaution could cause product malfunction. · We recommend that you keep the monitor in the storage position when not using it to frame photographs. · Do not lift or carry the camera by the monitor. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera. · When the camera is mounted on a tripod, care should be taken to ensure that the monitor does not contact the tripod.
6 Getting to Know the Camera
The Power Switch
Rotate the power switch to the "ON" position as shown to turn the camera on. Returning the switch to the "OFF" position turns the camera off. D The LCD Illuminator
Rotating the power switch to D activates the control panel backlight (LCD illuminator). The backlight will remain lit for a few seconds after the power switch is released. The backlight turns off when the switch is rotated to D a second time or the shutter is released.
Getting to Know the Camera 7
The Control Panel
The following indicators appear in the control panel at default settings. For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed, see "Camera Displays" (0 773) in "Technical Notes".
1
2
3
10
4
5
98
1 Shutter speed
2 Aperture
3 Memory card icon (Slot 1; 0 34)
4 Memory card icon (Slot 2; 0 34)
5 "k" (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures; 0 34)
7
6
6 Number of exposures remaining (0 34, 861)
7 ISO sensitivity (0 91)
8 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 91) Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 93)
9 Battery indicator (0 33)
10 Metering (0 99)
D Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery inserted, the control panel will display a memory card icon and the number of exposures remaining. In rare instances, some memory cards may not display the memory card icon and number of exposures remaining when the camera is off, even if a battery is inserted. This information will be displayed when the camera is turned on.
8 Getting to Know the Camera
The Viewfinder
The following indicators appear in the viewfinder at default settings. For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed, see "Camera Displays" (0 773) in "Technical Notes".
1
2
34
56 7
1 AF area brackets (0 36 2 Metering (0 99) 3 Shutter speed 4 Aperture 5 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 91) 6 ISO sensitivity (0 91)
8
9
7 Number of exposures remaining (0 34, 861)
8 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 93)
9 "k" (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures; 0 34)
Getting to Know the Camera 9
D The Viewfinder When the battery is exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display in the viewfinder will dim. The display will return to normal when a charged battery is inserted. D Temperature Extremes The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature, and response times may drop when the temperature is low; the displays will return to normal at room temperature. D Cover the Viewfinder · When taking photos without your eye to the viewfinder, attach the
supplied eyepiece cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder appearing in photographs or interfering with exposure. · Remove the rubber eyecup (q) and insert the supplied eyepiece cap as shown (w). Hold the camera firmly when removing the rubber eyepiece cup.
10 Getting to Know the Camera
A The Diopter Adjustment Control With your eye to the viewfinder, rotate the diopter control until display in the viewfinder is in sharp focus.
Viewfinder not in focus
Viewfinder in focus
Getting to Know the Camera 11
The Live View Displays (Photos/Movies)
Press the a button to display the view through the lens in the monitor. Rotate the live view selector to C to take photographs or to 1 to record movies.
Live View Photography
The following indicators appear in the monitor at default settings. For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed, see "Camera Displays" in "Technical Notes" (0 773).
12
34 5 6 7 8
9
10 21
11
12
20 13
19 18 17 16 15 14
1 Shooting mode (0 71)
7 White balance (0 86)
2 AF-area brackets (0 40)
8 Image area
3 Autofocus mode (0 76)
9 Image size (0 97)
4 AF-area mode (0 78)
10 Image quality (0 95)
5 Active D-Lighting
11 i icon (0 63)
6 Set Picture Control
12 Subject tracking AF
12 Getting to Know the Camera
13 "k" (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures; 0 34)
14 Number of exposures remaining (0 34, 861)
15 ISO sensitivity (0 91)
16 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 91) Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 93)
17 Aperture 18 Shutter speed 19 Metering (0 99) 20 Battery indicator (0 33) 21 Touch shooting (0 14, 65)
Movies
1
2 3 9
8 7 6
1 Recording indicator (0 45) "No movie" indicator
2 Time remaining (0 45)
3 Frame size and rate/image quality
4 Release mode (still photography; 0 73)
5
4
5 Subject tracking AF 6 Sound level (0 45)
7 Microphone sensitivity
8 Frequency response 9 AF-area brackets (0 45)
Getting to Know the Camera 13
Touch Controls
· The touch-sensitive monitor offers a variety of controls that can be operated by touching the display with your fingers.
· Touch controls can be used to: - Focus and release the shutter (0 14) - Adjust settings (0 15) - View pictures (0 16) - View movies (0 17) - Access the i menu (0 18) - Enter text (0 18) - Navigate the menus (0 19)
Focusing and Releasing the Shutter
· Touch the monitor during live view to focus on the selected point (touch AF).
· During still photography, the shutter will be released when you lift your finger from the display (touch shutter).
· Touch AF settings can be adjusted by tapping the W icon.
14 Getting to Know the Camera
Adjusting Settings
· Tap highlighted settings in the display. · You can then choose the desired
option by tapping icons or sliders. · Tap Z or press J to select the chosen
option and return to the previous display.
Getting to Know the Camera 15
Playback
· Flick left or right to view other pictures during full-frame playback.
· In full-frame playback, touching the bottom of the display brings up a frame-advance bar. Slide your finger left or right over the bar to scroll rapidly to other pictures.
· To zoom in on a picture displayed in full-frame playback, use a stretch gesture or give the display two quick taps. After zooming in, you can adjust the zoom ratio using stretch gestures to zoom in and pinch gestures to zoom out.
16 Getting to Know the Camera
· Use slide gestures to view other parts of the image during zoom.
· Giving the display two quick taps while zoom is in effect cancels zoom.
· To "zoom out" to a thumbnail view, use a pinch gesture in full-frame playback. Use pinch and stretch to choose the number of images displayed from 4, 9, and 72 frames.
· Using a pinch gesture when 72 frames are displayed selects calendar playback. Use a stretch gesture to return to the 72-frame display.
Viewing Movies
· Movies are indicated by a 1 icon; to start playback, tap the on-screen guide.
· Tap the display to pause. Tap again to resume.
· Tap Z to exit to full-frame playback.
Getting to Know the Camera 17
The i Menu
· Tapping the i icon during live view displays the i menu (0 63).
· Tap items to view options.
Text Entry
· When a keyboard is displayed, you can enter text by tapping the keys.
1 Text display area
1
2 Keyboard area
2
3 Keyboard selection
3
· To position the cursor, tap e or f or tap directly in the text display area.
· To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards, tap the keyboard selection button.
18 Getting to Know the Camera
Navigating the Menus
· After pressing the G button to display the menus, you can slide up or down to scroll.
· Tap a menu icon to choose a menu.
· Tap menu items to display options. You can then choose the desired option by tapping icons or sliders.
· To exit without changing settings, tap Z.
Getting to Know the Camera 19
D The Touch Screen · The touch screen responds to static electricity. It may not respond when
touched with fingernails or gloved hands. · Do not touch the screen with sharp objects. · Do not use excessive force. · The screen may not respond when covered with third-party protective
films. · The screen may not respond when touched simultaneously in multiple
locations. A Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the [Touch controls] item in the setup menu.
20 Getting to Know the Camera
First Steps
Readying the Camera
Attaching the Strap
To attach a strap (whether the supplied strap or one that has been purchased separately):
First Steps 21
Charging the Battery
Charge the supplied EN-EL15b battery in the supplied MH-25a battery charger before use. Insert the battery and plug the charger in (depending on the country or region, the charger comes with either an AC wall adapter or a power cable). · AC wall adapter: After inserting the AC wall adapter into the
charger AC inlet (q), slide the AC wall adapter latch as shown (w) and rotate the adapter 90 ° to fix it in place (e).
· Power cable: After connecting the power cable with the plug in the orientation shown, insert the battery and plug the cable in.
· An exhausted battery will fully charge in about two hours and 35 minutes.
Battery charging (flashes) Charging complete (steady)
22 First Steps
D The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions in "For Your Safety" (0 xxxviii) and "Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions" (0 832). D If the CHARGE Lamp Flashes Rapidly If the CHARGE lamp flashes rapidly (8 times a second): · A battery charging error has occurred: Unplug the charger and
remove and reinsert the battery. · The ambient temperature is too hot or too cold: Use the battery
charger at temperatures within the designated temperature range (0 40 °C). If the problem persists, unplug the charger and end charging. Bring the battery and charger to a Nikon-authorized service representative.
First Steps 23
Inserting the Battery
· Turn the camera off before inserting or removing the battery. · Using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to
one side, slide the battery into the battery chamber until the latch locks it in place.
Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off and open the battery-chamber cover. Press the battery latch in the direction shown to release the battery and then remove the battery by hand.
24 First Steps
Attaching a Lens
· The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR.
· Be careful to prevent dust entering the camera. · Confirm that the camera is off before attaching the lens.
- Remove the camera body cap (q, w) and rear lens cap (e, r).
- Align the mounting marks on the camera (t) and lens (y).
First Steps 25
- Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place (u, i).
· Remove the lens cap before taking pictures. D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 791), lock
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).
Detaching Lenses
· After turning the camera off, press and hold the lens release button (q) while turning the lens in the direction shown (w).
· After removing the lens, replace the lens caps and camera body cap.
26 First Steps
Inserting Memory Cards
· Turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards.
· The camera has two memory card slots: Slot 1 (q) and Slot 2 (w). If you are using only one memory card, insert it into Slot 1.
· Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it straight into the slot until it clicks into place.
Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn the camera off and open the memory card slot cover. Press the card in to eject it (q); the card can then be removed by hand (w).
First Steps 27
D Memory Cards · Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera. · Do not perform the following operations during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer or other device. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card. - Do not remove or insert memory cards - Do not turn the camera off - Do not remove the battery - Do not disconnect AC adapters · Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects. · Do not use excessive force when handling memory cards. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card. · Do not bend or drop memory cards or subject them to strong physical shocks. · Do not expose memory cards to water, heat, or direct sunlight. · Do not format memory cards in a computer. D No Memory Card Inserted If no memory card is inserted, the exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder will show S. If the camera is turned off with a battery and no memory card inserted, S will be displayed in the control panel.
28 First Steps
16GB
D The Write Protect Switch · SD memory cards are equipped
with a write-protect switch. Sliding the switch to the "lock" position write-protects the card, protecting the data it contains. · If you attempt to release the shutter while a write-protected card is inserted, a warning will be displayed and no picture will be recorded. Unlock the memory card before attempting to take or delete pictures.
First Steps 29
Camera Setup
Choose a language and set the camera clock. Pictures cannot be taken nor settings adjusted until the clock is set.
1 Turn the camera on.
When the camera is turned on for the first time after purchase, a languageselection dialog will be displayed. The languages available vary with the country or region in which the camera was originally purchased. Use the multi selector and J button to navigate the menus.
Press 1 and 3 to highlight a language and press J to select. The language can be changed at any time using the [Language] item in the setup menu.
30 First Steps
2 Set the camera clock.
Use the multi selector and J button to set the camera clock.
Select time zone
Select date format
Select daylight saving time option
Set time and date (note that the camera uses a 24-hour clock)
The clock can be adjusted at any time using the [Time zone and date] > [Date and time] item in the setup menu.
First Steps 31
D The B ("Clock Not Set") Icon Flashing B icon in the control panel indicates that the camera clock has been reset. The date and time recorded with new photographs will not be correct; use the [Time zone and date] > [Date and time] item in the setup menu to set the clock to the correct time and date. The camera clock is powered by an independent clock battery. The clock battery charges when the main battery is inserted or the camera is powered by an optional power connector and AC adapter. It takes about 2 days to charge. Once charged, it will power the clock for about a month. A SnapBridge Use the SnapBridge app to synchronize the camera clock with the clock on a smartphone or tablet (smart device). See SnapBridge online help for details.
32 First Steps
The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining
Before taking photographs, check the battery level and number of exposures remaining.
Battery Level
Check the battery level before taking photographs. The battery level is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.
Control panel L K J I
H
H (flashes)
Viewfinder -- -- -- --
d
d (flashes)
Description Battery fully charged.
Battery partially discharged.
Low battery. Charge battery or ready spare battery. Shutter release disabled. Charge or exchange battery.
First Steps 33
Memory Card Indicators and Number of Exposures Remaining
The control panel and viewfinder show the number of additional photographs that can be taken at current settings (i.e, the number of exposures remaining).
· The control panel shows the slot or slots that currently hold a memory card (the example shows the icons displayed when cards are inserted in both slots).
· At default settings, [Overflow] is selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu. When two memory cards are inserted, pictures will first be recorded to the card in Slot 1, switching to Slot 2 when the card in Slot 1 is full.
34 First Steps
· If two memory cards are inserted, the camera will show the number of additional photographs that can be recorded to the card in Slot 1. When the card in Slot 1 is full, the display will show the number of exposures remaining on the card in Slot 2.
· Values over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred. For example, values between 1400 and 1499 are shown as 1.4 k.
· If the memory card is full or locked or a card error has occurred, the icon for the affected slot will flash.
First Steps 35
Basic Photography and Playback
Taking Photographs (b Mode)
Select b (auto) mode for simple "point-and-shoot" photography. Photographs can be framed in the viewfinder (viewfinder photography) or in the monitor (live view photography).
Framing Photographs in the Viewfinder (Viewfinder Photography)
1 Pressing the mode
dial lock release on top of the camera, rotate the mode dial to b.
36 Basic Photography and Playback
2 Ready the camera.
Holding the handgrip in your right hand and cradling the camera body or lens with your left, bring your elbows in against the sides of your chest.
3 Frame the photograph.
· Frame a photograph in the viewfinder.
· Position the main subject in the AF-area brackets.
Basic Photography and Playback 37
4 Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
· The in-focus indicator (I) will appear in the viewfinder when the focus operation is complete.
Viewfinder display
Description
(steady)
The subject is in focus.
(steady)
The focus point is in front of the subject.
(steady)
The focus point is behind the subject.
(flashes)
The camera is unable to focus using autofocus.
· The active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder.
38 Basic Photography and Playback
5 Smoothly press the shutter-
release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph.
The memory card access lamp will light while the photograph is being recorded. Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete.
A The Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography) The camera uses a standby timer to help reduce the drain on the battery. The timer starts when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway and expires if no operations are performed for about 6 seconds. The viewfinder display and some indicators in the control panel turn off when the timer expires. To restart the timer and restore the displays, press the shutter-release button halfway a second time. The length of time before the standby timer expires can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer].
Standby timer on
Standby timer off
Basic Photography and Playback 39
Framing Photographs in the Monitor (Live View)
1 Pressing the mode
dial lock release on top of the camera, rotate the mode dial to b.
2 Rotate the live view selector to
C (live view photography).
3 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and live view will start. The viewfinder will go dark and the view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.
40 Basic Photography and Playback
4 Ready the camera.
Hold the handgrip securely in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left.
5 Frame the photograph.
· Position the subject near the center of the frame.
· At default settings, the camera automatically detects portrait subjects and positions the focus point over their faces or eyes.
6 Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in green. If the camera is unable to focus, for example because the subject is too close to the camera, the focus area will flash red.
Basic Photography and Playback 41
7 Press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way down to take the photograph.
The monitor turns off during shooting.
8 Press the a button to exit live
view.
42 Basic Photography and Playback
D Shooting in Live View · Although these effects are not visible in the final pictures, during live
view you may notice that: - Moving objects in the display appear distorted (individual subjects
such as trains or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is panned horizontally) - Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots are present in the display - Bright regions or bands may appear in scenes lit by flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source · Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using the [Flicker reduction] item in the movie shooting menu, although they may still be visible in photographs taken at some shutter speeds. · To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with photographs or exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 10). · When shooting in live view, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other bright light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera's internal circuitry. · Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire during live view.
Basic Photography and Playback 43
D The Count Down Display A count down will appear in the top left corner of the display approximately 30 s before live view ends automatically. · If the timer has been triggered by Custom Setting c4 [Monitor off
delay], the count down will be displayed in black starting 30 s before the timer expires, switching to red when there are only 5 s to go. If [No limit] is selected for [Monitor off delay] > [Live view], the camera may nevertheless terminate live view as necessary to protect its internal circuits from high temperatures and the like. · A count down will be displayed in red starting 30 s before the camera shuts down to protect its internal circuits. Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected.
A Exposure Preview (Lv) When [On] is selected for Custom Setting d9 [Exposure preview (Lv)], exposure can be previewed in the monitor during live view photography. You may find this useful when using exposure compensation or shooting in mode M. A Touch Controls Touch controls can be used in place of the shutter-release button to focus and take pictures during live view photography (0 14).
44 Basic Photography and Playback
Recording Movies (b Mode)
b (auto) mode can also be used for simple "point-and-shoot" movie recording. A "Filming" Versus "Recording"
Throughout this manual, the terms "filming" and "recording" are used as follows: "filming" is used if the live view selector is rotated to 1, while "recording" refers to the act of shooting footage using the movie-record button.
1 Pressing the mode
dial lock release on top of the camera, rotate the mode dial to b.
2 Rotate the live view selector to
1 (movie live view).
Basic Photography and Playback 45
3 Press the a button.
· The mirror will be raised and live view will start. The viewfinder will go dark and the view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.
· During live view, exposure for movies and photographs can be previewed in the monitor.
4 Press the movie-record button
to start recording.
46 Basic Photography and Playback
· A recording indicator will be displayed in the monitor. The monitor also shows the time remaining, or in other words the approximate amount of new footage that can be recorded to the memory card. 1 Recording indicator 2 Time remaining
· Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
· Focus can be adjusted by tapping your subject in the monitor.
5 Press the movie-record button
again to end recording.
6 Press the a button to exit live
view.
Basic Photography and Playback 47
D Recording Movies · When filming movies, you may notice the following in the display. These
phenomena will also be visible in any footage recorded with the camera. - Flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent,
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps - Distortion associated with motion (individual subjects such as trains
or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is panned horizontally) - Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots in the display - Bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source - Flicker occurring while power aperture is in use · Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you use the X (T) button to zoom in on the view through the lens during filming. · Movie recording will end automatically if: - The maximum length is reached - The live view selector is rotated to another setting - The lens is removed · When recording movies, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera's internal circuitry.
48 Basic Photography and Playback
· Sounds made by the camera may be audible in footage recorded: - During autofocus - When power aperture is used - During aperture adjustment - With vibration reduction enabled on vibration reduction (VR) lenses
· If the sound level is displayed in red, the volume is too high. Adjust microphone sensitivity.
D The Count-Down Display · A count-down timer will be displayed in the top left corner of the
monitor 30 s before movie recording ends automatically. · Depending on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately
when movie recording begins. · Note that regardless of the time available (displayed in the top right
corner of the monitor), filming will end automatically when the countdown timer expires. D Adjusting Settings During Movie Recording · Headphone volume cannot be adjusted during recording. · If an option other than I (microphone off) is currently selected, microphone sensitivity can be changed while recording is in progress. I cannot be selected.
A Focusing During Movie Recording Focus can also be adjusted by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.
Basic Photography and Playback 49
Taking Photos During Filming
Photos can be taken during filming by pressing the shutter-release button all the way down. The resulting photo will have an aspect ratio of 16:9. · A C icon will flash in the display when
a photo is taken. · Photos can be taken while recording is
in progress. Taking photos does not interrupt movie recording.
D Taking Photos During Filming · Up to 40 photographs can be taken with each movie. · Note that photos can be taken even when the subject is not in focus. · Photos are recorded at the dimensions currently selected for movie
frame size. · Photos are recorded in [JPEG finem] format, regardless of the option
selected for image quality. · The frame advance rate for continuous release modes varies with the
option selected for [Frame size/frame rate]. While recording is in progress, only one photo will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed. · Photographs taken during filming will not be displayed automatically after shooting even if [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu.
50 Basic Photography and Playback
Playback
Press the K button to view photos and movies recorded with the camera.
1 Press the K button.
· A picture will be displayed in the monitor.
· The memory card containing the picture currently displayed is shown by an icon.
2 Press 4 or 2 to view
additional pictures.
· Additional pictures can also be viewed by flicking a finger left or right over the display (0 14).
· To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the shutter-release button halfway.
Basic Photography and Playback 51
A Image Review When [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu, pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting without the user pressing the K button.
52 Basic Photography and Playback
Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon. Tap the a icon in the display or press J to start playback (a progress bar shows your approximate position in the movie).
1 1 icon 2 Length 3 a icon 4 Current position/total length 5 Progress bar 6 Volume 7 Guide
Basic Photography and Playback 53
Movie Playback Operations
To Pause Resume
Rewind/ advance
Start slowmotion playback Jog rewind/ advance
Skip 10 s Skip to last or first frame
Description Press 3 to pause playback. Press J to resume playback when playback is paused or during rewind/advance. · Press 4 to rewind, 2 to
advance. Speed increases with each press, from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×. · Keep 4 or 2 pressed to skip respectively to the first frame or last frame. · The first frame is indicated by a h in the top right corner of the display, the last frame by a i.
Press 3 while the movie is paused to start slowmotion playback.
· Press 4 or 2 while the movie is paused to rewind or advance one frame at a time.
· Keep 4 or 2 pressed for continuous rewind or advance.
Rotate the main command dial one stop to skip ahead or back 10 s.
If the movie contains no indices, you can skip to the first or last frame by rotating the sub-command dial.
54 Basic Photography and Playback
To
Description
Skip to index
If the movie contains indices, rotating the subcommand dial takes you to the next or previous index. · Indices can be added or removed from the [EDIT
MOVIE] menu, which can be displayed by pausing playback and pressing the i button.
Adjust volume
Press X (T) to increase volume, W (Y) to decrease.
Trim movie
To display the [EDIT MOVIE] menu, pause playback and press the i button.
Exit
Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
Exit to
Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit
shooting mode playback and return to shooting mode.
A Indices Indices can be added when playback is paused by pressing the i button and selecting [Add index]. You can quickly jump to indexed locations during playback and editing. The presence of indices is indicated by a p icon in the full-frame playback display.
Basic Photography and Playback 55
Deleting Unwanted Pictures
Pictures can be deleted as described below. Note that once deleted, pictures cannot be recovered.
1 Display the picture.
· Press the K button to start playback and press 4 or 2 until the desired picture is displayed.
· The location of the current image is shown by an icon at the bottom left corner of the display.
2 Delete the picture
· Press the O (Q) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press the O (Q) button again to delete the image and return to playback.
· To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
56 Basic Photography and Playback
Camera Controls
The G Button
Press the G button to view the menus.
1
1 D PLAYBACK MENU
2
2 C PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
3 4
3 1 MOVIE SHOOTING MENU
5
9
4 A CUSTOM SETTING MENU
6 7
5 B SETUP MENU
8
6 N RETOUCH MENU
7 O MY MENU/ m RECENT SETTINGS *
8 d Help icon
9 Current settings
* You can choose the menu displayed. The default is [MY MENU].
Camera Controls 57
Using the Menus
You can navigate the menus using the multi selector and J button.
1 Move cursor up 2 Select highlighted item 3 Display sub-menu, select
highlighted item, or move cursor right 4 Move cursor down 5 Cancel and return to previous menu, or move cursor left
1 Highlight the icon for the current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu.
2 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
58 Camera Controls
3 Position the cursor in the selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu.
4 Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item.
5 Display options.
Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item.
Camera Controls 59
6 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option.
7 Select the highlighted option.
· Press J. · To exit without making a selection,
press the G button. · To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
60 Camera Controls
D Grayed-Out Items Some items and menu options may be unavailable depending on the mode and camera state. Unavailable items are displayed in gray and cannot be selected.
D Text Entry A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required.
1 Text display area
1
2 Keyboard area
2
3 Keyboard selection
3
· Enter characters at the current cursor position by highlighting them with the multi selector and pressing J.
· To move the cursor left or right in the text display area, rotate the main command dial.
· To cycle through the upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards, highlight the keyboard selection icon and press J. The keyboard selection icon may not be available in some cases.
· If a character is entered when the text display area is full, the rightmost character will be deleted.
· To delete the character under the cursor, press the O (Q) button. · To complete entry, press X (T). · To exit without completing text entry, press G.
Camera Controls 61
A The d (Help) Icon · Where available, a description of the currently-selected item can be
viewed by pressing the Q/g (U) button.
· Press 1 or 3 to scroll. · Press Q/g (U) again to return to the menus. A Touch Controls You can also navigate the menus using touch controls (0 14).
62 Camera Controls
The i Button (the i Menu)
For quick access to frequently-used settings, press the i button or tap the i icon in the live-view display to view the i menu.
· Highlight items using the multi selector and press J to view options. Highlight the desired option and press J to select and return to the i menu.
· To cancel and return to the previous display, press the i button.
· Different menus are displayed during viewfinder photography, live view, and movie recording.
Camera Controls 63
D Grayed-Out Items Some items and menu options may be unavailable depending on the mode and camera status. Unavailable items are displayed in gray and cannot be selected.
A The Command Dials · The main command dial can be used to
choose the setting for the item currently highlighted in the i menu. Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by rotating the sub-command dial. · Some items can be adjusted by rotating either dial. · Press J to save changes. You can also save changes by pressing the shutter-release button halfway or highlighting another item.
64 Camera Controls
The Still Photography i Menu
Pressing the i button during still photography displays the items listed below. Highlight the desired item using the multi selector and press J to view options.
123 456
13
7 8 9 10 11 12
Viewfinder photography
14
Live view photography
1 Set Picture Control 2 Image quality 3 Flash mode 4 Wi-Fi connection 5 Autofocus mode 6 Choose image area 1 7 White balance
8 Image size 9 Metering 10 Active D-Lighting 11 AF-area mode 12 Custom controls 1 13 Negative digitizer 2 14 Exposure preview 2
1 Displayed during viewfinder photography only. 2 Displayed during live view photography only.
A Customize i Menu Choose the items displayed in the i menus. Use Custom Settings f1 [Customize i menu] and f2 [Customize i menu (Lv)] to choose the items displayed in viewfinder and live photography, respectively.
Camera Controls 65
The Movie i Menu
Pressing the i button during movie recording displays the items listed below. Highlight the desired item using the multi selector and press J to view options.
123 456
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 Set Picture Control 2 Frame size and rate/Image
quality 3 Wind noise reduction 4 Wi-Fi connection 5 Autofocus mode 6 Destination
7 White balance 8 Microphone sensitivity 9 Metering 10 Active D-Lighting 11 AF-area mode 12 Electronic VR
A Customize i Menu Use Custom Setting g1 [Customize i menu] to choose the items displayed in the movie i menu.
66 Camera Controls
The Playback i Menu
Pressing the i button during playback displays a contextsensitive i menu of frequently-used playback options.
Photo playback
Movie playback
Movie playback paused
Camera Controls 67
The R Button
Use the R button to view shooting information or choose the indicators displayed.
Viewfinder Photography
During viewfinder photography, you can press the R button to view an information display in the monitor. The display lists such data as shutter speed, aperture, number of exposures remaining, and AF-area mode.
68 Camera Controls
Live View Photography
Use the R button to cycle through the following displays:
Live View Selector Rotated to C
1 Indicators on 2 Simplified display 3 Histogram * 4 Virtual horizon * Displayed when [On] is selected for Custom Setting d9 [Exposure Preview (Lv)] in mode P, S, A, or M. Not displayed if [On] is selected for [Multiple exposure] > [Overlay shooting] in the photo shooting menu.
Camera Controls 69
Live View Selector Rotated to 1
1 Indicators on 2 Simplified display 3 Histogram 4 Virtual horizon
70 Camera Controls
The Mode Dial
Use the mode dial to choose a shooting mode. Choose whether to adjust shutter speed and/or aperture manually or leave the camera in charge.
Camera Controls 71
Using the Mode Dial
Press the mode dial lock release and rotate the mode dial to choose from the following modes:
Mode
Description
b Auto
A simple, "point-and-shoot" mode that leaves the camera in charge of settings (0 36, 45).
P
Programmed The camera sets shutter speed and aperture
auto
for optimal exposure.
S
Shutter-
You choose the shutter speed; the camera
priority auto selects the aperture for best results.
A
Aperture-
You choose the aperture; the camera selects
priority auto the shutter speed for best results.
M Manual
You control both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed to "bulb" or "time" for long time-exposures.
U1/U2
User settings modes
Assign frequently-used settings to these positions. The settings can be recalled simply by rotating the mode dial.
EFCT
Special effects mode
Take pictures with added special effects.
72 Camera Controls
The Release Mode Dial
Rotate the release mode dial to choose the operation performed when the shutter is released.
Choosing a Release Mode
Press the release mode dial lock release on top of the camera and rotate the release mode dial.
Mode
Description
S
Single frame
The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
At default settings, the camera takes photos at
up to 3 fps while the shutter-release button is
pressed.
CL
Continuous low speed
· The frame advance rate can be chosen using Custom Setting d1 [CL mode shooting speed]. Choose from values of from 1 to 6 fps.
Note, however, that regardless of the option
selected, the maximum frame advance rate
during live view is 3 fps.
Camera Controls 73
Mode
CH
Continuous high speed
Quiet Q shutter-
release
Quiet
QC
continuous shutter-
release
E Self-timer
MUP Mirror up
Description The camera takes photos at up to 7 fps while the shutter-release button is pressed. · When [On] is selected for [Silent live view
photography] in the photo shooting menu during live view, the frame advance rate varies with the option selected for [NEF (RAW) recording] > [NEF (RAW) bit depth] in the photo shooting menu, increasing to a maximum of approximately 8 fps when [14bit] is selected or approximately 12 fps when [12-bit] is selected.
As for single frame except that camera noise is reduced.
The camera takes pictures at up to 3 fps while the shutter-release button is pressed; camera noise is reduced.
Take pictures with the self-timer. The mirror is raised before shooting to minimize blur caused by camera shake.
74 Camera Controls
The Focus-Mode Selector
Choose AF for autofocus, M for manual focus.
Camera Controls 75
The AF-Mode Button
Choose the AF and AF-area modes. The AF mode determines how the camera focuses in autofocus mode, the AF-area mode how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus.
76 Camera Controls
Choosing an AF Mode
Hold the AF-mode button and rotate the main command dial. The options available vary with camera settings.
Option
Description
AF-A
[AF mode auto-switch]
The camera uses AF-S when photographing stationary subjects and AF-C when photographing subjects that are in motion. · This option is available only during still
photography.
AF-S [Single AF]
Use with stationary subjects. Focus locks while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
AF-C
[Continuous AF]
For moving subjects. The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to changes in the distance to the subject while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
AF-F
The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. When the shutter-release button is [Full-time AF] pressed halfway, the focus point will turn from red to green and focus will lock. · This option is available only during movie
recording.
Camera Controls 77
Choosing an AF-Area Mode
Hold the AF-mode button and rotate the sub-command dial. The options available vary with the AF mode.
Viewfinder Photography
Option
Description
[Single-point The camera focuses on a point selected by the user.
AF]
· Use with stationary subjects.
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user; if
[Dynamic-area the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the AF (9 points)]/ camera will focus based on information from [Dynamic-area surrounding focus points. This option is available when AF (21 points)]/ AF-A or AF-C is selected for AF mode. [Dynamic-area · Choose for subjects that move unpredictably. The AF (51 points)] greater the number of focus points, the wider the
area used for focus.
78 Camera Controls
Option
Description
[3D-tracking]
The user selects the focus point; while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway, the camera will track subjects that leave the selected focus point and select new focus points as required. This option is available when AF-A or AF-C is selected for AF mode. · Use for subjects that are moving erratically from side
to side (e.g., tennis players).
[Group-area AF]
The camera focuses using a group of focus points selected by the user. Priority is given to faces detected by the camera, if any. · Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion,
and other subjects that are difficult to photograph using [Single-point AF].
[Auto-area AF]
The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus point. If a face is detected, the camera will give priority to the portrait subject.
Camera Controls 79
Live View
Option
3 [Pinpoint AF]
d [Singlepoint AF]
f [Wide-area AF (S)]
g [Wide-area AF (L)]
e [Dynamicarea AF]
Description
With a focus area smaller than that employed for [Single-point AF], pinpoint AF is used for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame. · It is recommended for shots involving static
subjects, such as buildings, in-studio product photography, and close-ups. · This option is available only when AF-S is selected as the AF mode for still photography.
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. · Use with stationary subjects.
As for [Single-point AF], except the camera focuses on a wider area. · Choose for snapshots, subjects that are in motion,
and other subjects that are difficult to photograph using [Single-point AF].
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points. · Use for photographs of athletes and other active
subjects that are hard to frame using [Single-point AF]. · This option is available only when AF-A or AF-C is selected as the AF mode for still photography.
80 Camera Controls
Option
h
[Auto-area AF]
Description
The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. · Use on occasions when you don't have time to
select the focus point yourself, for portraits, or for snapshots and other spur-of-the-moment photos. · If a portrait subject is detected during live view photography, an amber border indicating the focus point will appear around the subject's face. If the camera detects the subject's eyes, the amber border will instead appear around an eye (face/eye-detection AF).
Manual Focus-Point Selection
When an option other than [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode, you can select the focus point manually. Press the multi selector up, down, left, or right (1342) or diagonally to select the focus point.
A Locking Focus-Point Selection Focus-point selection can be locked by rotating the focus selector lock to the "L" position. Focus-point selection can be reenabled by rotating the lock to I.
Camera Controls 81
The AF-ON Button
The AF-ON button can be used for focus in autofocus mode. · You can choose the role assigned to
the AF-ON button. Use Custom Settings f3 [Custom controls] and g2 [Custom controls] in the Custom Settings menu to choose the roles played by the button during photography and movie recording, respectively.
The A Button
Press the A (AE-L/AF-L) button to lock focus and exposure for photographs taken using autofocus. · You can choose the role assigned to
the A button. Use Custom Settings f3 [Custom controls] and g2 [Custom controls] in the Custom Settings menu to choose the roles played by the button during photography and movie recording, respectively.
82 Camera Controls
Exposure (AE) Lock
Exposure lock can be used to recompose shots after metering a subject that will not be in the selected focus area in the final composition. Exposure lock is particularly effective when [Spot metering] or [Center-weighted metering] is selected for metering.
Focus Lock
Use focus lock to lock focus on the current subject when AF-A or AF-C is selected for AF mode. When using focus lock, choose an AF-area mode other than [Auto-area AF].
Locking Focus and Exposure
1 Position the subject in the selected focus point
and press the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure.
Camera Controls 83
2 With the shutter-release button pressed halfway
(q), press the A button (w).
· Focus and exposure will lock while the A button is pressed. Exposure will not change even when the composition is altered.
· An AE-L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder or monitor.
3 Keeping the A button pressed,
recompose the photograph.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject. If the distance to the subject changes, release the lock and focus again at the new distance.
84 Camera Controls
A Locking Focus When AF-S Is Selected for AF Mode Focus will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus will also lock while the A button is pressed. A Using the Shutter-Release Button for Exposure Lock If [On (half press)] is selected for Custom Setting c1 [Shutter-release button AE-L], exposure will lock while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. A Taking Multiple Shots at the Same Focus Distance · Focus will remain locked if you keep the A button pressed between
shots, allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting. · Focus will also remain locked if you keep the shutter-release button pressed halfway between shots.
Camera Controls 85
The Q/g (U) Button
The Q/g (U) button can be used during shooting to adjust white balance. White balance delivers natural colors with light sources of different hues. D The Q/g (U) Button
The Q/g (U) button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain conditions apply.
Adjusting White Balance
Hold the Q/g (U) button and rotate the main command dial.
86 Camera Controls
Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by holding the Q/g (U) button and rotating the sub-command dial.
If coordinates are displayed as shown, you can hold the Q/g (U) button and fine-tune white balance using the multi selector. · Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune white
balance on the amber-blue axis and 1 or 3 to fine-tune white balance on the green-magenta axis.
· When [Choose color temperature] is selected, you can press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit. Press 1 or 3 to change.
· Release the Q/g (U) button to return to shooting mode.
Camera Controls 87
Option
Description
4 [Auto]
White balance is adjusted automatically for optimal results with most light sources.
i [Keep white (reduce Eliminate the warm color cast produced
warm colors)]
by incandescent lighting.
j [Keep overall
Partially preserve the warm color cast
atmosphere]
produced by incandescent lighting.
k [Keep warm lighting Preserve the warm color cast produced
colors]
by incandescent lighting.
D [Natural light auto]
When used under natural light in place of 4 ([Auto]), this option produces colors closer to those seen by the naked eye.
H [Direct sunlight]
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
G [Cloudy]
Use in daylight under overcast skies.
M [Shade]
Use in daylight with subjects in shade.
J [Incandescent]
Use under incandescent lighting.
88 Camera Controls
Option I [Fluorescent]
[Sodium-vapor lamps] [Warm-white fluorescent] [White fluorescent] [Cool-white fluorescent] [Day white fluorescent] [Daylight fluorescent] [High temp. mercuryvapor]
5 [Flash]
K [Choose color temperature]
L [Preset manual]
Description
Use under fluorescent lighting; choose the bulb type according to the light source.
Use with studio strobe lighting and other large flash units. Choose the color temperature directly. Measure white balance for the subject or light source or copy white balance from an existing photograph.
Camera Controls 89
A Protecting Pictures from Deletion During playback, the Q/g (U) button can be used to protect pictures. Protecting pictures helps prevent accidental deletion. A Viewing Help Where available, a description of the currently-selected item can be viewed by pressing the Q/g (U) button (0 62).
90 Camera Controls
The S (Q) Button
Use the S (Q) button to adjust the camera's sensitivity to light (ISO sensitivity). The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing faster shutter speeds or smaller apertures. You also have the option of enabling auto ISO sensitivity control, which automatically adjusts sensitivity if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the setting selected by the user.
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity
Hold the S (Q) button and rotate the main command dial.
· Choose from values of from ISO 100 to 51200. Settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0.3 to 2 EV above ISO 51200 are also available.
· In addition to settings of from ISO 100 to 51200, b and all EFCT modes other than j also offer an X ([Auto]) option. When X is selected, the camera adjusts ISO sensitivity automatically.
Camera Controls 91
D High ISO Sensitivities The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur when the subject is in motion. Note, however, that the higher the sensitivity, the more likely the image is to be affected by "noise" in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines.
92 Camera Controls
Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
In P, S, A, and M modes, you can hold the S (Q) button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose whether the camera will automatically adjust ISO sensitivity if the desired exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected by the user. · When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled, ISO AUTO
indicators will appear in the control panel and viewfinder. When these indicators are lit (not flashing), pictures will be taken at the sensitivity selected for [ISO sensitivity]. When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user, the ISO AUTO indicators will flash and the altered value will be shown in the displays.
A Maximum Sensitivity In modes P, S, A, and M, you can select an upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control to prevent ISO sensitivity being raised too high. The maximum ISO sensitivity can be selected using the [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] > [Maximum sensitivity] item in the photo shooting menu.
Camera Controls 93
The E Button
Use the E (exposure compensation) button to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera. Exposure compensation can be used to make pictures brighter or darker.
-1 EV
No exposure compensation
+1 EV
D The E Button The E button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain
conditions apply.
Adjusting Exposure Compensation
Hold the E button and rotate the main command dial.
· Higher values make the subject brighter, lower values darker. · Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
94 Camera Controls
The X (T) Button
The X (T) button is used to adjust image quality and choose the size of JPEG images.
Adjusting Image Quality
During viewfinder photography, image quality can be adjusted by holding the X (T) button and rotating the main command dial.
Camera Controls 95
Option
Description
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG finem]
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine] Record two copies of each photo: an NEF
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG
(RAW) image and a JPEG copy. For the
normalm]
JPEG copy, you can choose from options
prioritizing image quality or file size.
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal] Options with a star ("m") prioritize image
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG basicm] quality, those without a star ("m") file size.
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic]
[NEF (RAW)]
Record photos in NEF (RAW) format.
[JPEG finem]
[JPEG fine] [JPEG normalm] [JPEG normal] [JPEG basicm] [JPEG basic]
Record photos in JPEG format. Image quality increases as quality progress from basic through normal to fine. Options with a star ("m") prioritize image quality, those without a star ("m") file size.
96 Camera Controls
Choosing an Image Size
During viewfinder photography, image size can be adjusted by holding the X (T) button and rotating the sub-command dial.
Choose from [Large], [Medium], and [Small]; the selected option applies to JPEG photos. The physical dimensions of the photos in pixels varies with image area.
Image area
[Large]
Image size [Medium]
[Small]
[FX (36×24)] [DX (24×16)]
6048×4024 3936×2624
4528×3016 2944×1968
3024×2016 1968×1312
[1:1 (24×24)] [16:9 (36×20)]
4016×4016 6048×3400
3008×3008 4528×2544
2000×2000 3024×1696
Camera Controls 97
A Zoom Preview (Live View Photography) Press the X (T) button to zoom in on the view through the lens in the monitor. · The zoom ratio increases each time the X (T) button is pressed; to
zoom out, press W (Y). · While the view through the lens is zoomed in,
a navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display. · Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor. · During live view photography, image quality and size can be adjusted using the [Image quality] and [Image size] items in the photo shooting menu.
98 Camera Controls
The W (Y) Button
Use the W (Y) button to choose how the camera meters light when setting exposure. D The W (Y) Button
The W (Y) button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain conditions apply.
Choosing a Metering Option
Hold the W (Y) button and rotate the main command dial.
Camera Controls 99
Option
Description
L
[Matrix metering]
Matrix metering is adapted to a wide range of subjects. It produces natural-looking results.
The camera assigns the greatest weight to the
M [Center-weighted center of the frame. It can be used with
metering]
subjects that dominate the composition, for
example.
N [Spot metering]
The camera meters a circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter (approximately 1.5% of frame). Use for example to meter a specific area of the frame when your subject is backlit or features sharply contrasting areas.
[Highlightt weighted
metering]
The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on stage.
100 Camera Controls
The N (Y) Button
Use the N (Y) button to adjust flash mode and compensation when using optional flash units. Flash mode determines the effect produced by the flash, flash compensation the flash level. D The N (Y) Button
The N (Y) button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain conditions apply.
Choosing a Flash Mode
Hold the N (Y) button and rotate the main command dial.
Camera Controls 101
Option
[Fill flash] I (front-curtain
sync)
[Red-eye J reduction]
(red-eye reduction)
L
[Slow sync] (slow sync)
[Slow sync + K red-eye] (red-
eye reduction with slow sync) [Rear-curtain M sync] (rearcurtain sync)
s [Flash off]
Description
Shooting mode
This mode is recommended for most situations.
b, P, S, A, M, EFCT (j and m excluded)
The flash fires before the photograph is taken, reducing "redeye".
b, P, S, A, M, EFCT (j and m excluded)
As for "fill flash", except that slow
shutter speeds are used to capture background lighting at night or
P, A
under low light.
As for "red-eye reduction", except
that slow shutter speeds are used to capture background lighting at
P, A
night or under low light.
The flash fires just before the shutter closes.
P, S, A, M
The flash does not fire.
b, P, S, A, M, EFCT
102 Camera Controls
Adjusting Flash Compensation
Hold the N (Y) button and rotate the sub-command dial.
· Choose positive values for brighter lighting, negative values to ensure that the subject is not too brightly lit.
· Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
Camera Controls 103
The BKT Button
Use the BKT button to choose the bracketing increment and number of shots in the bracketing program. Bracketing is used to vary exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active D-Lighting (ADL) over a series of shots. · The role performed by the BKT button can be chosen using
Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls]. D The BKT Button
The BKT button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain conditions apply.
104 Camera Controls
The Pv Button
To stop the lens down to the selected aperture and preview depth of field during shooting, press and hold the Pv button. · Optional flash units compatible with
the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS) will emit a modeling flash. The modeling flash can be disabled by selecting [Off] for Custom Setting e5 [Modeling flash]. · You can choose the role assigned to the Pv button. Use Custom Settings f3 [Custom controls] and g2 [Custom controls] in the Custom Settings menu to choose the roles played by the button during photography and movie recording, respectively. D The Pv Button
The Pv button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain conditions apply.
Camera Controls 105
The Fn Button
Use the Fn button for quick access to selected settings. · The assigned setting can be adjusted
by holding the Fn button and rotating the command dials. In some cases, adjustments can be made using both the main and sub-command dials. · Use Custom Settings f3 [Custom controls] and g2 [Custom controls] in the Custom Settings menu to choose the roles played by the Fn button during photography and movie recording, respectively. · The default assignment for the Fn button is [Choose image area]. D The Fn Button
The Fn button may be disabled in some shooting modes or when certain conditions apply.
106 Camera Controls
Shooting Settings
Choosing a Shooting Mode
Keeping the mode dial lock release pressed, rotate the mode dial to choose from the following modes:
Mode
Description
b
Auto (0
36, 45)
A simple, "point-and-shoot" mode that leaves the camera in charge of settings.
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for
P
Programmed optimal exposure. Recommended for auto (0 109) snapshots and in other situations in which
there is little time to adjust camera settings.
Shutter-
User chooses shutter speed; camera selects
S priority auto aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur
(0 110)
motion.
Shooting Settings 107
Mode
Description
A
Aperturepriority auto (0 111)
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter speed for best results. Use to blur background or bring both foreground and background into focus.
M
Manual (0 113)
User controls both shutter speed and aperture. Set shutter speed to Bulb or Time for long time-exposures.
U1/U2
User settings Assign frequently-used settings to these modes (0 115) positions for quick recall.
EFCT
Special effects mode (0 119)
Take pictures with added special effects.
D Lens Types · When using a CPU lens of a type other than G or E, lock the aperture ring
at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). · Mode A will be selected automatically if a non-CPU lens is attached in
mode P or S. "A" will appear in the information display.
108 Shooting Settings
Shooting in Modes P, S, A, and M P (Programmed Auto)
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal exposure in most situations. You also have the option of choosing different combinations of shutter speed and aperture without altering exposure ("flexible program"). A Flexible Program
Mode P offers "flexible program", in which although the camera chooses the initial shutter speed and aperture, while the standby timer is on the main command dial can be rotated to select different combinations without altering exposure from the value chosen by the camera. While flexible program is in effect, a flexible program indicator ("A") appears in the viewfinder. · To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the dial
until the flexible program indicator is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
Shooting Settings 109
S (Shutter-Priority Auto)
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure. To choose a shutter speed, rotate the main command dial while the exposure meters are on.
· Shutter speed can be set to "s" or to values between 30 s (q) and 1/8000 s (o).
110 Shooting Settings
A (Aperture-Priority Auto)
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure. To adjust aperture, rotate the sub-command dial while the exposure meters are on.
· Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens.
Shooting Settings 111
A Non-CPU Lenses Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture. If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in setup menu when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current f-number will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel, rounded to the nearest full stop. · Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops (F,
with maximum aperture displayed as F0) and the f-number must be read from the lens aperture ring.
A Depth-of-Field Preview Aperture can be stopped down by pressing and holding the Pv button. Depth of field (the range of distances that appears to be in focus) can then be previewed in the viewfinder.
112 Shooting Settings
M (Manual)
You control both shutter speed and aperture. Choose this mode for long time-exposures of such subjects as fireworks or the night sky (Bulb or Time photography, 0 170). Shutter speed and aperture can be adjusted with reference to the exposure indicators by rotating the command dials as follows while the standby timer is on: · Rotate the main command dial to choose the shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 s (o) and 30 s (q), to A (Bulb) or % (Time), or to s. · Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the sub-command dial. · The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the lens. Shutter speed:
Aperture:
Shooting Settings 113
A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture.
A Extended Shutter Speeds For shutter speeds as slow as 900 s (15 minutes), select [On] for Custom Setting d6 [Extended shutter speeds (M)].
A Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and control panel show
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current
settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b1 [EV
steps for exposure cntrl], the amount of under- or overexposure is
shown in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV.
Custom Setting b1 set to 1/3 step
Optimal exposure
Underexposed Overexposed by
by 1/3 EV
over 3 EV
Control
panel
Viewfinder
· The orientation of the exposure indicators can be reversed using Custom Setting f7 [Reverse indicators].
A Exposure Warning If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash.
114 Shooting Settings
User Settings: U1 and U2 Modes
Assign frequently-used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial.
Saving User Settings
Follow the steps below to save settings:
1 Adjust settings.
Make the desired adjustments to camera settings, including: · photo shooting menu options (some settings excluded), · movie shooting menu options (some settings excluded), · Custom Settings, and · shooting mode, shutter speed (modes S and M), aperture
(modes A and M), flexible program (mode P), exposure and flash compensation.
2 Select [Save user settings].
Press the G button to display the menus. Highlight [Save user settings] in the setup menu and press 2.
Shooting Settings 115
3 Select a position.
Highlight [Save to U1] or [Save to U2] and press 2.
4 Save user settings.
Highlight [Save settings] using 1 and 3 and press J to assign current settings to the selected user settings mode.
5 Take pictures using
saved settings.
Rotate the mode dial to U1 or U2 to recall the settings last saved to the selected position.
116 Shooting Settings
A User Settings The following cannot be saved to U1 or U2. · Photo shooting menu:
- [Storage folder] - [Image area] - [Manage Picture Control] - [Multiple exposure] - [Interval timer shooting] - [Time-lapse movie] - [Focus shift shooting] · Movie shooting menu: - [Image area] - [Manage Picture Control]
Shooting Settings 117
Resetting User Settings
To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values:
1 Select [Reset user settings].
Press the G button to display the menus. Highlight [Reset user settings] in the setup menu and press 2.
2 Select a position.
Highlight [Reset U1] or [Reset U2] and press 2.
3 Reset user settings.
Highlight [Reset] and press J to restore default settings for the selected position. The camera will function in mode P.
118 Shooting Settings
Using Special Effects Modes
Choosing an Effect
To choose an effect, rotate the mode dial to EFCT and then rotate the main command dial to choose the desired option.
Special Effects
Option j [Night vision]
Description
Use under conditions of darkness to record monochrome images at high ISO sensitivities. · Manual focus can be used if the camera is
unable to focus.
f [Super vivid]
Overall saturation and contrast are increased for a more vibrant image.
d [Pop] e [Photo
illustration]
Overall saturation is increased for a more lively image.
Sharpen outlines and simplify coloring for a poster effect. · e ([Photo illustration]) effects can be
adjusted in live view (0 122). · Movies shot in this mode play back like a slide
show made up of a series of stills.
Shooting Settings 119
Option
k
[Toy camera effect]
l [Miniature effect]
m [Selective color]
8 [Silhouette] 9 [High key] ! [Low key]
Description
Create photos and movies with saturation and peripheral illumination similar to pictures shot with a toy camera. · k ([Toy camera effect]) effects can be
adjusted in live view (0 123).
Create photos that appear to be pictures of dioramas. Works best when shooting from a high vantage point. · l ([Miniature effect]) effects can be
adjusted in live view (0 124). · Miniature effect movies play back at high
speed. · Sound is not recorded with movies.
All colors other than the selected colors are recorded in black and white. · m ([Selective color]) effects can be adjusted
in live view (0 126).
Silhouette subjects against bright backgrounds.
Use with bright scenes to create bright images that seem filled with light.
Use with dark scenes to create dark, low-key images with prominent highlights.
120 Shooting Settings
A Preventing Blur Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter speeds. A Special Effects Modes · Pictures taken in j, f, d, e, k, l, or m mode with [NEF (RAW)]
selected for image quality will be recorded at an image quality of [JPEG fine m], while in the case of pictures taken at a setting of NEF (RAW) + JPEG, only the JPEG copy will be recorded. · If [On] is selected for Custom Setting d8 [Save original (EFFECTS)], the camera will save two copies of each picture shot in f, d, e, k, l, and m modes: an unprocessed NEF(RAW) copy and a JPEG copy to which the effect has been applied. If [Off] is selected, only the JPEG copy will be saved. · Effects cannot be adjusted during movie recording. · The frame advance rates for CL (Continuous low speed) and CH (Continuous high speed) slow when e or l is selected. · In e and l modes, the live view display refresh rate will drop.
Shooting Settings 121
Adjusting e (Photo Illustration) Settings
When e is selected, the effect can be adjusted in live view:
1 Press the a button.
The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.
2 Press J.
Photo illustration options will be displayed.
3 Adjust outline thickness.
Press 4 to thin outlines or 2 to make them thicker.
4 Press J.
Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied during shooting.
122 Shooting Settings
Adjusting k (Toy Camera Effect) Settings
When k is selected, the effect can be adjusted in live view:
1 Press the a button.
The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.
2 Press J.
Toy camera effect options will be displayed.
3 Adjust options.
· Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting.
· [Vividness]: Press 2 for more saturation, 4 for less.
· [Vignetting]: Press 2 for more vignetting, 4 for less.
4 Press J.
Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied during shooting.
Shooting Settings 123
Adjusting l (Miniature Effect) Settings
When l is selected, the effect can be adjusted in live view:
1 Press the a button.
The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.
2 Position the focus point.
· Use the multi selector to position the focus point in the area that you want to be in focus.
· To check focus, press the shutterrelease button halfway.
· To temporarily clear miniature effect options from the display and enlarge the view in the monitor for precise focus, press X (T). Press W (Y) to restore the miniature effect display.
124 Shooting Settings
3 Display options.
Press J to display miniature effect options.
4 Choose the orientation and
size of the area that will be in focus. · Press 4 or 2 to choose the
orientation of the area that will be in focus. · Press 1 or 3 to choose the width of the area that will be in focus.
5 Press J.
Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied during shooting. A Movies
Miniature effect movies play back at high speed. For example, approximately 15 minutes of footage shot with 1920 × 1080/30p selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in the movie shooting menu will play back in about a minute.
Shooting Settings 125
Adjusting m (Selective Color) Settings
When m is selected, the effect can be adjusted in live view:
1 Press the a button.
The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.
2 Press J.
Selective color options will be displayed.
126 Shooting Settings
3 Select colors.
· Frame an object of the desired color in the white square at the center of the display.
· To zoom in for more precise color selection, press X (T). Press W (Y) to zoom out.
· Press 1 to choose the color of the object in the white square as one that will be recorded in color when photographs are taken; the selected color will appear in the first of the numbered color boxes.
· All colors other than those selected in the color boxes will appear in black and white.
4 Choose the color range.
Press 1 or 3 to increase or decrease the range of similar hues that will be included in photographs; choose from values between [1] and [7]. The higher the value, the wider the range of colors that will be included; the lower the value, the lower the range of colors that will be included.
Shooting Settings 127
5 Select additional colors.
· To select additional colors, rotate the main command dial to highlight another of the numbered color boxes and repeat Steps 3 and 4.
· Up to 3 colors can be selected. · To deselect the highlighted color,
press O (Q). · To remove all colors, press and hold
O (Q). A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select [Yes].
6 Press J.
Press J to save changes; the selected effect will be applied during shooting. D Note: Selective Color
· The camera may have difficulty detecting some colors. Saturated colors are recommended.
· Higher values for color range may include hues from other colors.
128 Shooting Settings
Image Recording Options (Image Area, Quality, and Size)
Adjusting Image Area Settings
Image area settings can be displayed by selecting [Image area] in the photo shooting menu.
Shooting Settings 129
Choose Image Area
Choose the image area. The following options are available:
Option c [FX (36×24)]
Description
Images are recorded in FX format with an angle of view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a 35 mm format camera.
a [DX (24×16)]
Images are recorded in DX format. To calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm format, multiply by 1.5.
m [1:1 (24×24)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.
Z [16:9 (36×20)] Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 16 : 9.
1 FX (36×24) 2 DX (24×16) 3 1 : 1 (24×24)
4 16 : 9 (36×20)
5 DX format (24×16) image circle
6 FX format (36×24) image circle
130 Shooting Settings
D DX Lenses DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a smaller angle of view than lenses for 35 mm format cameras. If [Auto DX crop] is off and an option other than [DX (24 × 16)] (DX format) is selected for [Choose image area] when a DX lens is attached, the edges of the image may be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the viewfinder, but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out.
Shooting Settings 131
A Choosing the Image Area via Buttons and Command Dials If [Choose image area] has been assigned to a button using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls], the image area can be selected by pressing the button and rotating a command dial. · The selected crop is displayed in the viewfinder (0 130). · The option currently selected for image area
can be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder by pressing the button to which [Choose image area] is assigned.
Image area [FX (36×24)] [DX (24×16)] [1 : 1 (24×24)] [16 : 9 (36×20)]
Display
· Camera controls cannot be used to select image area when a DX lens is attached and [Auto DX crop] is on.
A Image Size Image size varies with the option selected for image area.
132 Shooting Settings
[Auto DX Crop]
Choose whether the camera automatically selects the [DX (24×16)] (DX format) image area when a DX lens is attached.
Option [On] [Off]
Description The camera automatically selects the [DX (24×16)] (DX format) image area when a DX lens is attached. Automatic image-area selection disabled.
The Viewfinder Mask Display
If [On] is selected, the area outside crop ([FX (36×24)] excepted) will be shown in gray in the viewfinder.
Shooting Settings 133
Adjusting Image Quality
Choose the image quality option used when photographs are recorded.
Option
Description
[NEF (RAW) + JPEG finem] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG normalm] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG basicm] [NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic]
Record two copies of each photo: an NEF (RAW) image and a JPEG copy. · For the JPEG copy, you can choose
from options prioritizing image quality or file size. Options with a star ("m") prioritize image quality, those without a star ("m") file size. · Only the JPEG copy is displayed during playback. The NEF (RAW) image can only be viewed using a computer. · Deleting the JPEG copy from the camera also deletes the NEF (RAW) image.
[NEF (RAW)] [JPEG finem] [JPEG fine] [JPEG normalm] [JPEG normal] [JPEG basicm]
[JPEG basic]
Record photos in NEF (RAW) format.
Record photos in JPEG format. "Fine" produces higher quality pictures than "normal" and "normal" higher quality pictures than "basic". · Choose options with m to maximize
quality, options without m to ensure that all images have more or less the same file size.
134 Shooting Settings
A NEF (RAW) · NEF (RAW) image files (extension "*.nef") contain the raw data output
from the image sensor. · Using Nikon's ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D software, you can adjust and
re-adjust settings such as exposure compensation and white balance as often as you please without degrading image quality, making this format ideal for photos that will be processed in multiple different ways. ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D are available free-of-charge from the Nikon Download Center. · The process of converting NEF (RAW) images to other formats such as JPEG is referred to as "NEF (RAW) processing". You can save NEF (RAW) images in other formats using the ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D computer applications or the [NEF (RAW) processing] option in the camera retouch menu.
Shooting Settings 135
Choosing an Image Quality Option
During viewfinder photography, you can choose an image quality option by holding the X (T) button and rotating the main command dial.
A The Photo Shooting Menu [Image Quality] Option Image quality can also be adjusted using the [Image quality] item in the photo shooting menu. Use the [Image quality] item in the photo shooting menu to adjust image quality during live view. A Recording Pictures to Two Memory Cards If [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] is selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2] when photographs are taken at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG, the NEF (RAW) copy will be saved to the card in Slot 1 and the JPEG copy to the card in Slot 2.
136 Shooting Settings
Choosing an Image Size
Choose a size for new JPEG pictures. The size for JPEG pictures can be selected from [Large], [Medium], and [Small]. The number of pixels in the image varies with the option selected for image area (0 129).
Image area [FX (36×24)] (FX format)
[DX (24×16)] (DX format)
[1 : 1 (24×24)]
[16 : 9 (36×20)]
Option Large Medium Small Large Medium Small Large Medium Small Large Medium Small
Size (pixels) 6048 × 4024 4528 × 3016 3024 × 2016 3936 × 2624 2944 × 1968 1968 × 1312 4016 × 4016 3008 × 3008 2000 × 2000 6048 × 3400 4528 × 2544 3024 × 1696
Print size (cm/in.) * 51.2 × 34.1/20.2 × 13.4 38.3 × 25.5/15.1 × 10.1 25.6 × 17.1/10.1 × 6.7 33.3 × 22.2/13.1 × 8.7
24.9 × 16.7/9.8 × 6.6 16.7 × 11.1/6.6 × 4.4 34.0 × 34.0/13.4 × 13.4 25.5 × 25.5/10.0 × 10.0 16.9 × 16.9/6.7 × 6.7 51.2 × 28.8/20.2 × 11.3 38.3 × 21.5/15.1 × 8.5 25.6 × 14.4/10.1 × 5.7
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi; 1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm).
Shooting Settings 137
Choosing an Image Size
During viewfinder photography, you can choose the image size by holding the X (T) button and rotating the sub-command dial.
A The Photo Shooting Menu [Image Size] Option Image size for JPEG images can also be adjusted using the [Image size] item in the photo shooting menu. Use the [Image size] item in the photo shooting menu to adjust image size during live view.
138 Shooting Settings
Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus)
Choosing a Focus Mode
Rotate the focus-mode selector to AF to select autofocus or to M to select manual focus. During viewfinder photography, the camera focuses using 51 focus points.
Shooting Settings 139
Autofocus Mode
Choose how the camera focuses in autofocus mode.
Viewfinder Photography
Option
Description
AF-A
[AF mode auto-switch]
The camera uses AF-S when photographing stationary subjects and AF-C when photographing subjects that are in motion.
AF-S [Single AF]
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutter-release button is pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is displayed (focus priority).
AF-C
[Continuous AF]
For moving subjects. Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus tracking to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings, shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus (release priority).
140 Shooting Settings
A Predictive Focus Tracking If AF-C is selected for AF mode, or if AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway or the AF-ON button is pressed. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.
Shooting Settings 141
Live View Photography
Option
AF-A
[AF mode auto-switch]
AF-S [Single AF]
AF-C
[Continuous AF]
Description
The camera automatically selects AF-S when the subject is stationary and AF-C when the subject is in motion. · This option is available only during still
photography.
For stationary subjects. Press the shutterrelease button halfway to focus. If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will turn from red to green; focus will lock while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. If the camera fails to focus, the focus point will flash red. · At default settings, the shutter can only be
released if the camera is able to focus (focus priority).
For moving subjects. The camera focuses continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if the subject moves, the camera will predict the final distance to the subject and adjust focus as necessary. · At default settings, the shutter can be
released whether or not the subject is in focus (release priority).
142 Shooting Settings
Option AF-F [Full-time AF]
Description
The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject movement or changes in composition. When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the focus point will turn from red to green and focus will lock. · This option is available only during filming.
Shooting Settings 143
Choosing an Autofocus Mode
To choose the autofocus mode, hold the AF-mode button and rotate the main command dial.
· During viewfinder photography, the selected AF mode is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.
· During live view photography and filming, the selected AF mode is displayed in the monitor.
144 Shooting Settings
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus.
Viewfinder Photography
Option
[Single-point AF]
Description
Select the focus point (0 159); the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary subjects.
Select the focus point. In AF-A and AF-C focus modes,
the camera will focus based on information from
surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves
the selected point. The number of focus points varies
with the mode selected:
[Dynamic-area · [Dynamic-area AF (9 points)]: Choose when there is
AF (9 points)]/ time to compose the photograph or when
[Dynamic-area photographing subjects that are moving predictably
AF (21 points)]/ [Dynamic-area AF (51 points)]
(e.g., runners or race cars on a track). · [Dynamic-area AF (21 points)]: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
· [Dynamic-area AF (51 points)]: Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving quickly and
cannot be easily framed in the viewfinder (e.g., birds).
Shooting Settings 145
Option [3D-tracking]
[Group-area AF]
Description
Select the focus point. While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway in AF-A and AF-C focus modes, the camera will use all 51 focus points to track subjects that leave the selected point and choose new points as required. · Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that
are moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis players). · If the subject leaves viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point.
The camera focuses using a group of focus points selected by the user, reducing the risk of the camera focusing on the background instead of on the main subject. · Use for snapshots or photos of moving subjects that
are hard to frame using the [Single-point AF] option. · Face detection is enabled. The camera gives priority
to any faces detected.
146 Shooting Settings
Option
Description
The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus point. · If a face is detected, the
camera will give priority to the portrait subject (facedetection AF). This lets you concentrate on composition and facial [Auto-area AF] expressions even if your subject is in motion (0 155). · Use on occasions when you don't have time to select the focus point yourself, for portraits, or snapshots and other spur-of-the-moment photos. · When AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, the active focus points are briefly highlighted after the camera focuses. When AF-C is selected, or when AF-A is selected and photographs are taken using AF-C, only the main focus point is displayed.
Shooting Settings 147
D AF-Area Mode AF-area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.
AF-area mode
Control panel
Viewfinder focusViewfinder point display
(during selection)
[Single-point AF]
[Dynamic-area AF (9 points)] *
[Dynamic-area AF (21 points)] *
[Dynamic-area AF (51 points)] *
[3D-tracking]
[Group-area AF]
[Auto-area AF]
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation.
148 Shooting Settings
A 3D-Tracking When [3D-tracking] is selected for AF-area mode, the camera stores the colors in the area surrounding the focus point at the moment the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are similar in color to the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame. A Quick Focus-Point Selection For quicker focus-point selection, choose [Every other point] for Custom Setting a6 [Focus points used] to use only a quarter of the available focus points. A AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters If [3D-tracking] or [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode when an AF-S/AF-I teleconverter is used, [Single-point AF] will automatically be selected at combined apertures slower than f/5.6.
Shooting Settings 149
Live View Photography
Option
3
[Pinpoint AF]
d
[Singlepoint AF]
Description
Recommended for shots involving static subjects, such as buildings, in-studio product photography, or close-ups. Use for pinpoint focus on a selected spot in the frame smaller than the focus point for [Single-point AF]. This option is available only when AF-S is chosen for AF mode during still photography. Focusing may be slower than with [Single-point AF].
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. Use with stationary subjects.
As for [Single-point AF], except the camera
f
[Wide-area AF (S)]
focuses on a wider area, the focus areas for [Widearea AF (L)] being larger than those for [Wide-area
AF (S)]. Use for snapshots or photos of moving
subjects that are hard to frame using [Single-point
AF], or during movie recording for smooth focus
when making panning or tilting shots or filming
g [Wide-area moving subjects. If the selected focus area contains
AF (L)]
subjects at different distances from the camera, the
camera will assign priority to the closest subject.
150 Shooting Settings
Option e [Dynamic-
area AF]
h [Auto-area AF]
Description
The camera focuses on a point selected by the user. If the subject briefly leaves the selected point, the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points. · Use for photographs of athletes and other active
subjects that are hard to frame using [Singlepoint AF]. · This option is available only when AF-A or AF-C is selected for autofocus mode during still photography.
The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus area. · Use on occasions when you don't have time to
select the focus point yourself, for portraits, or for snapshots and other spur-of-the-moment photos. · If a portrait subject is detected during live view photography, an amber border indicating the focus point will appear around the subject's face. If the camera detects the subject's eyes, the amber border will instead appear around an eye (face/eye-detection AF). This frees you to concentrate on composition and your subject's expression when photographing active portrait subjects (0 155). · Subject tracking (0 158) can be activated by pressing the J button.
Shooting Settings 151
D Using Autofocus in Live View · The camera may be unable to focus if:
- The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame - The subject lacks contrast - The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness - The focus point includes night-time spot lighting or a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness - Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting - A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used - The subject appears smaller than the focus point - The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds
or a row of windows in a skyscraper) - The subject is moving · The monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses. · The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus. · Use an AF-S or AF-P lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters.
152 Shooting Settings
A s: The Center Focus Point In all AF-area modes except [Auto-area AF], a dot appears in the focus point when it is in the center of the frame. A Quick Focus-Point Selection For quicker focus-point selection, choose [Every other point] for Custom Setting a6 [Focus points used] to use only a quarter of the available focus points (the number of points available for [Pinpoint AF] and [Wide-area AF (L)] does not change).
Shooting Settings 153
Choosing an AF-Area Mode
To choose the AF-area mode, hold the AF-mode button and rotate the sub-command dial.
· During viewfinder photography, the selected AF-area mode is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.
· During live view photography and filming, the selected AF-area mode is displayed in the monitor.
154 Shooting Settings
Face/Eye-Detection AF
When [Auto-area AF] is selected for AFarea mode, you have the option of enabling face-detection AF, allowing the camera to detect the faces of human portrait subjects. Face/eye detection AF, in which the camera detects both faces and eyes, is available during live view photography. Face- and eye-detection AF can be configured using Custom Setting a5 [Auto-area AF face/eye detection].
Viewfinder Photography · If [Face and eye detection on] or
[Face detection on] is selected, the camera will assign focus priority to the faces of any portrait subjects it detects. · If the subject looks away after their face is detected, the focus point will move to track their motion. · During playback, you can zoom in on the face used for focus by pressing the J button.
Shooting Settings 155
Live View Photography · If [Face and eye detection on] is
selected and a portrait subject is detected, an amber border indicating the focus point will appear around the subject's face. If the camera detects the subject's eyes during live view photography, the border will instead be displayed around one or the other of their eyes. · Faces detected when [Face detection on] is selected are similarly indicated by an amber border. · If AF-S is selected for AF mode, or if AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-S, the focus point will turn green when the camera focuses. · If more than one portrait subject or more than one eye is detected, e and f icons will appear on the focus point, and you will be able to position the focus point over a different face or eye by pressing 4 or 2. · If the subject looks away after their face is detected, the focus point will move to track their motion. · During playback, you can zoom in on the face or eye used for focus by pressing J.
156 Shooting Settings
D Face/Eye-Detection AF · Eye detection is not available during movie recording. · Eye and face detection may not perform as expected if:
- the subject's face occupies a very large or very small proportion of the frame,
- the subject's face is lit too brightly or too poorly, - the subject is wearing glasses or sunglasses, - the subject's face or eyes are obscured by hair or other objects, or - the subject moves excessively during shooting.
Shooting Settings 157
Subject Tracking AF
If [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode during live view, you can press J to enable focus tracking. The focus point will change to a targeting reticle; position the reticle over the target and press the AF-ON button or press J again to start tracking. The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame (in the case of portrait subjects, focus will track the subject's face). To end tracking, press J a third time. To exit subject-tracking mode, press the W (Y) button. D Subject Tracking
The camera may be unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave the frame or are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the background.
158 Shooting Settings
Focus Point Selection
Except when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode, the focus point can be selected manually, allowing photographs to be composed with the subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame.
1 Undo the focus
selector lock.
Rotate the focus selector lock to I.
2 Use the multi selector to select the focus point
while the standby timer is on.
· During viewfinder photography, you can choose from 51 focus points.
· During live view, the focus point can be positioned anywhere in the frame.
Shooting Settings 159
· The center focus point can be selected by pressing J. · The focus selector lock
can be rotated to the locked (L) position following selection to prevent the selected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed. A Focus Lock
If your subject will not be in the selected focus point in the final composition, or if the camera is unable to focus on the selected subject, press the A button to lock focus at the desired distance before recomposing the shot (0 83).
160 Shooting Settings
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus The camera may be unable to focus under the conditions listed below, in which case the shutter release may be disabled or pictures may be out of focus, the latter a result of the camera either displaying the in-focus indicator (I)--or, in live view, displaying the focus point in green--when the subject is not in focus. Focus manually or use focus lock to focus on another subject at the same distance. · There is little contrast between the subject and the background, as may
be the case if the subject is photographed against a featureless wall or the background is the same color as the subject. · The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera, as may be the case if the subject is inside a cage. · The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns such as the rows of windows in a skyscraper. · The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, as may be the case if the subject is half in the shade. · Background objects appear larger than the main subject, as may be the case if a building is in the frame behind the subject. · The subject contains many fine details, as may be the case when the subject is a field of flowers.
Shooting Settings 161
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus (non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results. · AF lenses: Set the lens focus
mode switch (if present) and camera focus-mode selector to M. · Manual focus lenses: Focus manually.
162 Shooting Settings
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus. D AF Lenses
Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus-mode switch set to M and the camera focus-mode selector set to AF. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or lens. This does not apply to AF-S and AF-P lenses, which can be used in M mode without setting the camera focusmode selector to M.
Shooting Settings 163
The Electronic Rangefinder
The focus indicators (I) in the viewfinder and monitor can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus. · In-focus indicators (I) are displayed
when the subject is in focus.
Focus indicator
Status
(steady)
The subject is in focus.
(steady)
The focus point is in front of the subject.
(steady)
The focus point is behind the subject.
(steady)
The camera is unable to focus.
· Note that with the subjects listed in "Getting Good Results with Autofocus" (0 161), the in-focus indicator (I) may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus. Confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting. During live view, you can check focus by zooming in on the view through the lens.
· A tripod is recommended if you experience trouble focusing.
164 Shooting Settings
A AF-P Lenses When an AF-P lens is used in manual focus mode, the in-focus indicator will flash in the viewfinder (or in live view, the focus point will flash in the monitor) to warn that continuing to rotate the focus ring in the current direction will not bring the subject into focus. A The Focal Plane Mark and Flange-Back Distance Focus distance is measured from the focal plane mark (E) on the camera body, which shows the position of the focal plane inside the camera (q). Use this mark when measuring the distance to your subject for manual focus or macro photography. The distance between the focal plane and the lens mounting flange is known as the "flange-back distance" (w). On this camera, the flangeback distance is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.). A Focus Peaking If focus peaking is enabled using Custom Setting d11 [Peaking highlights], objects that are in focus will be indicated by colored outlines that appear when focus is adjusted manually during live view. Note that peaking highlights may not be displayed if the camera is unable to detect outlines, in which case focus can be checked by zooming in on the view through the lens in the display.
Shooting Settings 165
Exposure-Related Settings (Metering and Exposure Compensation)
Choosing How the Camera Sets Exposure
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. Choose the method used and area metered when the camera sets exposure.
· In modes other than P, S, A, and M, the camera selects the metering method according to the scene.
Option
Description
L [Matrix metering]
Produces natural results in most situations. The camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to tone (brightness) distribution, color, distance, and composition for results close to those seen by the human eye.
[CenterM weighted
metering]
The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center (the size of the area can be selected using Custom Setting b4 [Center-weighted area]; if a non-CPU lens or an AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 815mm f/3.54.5E ED lens is attached, the area is equivalent to a circle 12 mm in diameter). This is the classic meter for portraits and is recommended when using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
166 Shooting Settings
Option
N [Spot metering]
[Highlightt weighted
metering]
Description
The camera meters a circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter (approximately 1.5% of the frame). The circle is centered on the current focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (the camera will meter the center focus point if a non-CPU lens or an AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 815mm f/3.54.5E ED lens is attached or if [Auto-area AF] is in effect; 0 145). Spot metering ensures that the subject will be correctly exposed, even when the background is much brighter or darker.
The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights. Use to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when photographing spotlit performers on stage.
Shooting Settings 167
Choosing a Metering Option
Hold the W (Y) button and rotate the main command dial. · The selected metering option is displayed in the control panel
and viewfinder.
168 Shooting Settings
A [Matrix Metering] and Lens Type The metering method used when [Matrix metering] is selected varies with the lens. · CPU lenses:
- 3D color matrix metering III: Available with type D, E, and G CPU lenses. The camera includes distance information when calculating exposure.
- Color matrix metering III: Available with CPU lenses of types other than D, E, and G. Distance information is not included.
· Non-CPU lenses: - Color matrix metering is available if lens data are provided using the [Non-CPU lens data] option in the setup menu. [Center-weighted metering] will be used if lens data are not provided.
A [Highlight-Weighted Metering] and Lens Type [Center-weighted metering] will be used if [Highlight-weighted metering] is selected when non-CPU lenses and certain CPU lenses (AI-P NIKKOR lenses and AF lenses of types other than D, E, or G) are attached.
Shooting Settings 169
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
The camera offers two options for long time-exposures: Bulb and Time. Long time-exposures can be used for pictures of fireworks, night scenery, the stars, or moving lights.
Shutter speed: Bulb (35-second exposure) Aperture: f/25
Shutter speed Bulb
Time
Description
The shutter remains open while the shutter-release button is held down. The exposure starts when the shutter-release button is pressed and ends when the button is pressed a second time.
· To prevent blur, use a tripod or an optional wireless remote controller or remote cord.
170 Shooting Settings
1 Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.
2 Rotate the mode dial
to M.
Keeping the mode dial lock release pressed, rotate the mode dial to M.
3 Choose a shutter speed.
· While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of Bulb (A) or Time (%).
· The exposure indicators do not appear when Bulb (A) or Time (%) is selected.
Shooting Settings 171
4 Open the shutter.
· Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the camera or optional remote cord or wireless remote controller all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed until the exposure is complete.
· Time: After focusing, press the shutter-release button all the way down.
5 Close the shutter.
· Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button. · Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down. A Long Time-Exposures
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap (0 10). Nikon recommends using a fully charged battery or an optional AC adapter and power connector to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open. Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels or fog) may be present in long exposures. Bright spots and fog can be reduced by choosing [On] for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu.
172 Shooting Settings
Autoexposure Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after setting exposure for a specific area of the subject. Exposure lock comes in handy when the area used to set exposure is much brighter or darker than its surroundings.
1 Select [Center-weighted metering] or [Spot
metering] (0 166).
2 Lock exposure.
· Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutterrelease button halfway. With the shutter-release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point, press the A button to lock exposure (if you are using autofocus, confirm that the I in-focus indicator appears in the viewfinder).
· While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will appear in the viewfinder.
Shooting Settings 173
3 Recompose the photograph.
Keeping the A button pressed, recompose the photograph and shoot.
A Metered Area In [Spot metering] (0 166), exposure will be locked at the value metered in a circle centered on the selected focus point. In [Center-weighted metering], exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder.
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted without altering the metered value for exposure:
Mode
Setting
P
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 109)
S
Shutter speed
A
Aperture
· The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel. · Note that metering cannot be changed while exposure lock is in effect.
174 Shooting Settings
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is most effective when [Spot metering] or [Center-weighted metering] is selected for metering (0 166).
-1 EV
No exposure compensation
+1 EV
Adjusting Exposure Compensation
Hold the E button and rotate the main command dial.
· The selected value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.
· Choose from values between 5 EV (underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure).
· By default, changes are made in increments of 1/3 EV. The size of the increments can be changed using Custom Setting b1 [EV steps for exposure cntrl].
Shooting Settings 175
· In general, positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker.
· The current value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when the E button is pressed.
Display
Control panel
No exposure compensation
(E button pressed)
0.3 EV
+2.0 EV
Viewfinder
· E icons and exposure indicators will appear in the control panel and viewfinder. In modes other than M, the zero ("0") at the center of the exposure indicator will flash in the control panel.
· Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to ±0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
176 Shooting Settings
A Mode M In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change. A Using a Flash When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and the background. Custom Setting e3 [Exposure comp. for flash] can be used to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to the background only.
Shooting Settings 177
Choosing the Operation Performed When the Shutter Is Released (Release Mode)
Choosing a Release Mode Such as SingleFrame, Continuous, or Quiet Shutter-Release
To choose a release mode, press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial so that the pointer aligns with the desired setting.
178 Shooting Settings
Mode
Description
S
Single frame
The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
At default settings, the camera takes photos at up
to 3 fps while the shutter-release button is
pressed.
CL
Continuous low speed
· The frame advance rate can be selected using Custom Setting d1 [CL mode shooting speed]. Choose from values of from 1 to 6 fps. Note,
however, that regardless of the option selected,
the maximum frame advance rate during live
view is 3 fps.
CH
Continuous high speed
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records up to 7 frames per second. Use for active subjects. · When [On] is selected for [Silent live view
photography] in the photo shooting menu during live view, the frame advance rate varies with the option selected for [NEF (RAW) recording] > [NEF (RAW) bit depth] in the photo shooting menu, increasing to a maximum of approximately 8 fps when [14-bit] is selected or approximately 12 fps when [12bit] is selected.
Shooting Settings 179
Mode
Quiet Q shutter-
release
Qc (quiet
QC
continuous) shutter-
release
E Self-timer
MUP Mirror up
Description
As for single frame, except that the mirror does not click back into place while the shutter-release button is fully pressed, allowing the user to control the timing of the click made by the mirror, which is also quieter than in single frame mode. In addition, a beep does not sound regardless of the setting selected for [Beep options] > [Beep on/off] in the setup menu.
The camera takes pictures at up to 3 fps while the shutter-release button is pressed; camera noise is reduced.
Take pictures with the self-timer (0 183).
Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto or close-up photography or in other situations in which the slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs (0 185).
180 Shooting Settings
D Burst Photography · Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance, the
memory card access lamp may light for anywhere from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card while the memory card access lamp is lit. Not only could any unrecorded images be lost, but the camera or memory card could be damaged. · If the camera is switched off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded. · If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card.
A The Memory Buffer · While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the camera will
show the number of pictures that can be stored in the memory buffer.
· When the buffer is full, the display will show t00 and the frame rate will drop.
· The number shown is approximate. The actual number of photos that can be stored in the memory buffer varies with camera settings and shooting conditions.
· Memory buffer capacity may drop briefly immediately after the camera is turned on.
· Memory buffer capacity can be viewed in the monitor during live view.
Shooting Settings 181
A Frame Advance Rate The figures for frame advance rate apply in mode S or M at shutter speeds of 1/250 s or faster with AF-C selected for autofocus mode and other settings at default values. Frame advance rates may slow: · at slow shutter speeds, · when [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO
sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu and ISO sensitivity is altered automatically by the camera, · when ISO sensitivity is set to a value of from Hi 0.3 to Hi 2, · if flicker is detected with [Enable] selected for [Flicker reduction] > [Flicker reduction setting] in the photo shooting menu, · at extremely small apertures (high f-numbers), · when vibration reduction (available with VR lenses) is on, · when the battery is low, · with certain lenses, or · if a non-CPU lens is attached with [Aperture ring] selected for Custom Setting f5 [Customize command dials] > [Aperture setting].
182 Shooting Settings
Self-Timer Mode (E)
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for selfportraits.
1 Select self-timer mode.
Press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to E.
2 Frame the photograph and
focus.
The timer will not start if the camera is unable to focus with AF-S selected for AF mode or in other situations in which the shutter cannot be released.
Shooting Settings 183
3 Start the timer.
· Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the timer; the shutter will be released after about 10 seconds, during which the self-timer lamp will at first flash for approximately 8 seconds and then light for roughly 2 seconds.
· To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the release mode dial to another setting.
· The timer duration, the number shots taken, and the interval between shots can be selected using Custom Setting c3 [Self-timer].
184 Shooting Settings
Mirror up Mode (MUP)
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised. To use mirror-up mode, press the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to MUP (mirror up). After pressing the shutter-release button halfway to set focus and exposure, press the shutterrelease button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror. Z will be displayed in the control panel; press the shutter-release button all the way down again to take the picture.
D Mirror Up While the mirror is raised, photos cannot be framed in the viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed.
Shooting Settings 185
A Mirror-Up Mode · Use of a tripod is recommended. · To prevent blurring caused by camera movement, press the shutter-
release button smoothly. · The mirror lowers when shooting ends. · A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s after the mirror is raised. · In live view, the picture is taken the first time the shutter-release button
is pressed all the way down.
186 Shooting Settings
Adjusting the Camera's Sensitivity to Light (ISO Sensitivity)
ISO Sensitivity
The camera's sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the amount of light available. Choose from settings that range from ISO 100 and ISO 51200. Settings of from about 0.3 to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0.3 to 2 EV above ISO 51200 are also available for special situations. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures.
Shooting Settings 187
Adjusting ISO Sensitivity
Hold the S (Q) button and rotate the main command dial. · The selected option is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder.
· b and all EFCT modes other than j also offer an ISO sensitivity of X ([Auto]). When X is selected, the camera adjusts ISO sensitivity automatically.
· By default, changes are made in increments of 1/3 EV. The size of the increments can be changed using Custom Setting b1 [EV steps for exposure cntrl].
188 Shooting Settings
A The Photo Shooting Menu [ISO Sensitivity Settings] Option ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the [ISO sensitivity settings] item in the photo shooting menu. A High ISO Sensitivities The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur when the subject is in motion. Note, however, that the higher the sensitivity, the more likely the image is to be affected by "noise" in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines. · "Noise" can be reduced by enabling high ISO noise reduction. High ISO
noise reduction can be enabled using the [High ISO NR] items in the photo and movie shooting menus. A Hi 0.3Hi 2 A setting of [Hi 0.3] corresponds to an ISO sensitivity approximately 0.3 EV higher than ISO 51200 (ISO 64000) and [Hi 2.0] to an ISO sensitivity approximately 2 EV higher (ISO 204800). Note that pictures taken at these settings are particularly prone to "noise" in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines. A Lo 0.3Lo 1 The settings [Lo 0.3] through [Lo 1.0] correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3 1 EV below ISO 100 (ISO 8050 equivalent). Use for larger apertures or slower shutter speeds when lighting is bright. Highlights may be overexposed. In most cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO [100] or above are recommended.
Shooting Settings 189
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Auto ISO sensitivity control automatically adjusts ISO sensitivity if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the value selected by the user in P, S, A, and M modes.
Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
1 Select [ISO sensitivity settings]
in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Auto ISO sensitivity control] and press 2.
2 Select [On].
· Highlight [On] and press J to enable auto ISO sensitivity control. If a flash is used, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted appropriately.
· If [Off] is selected, sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by the user.
190 Shooting Settings
3 Adjust settings.
· Adjust auto ISO sensitivity control settings.
Option
[Maximum sensitivity]
[Maximum sensitivity with c]
Description
To prevent ISO sensitivity being raised too high, you can select an upper limit for ISO sensitivity control; choose from values of from ISO 200 to Hi 2. The minimum value that will be selected using auto ISO sensitivity control is ISO 100.
Choose the maximum ISO sensitivity for flash photography; options range from ISO 200 to Hi 2. Selecting [Same as without flash] sets the maximum ISO sensitivity for flash photography to the value currently selected for [Maximum sensitivity].
Shooting Settings 191
Option
[Minimum shutter speed]
Description
In modes P and A, auto ISO sensitivity control only takes effect if shutter speed needed for optimal exposure would fall below this value; choose from settings of 1/4000 s to 30 s. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on lens focal length (CPU lenses only). For example, the camera will automatically choose faster minimum shutter speeds to prevent blur caused by camera shake when a long lens is attached. · To view auto shutter-speed selection options,
highlight [Auto] and press 2. Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned by choosing faster or slower minimums. Faster settings can be used to reduce blur when photographing fast-moving subjects. · Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the ISO sensitivity chosen for [Maximum sensitivity].
· Press J to save changes.
192 Shooting Settings
When [On] is selected for [Auto ISO sensitivity control], ISO AUTO indicators will appear in the control panel and viewfinder. When these indicators are lit (not flashing), pictures will be taken at the sensitivity selected for [ISO sensitivity]. When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user, the ISO AUTO indicators will flash and the altered value will be shown in the displays.
Shooting Settings 193
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control · If value currently selected for [ISO sensitivity] is higher than that
chosen for [Maximum sensitivity], the value chosen for [ISO sensitivity] will serve as the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control. · During flash photography, shutter speed is limited to the range defined by the values selected for Custom Settings e1 [Flash sync speed] and e2 [Flash shutter speed]. If the value selected for [Minimum shutter speed] is not in this range, the value selected for Custom Setting e2 [Flash shutter speed] becomes the effective minimum shutter speed. · If a non-CPU lens is used without lens data, the minimum shutter speed will be fixed at 1/30 s. · If an optional flash unit is attached, ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes, possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds (0 460, 465).
A Turning Auto ISO Sensitivity Control On or Off You can turn [Auto ISO sensitivity control] on or off by pressing the S (Q) button and rotating the sub-command dial (0 93).
194 Shooting Settings
Achieving Natural Colors with Different Light Sources (White Balance)
White Balance
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source. Auto white balance (4) is recommended with most light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from the list below or use preset white balance.
· In modes other than P, S, A, and M, the camera adjusts white balance automatically according to the scene.
Option (K *)
Description
4 [Auto]
White balance is adjusted automatically for optimal results with most light sources. When an optional flash unit is used, white balance will be adjusted according to the lighting produced by the flash.
i [Keep white (reduce warm colors)] (3500 8000 K)
Eliminate warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting.
j [Keep overall atmosphere] (3500 8000 K)
Partially preserve warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting.
k [Keep warm lighting Preserve warm color cast produced by colors] (35008000 K) incandescent lighting.
Shooting Settings 195
Option (K *)
Description
D [Natural light auto] (45008000 K)
When used under natural light, this option produces colors closer to those seen by the naked eye.
H [Direct sunlight] (5200 K) Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.
G [Cloudy] (6000 K)
Use in daylight under overcast skies.
M [Shade] (8000 K)
Use in daylight with subjects in shade.
J [Incandescent] (3000 K) Use under incandescent lighting.
I [Fluorescent]
[Sodium-vapor lamps] (2700 K)
[Warm-white fluorescent] (3000 K)
[White fluorescent] (3700 K)
[Cool-white fluorescent] (4200 K)
Use under fluorescent lighting; choose bulb type according to light source.
[Day white fluorescent] (5000 K)
[Daylight fluorescent] (6500 K)
[High temp. mercuryvapor] (7200 K)
196 Shooting Settings
Option (K *) 5 [Flash] (5400 K) K [Choose color temperature] (2500 10000 K)
L [Preset manual]
Description
Use with studio strobe lighting and other large flash units.
Choose color temperature from list of values or by holding Q/g (U) button and rotating sub-command dial.
Measure white balance for subject or light source (press and hold Q/g (U) button to enter direct measurement mode, 0 209), copy white balance from existing photograph, or choose existing value by holding Q/g (U) button and rotating sub-command dial.
* Color temperature. All values are approximate and do not reflect finetuning (if applicable).
A 4 ([Auto]) The photo info for pictures shot using auto white balance lists the color temperature selected by the camera at the time the picture was taken. You can use this as reference when choosing a value for [Choose color temperature]. · To view shooting data during playback, go to
[Playback display options] in the playback menu and select [Shooting data].
Shooting Settings 197
Choosing a White Balance Option
Hold the Q/g (U) button and rotate the main command dial.
Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by holding the Q/g (U) button and rotating the sub-command dial.
D Studio Flash Lighting 4 ([Auto]) may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to 5 ([Flash]) and use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
198 Shooting Settings
A The [White Balance] Option White balance can also be adjusted via the [White Balance] item in the photo and movie shooting menus. A D ([Natural Light Auto]) D ([Natural light auto]) may not produce the desired results under artificial light. Choose 4 ([Auto]) or an option that matches the light source.
Shooting Settings 199
Fine-Tuning White Balance Using Buttons
If coordinates are displayed as shown, you can hold the Q/g (U) button and use the multi selector to fine-tune white balance.
· Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune white balance on the amber-blue axis and 1 or 3 to fine-tune white balance on the greenmagenta axis.
· The selected setting takes effect when the Q/g (U) button is released.
200 Shooting Settings
Using the Menus
1 Select [White balance] in the
photo shooting menu, highlight the desired option, and press 2 as often as necessary to display finetuning options.
For information on fine-tuning preset manual white balance, see "Fine-Tuning Preset Manual White Balance" (0 223).
2 Fine-tune white balance.
· Use the multi selector to position the cursor on the grid. The cursor can be moved up to six steps from the center along either of the A (amber)B (blue) and G (green)M (magenta) axes. The selected value is displayed to the right of the grid.
· The A (amber)B (blue) axis corresponds to color temperature and is ruled in increments of 0.5. A change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 5 mired.
· The G (green)M (magenta) axis has effects similar to color compensation filters and is ruled in increments of 0.25. A change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0.05 diffuse density units.
Shooting Settings 201
3 Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to the photo shooting menu. A Adjusting White Balance in the i Menu
To view white balance options, highlight [White balance] in the i menu and press J. If an option other than [Choose color temperature] is selected, white balance can be fine-tuned by selecting an option and pressing 3 until fine-tuning options are displayed. The results of fine-tuning can be previewed in the display. A White Balance Fine-Tuning The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a "warm" setting such as J ([Incandescent]) is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly "colder" but will not actually make them blue.
202 Shooting Settings
A "Mired" Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106, is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.: · 4000 K3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired · 7000 K6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
Shooting Settings 203
Choosing a Color Temperature Using Buttons (AmberBlue Only)
To adjust color temperature when [Choose color temperature] is selected for white balance, hold the Q/g (U) button and use the multi selector or rotate the sub-command dial. · Hold the Q/g (U) button and rotate
the sub-command dial to choose a color temperature in mireds.
204 Shooting Settings
· To highlight a digit, hold the Q/g (U) button and press 4 or 2. Press 1 or 3 to edit the highlighted digit.
· Changes apply only to the A (amber)B (blue) axis. · The selected setting takes effect when the Q/g (U) button
is released.
Shooting Settings 205
D Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting. Choose c ([Flash]) or I ([Fluorescent]) for these sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate.
A Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 50005500 K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red (q). Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue (w).
3000
4000 5000 6000
8000 10000 [ K ]
In general, choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or to intentionally make colors colder, higher values if your pictures are tinged blue or to intentionally make colors warmer.
206 Shooting Settings
Using the Menus
Color temperature can be selected using the [White balance] options in the photo shooting menu. Enter values for the amberblue and greenmagenta axes as described below.
1 Select [Choose color temperature].
Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then highlight [Choose color temperature] and press 2.
2 Select values for amberblue and greenmagenta.
· Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the amber (A)blue (B) axis and press 1 or 3 to change.
· Press 4 or 2 to highlight the value for the green (G)magenta (M) axis and press 1 or 3 to change.
Shooting Settings 207
3 Press J.
· Press J to save changes and return to the photo shooting menu.
· If a value other than 0 is selected for the green (G)magenta (M) axis, an asterisk ("U") will appear next to the K icon.
A Choosing Color Temperature in the i Menu To view white balance options, highlight [White balance] in the i menu and press J. When [Choose color temperature] is selected, color temperature options can be viewed by pressing 3.
208 Shooting Settings
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast. The camera can store up to six values for preset white balance in presets d-1 through d-6. Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method Direct measurement
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in final photograph and white balance is measured by camera (0 210). During live view, white balance can be measured in a selected area of the frame (spot white balance, 0 216).
Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory
photograph
card (0 221).
Shooting Settings 209
Viewfinder Photography
Before Measuring White Balance: · Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will
be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard 18% gray panel can be used as a reference object. · Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when white balance is measured using a neutral gray or white reference object. In mode M, adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 114).
1 Keeping the Q/g (U) button pressed, rotate the
main command dial to select L.
210 Shooting Settings
2 Select a preset.
Press the Q/g (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed.
Shooting Settings 211
3 Select direct measurement mode.
· Release the Q/g (U) button briefly and then press the button until the D indicators in the control panel and viewfinder start to flash.
· In direct measurement mode, the focus point changes to a white balance target as shown and stays in the center of the frame.
4 Before the D indicators stop flashing,
photograph the reference object.
· Position the reference object in the white balance target and press the shutter-release button all the way down to measure a value for white balance and store it in the preset selected in Step 2.
· No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus.
212 Shooting Settings
5 Check the results.
· If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance, C will flash in the control panel, while the viewfinder will show a flashing a. Press the shutterrelease button halfway to exit to shooting mode.
· If lighting is too dark or too bright, the camera may be unable to measure white balance. A flashing b a will appear in the control panel and viewfinder. Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to Step 4 and measure white balance again.
Shooting Settings 213
D Time Restrictions on Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Viewfinder Photography)
If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer]. A Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Viewfinder
Photography) Preset manual white balance cannot be measured during time-lapse movie recording or while you are shooting a multiple exposure. A Protected Presets If the current preset is protected, the camera will be unable to measure a value for preset manual white balance; any attempt to measure white balance for a protected preset will be accompanied by a flashing 3 in the control panel and viewfinder.
214 Shooting Settings
A Selecting a Preset · Selecting [Preset manual] for [White
balance] in the photo shooting menu displays white balance presets; highlight a preset and press J. · If no value currently exists for the selected preset, white balance will be set to 5200 K, the same as [Direct sunlight]. A Measuring Preset White Balance from the i Menu With preset manual selected for white balance, display the i menu, highlight [White balance], and then press and hold J to place the camera in direct measurement mode.
Shooting Settings 215
Live View (Spot White Balance)
During live view, white balance can be measured from white or gray objects in a smaller area of the frame than would be possible in viewfinder photography, eliminating the need to prepare a reference object or change lenses during telephoto photography. · When measuring preset manual white balance for flash
photography, use the viewfinder as described in "Viewfinder Photography" (0 210).
1 Keeping the Q/g (U) button pressed, rotate the
main command dial to select L.
216 Shooting Settings
2 Select a preset.
Press the Q/g (U) button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed.
3 Select direct measurement
mode.
Release the Q/g (U) button briefly and then press the button until the L icon in the monitor starts to flash.
Shooting Settings 217
4 While the L icon is flashing,
position the spot white balance target (r) over a white or gray area of the subject.
· To zoom in on the area around the target (r) for more precise positioning, press the X (T) button.
· You can also position the target (r) by tapping your subject in the monitor. Tapping the monitor positions the target (r) and measures white balance at the selected location. After measuring white balance, proceed to Step 6.
218 Shooting Settings
5 Measure a value for preset
white balance either by pressing J or by pressing the shutter-release button all the way down.
· If the camera is able to measure white balance, the new value will be reflected in the display.
· If the camera is unable to measure white balance, a message will be displayed and the camera will return to Step 4. Measure white balance again after repositioning the white balance target (r) or the like.
6 Press the Q/g (U) button to exit direct
measurement mode.
White balance presets can be viewed by selecting [Preset manual] for [White balance] in the photo or movie shooting menu. The position of the targets used to measure preset white balance is displayed on presets recorded during live view.
Shooting Settings 219
D Time Restrictions on Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Live View)
The time available to measure white balance is that selected for Custom Setting c4 [Monitor off delay] > [Live view]. D Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Live View) Preset manual white balance cannot be measured while a multiple exposure is in progress.
220 Shooting Settings
Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an existing photograph to a selected preset.
1 Select [Preset manual].
Select [White balance] in the photo shooting menu, then highlight [Preset manual] and press 2.
2 Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset (d-1 to d-6) and press X (T).
3 Choose Select image.
Highlight [Select image] and press 2.
Shooting Settings 221
4 Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To view the highlighted image full frame, press and hold the X (T) button.
5 Copy white balance.
· Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset.
· If the highlighted photograph has a comment, the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset.
222 Shooting Settings
A Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance The selected preset can be fine-tuned by selecting [Fine-tune] and adjusting white balance as described in "Fine-Tuning White Balance" (0 200).
A Edit Comment To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36 characters for the current white-balance preset, select [Edit comment] in the preset manual white balance menu and enter a comment (0 61). A Protect To protect the current white-balance preset, select [Protect] in the preset manual white balance menu, then highlight [On] and press J. Protected presets cannot be modified.
Shooting Settings 223
Varying Exposure or White Balance over a Series of Photographs (Bracketing)
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, "bracketing" the current value. Choose in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject. · Bracketing is available in modes P, S, A, and M only.
224 Shooting Settings
Bracketing
Bracketing is adjusted using the [Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set] item in the photo shooting menu, which contains the following options:
Option
Description
[AE & flash bracketing]
The camera varies exposure and flash level over a series of photographs.
[AE bracketing]
The camera varies exposure over a series of photographs.
[Flash bracketing]
The camera varies flash level over a series of photographs.
[WB bracketing]
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with a different white balance (0 195).
[ADL bracketing]
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of photographs (0 254).
Shooting Settings 225
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
Vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs. To perform exposure and/or flash bracketing:
Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by: Exposure modified by:
0 EV
1 EV
+1 EV
1 Choose the number of shots and exposure
increment.
· Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
226 Shooting Settings
· At settings other than zero, a M icon and exposure and flash bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel and BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder.
· Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the exposure increment.
· When [1/3 step] is selected for Custom Setting b1 [EV steps for exposure cntrl], the size of the increment can be chosen from 0.3 (1/3), 0.7 (2/3), 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 EV. Bracketing programs with an increment of 2.0 or 3.0 EV offer a maximum of 5 shots. If a value of 7 or 9 was selected in Step 1, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.
Shooting Settings 227
· The bracketing programs with an increment of 0.3 (1/3) EV are listed below.
Control panel display
Exposure and flash bracketing indicator
No. of shots
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
0
3
0/+0.3/+0.7
3
0/0.7/0.3
2
0/+0.3
2
0/0.3
3
0/0.3/+0.3
5
0/0.7/0.3/+0.3/ +0.7
7
0/1.0/0.7/0.3/ +0.3/+0.7/+1.0
0/1.3/1.0/
9
0.7/0.3/ +0.3/+0.7/
+1.0/+1.3
228 Shooting Settings
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
· The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation (0 175).
· The modified values for shutter speed and aperture are shown in the display.
· While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot.
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
Shooting Settings 229
D Exposure and Flash Bracketing · [Number of shots] and [Increment] can also be selected via the [Auto
bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu. · In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed. · If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
A Bracketing Options When [AE & flash bracketing] is selected, the camera varies both exposure and flash level. Select [AE bracketing] to vary only exposure, [Flash bracketing] to vary only flash level. Note that flash bracketing is available in i-TTL and, where supported, auto aperture (qA) flash control modes only (0 462, 798). A Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (mode P), aperture (mode S), or shutter speed (modes A and M). If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed.
230 Shooting Settings
Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and M is no longer displayed. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 282), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Shooting Settings 231
White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each with a different white balance. To use white balance bracketing: · In continuous release modes, the camera will record only the
number of photographs selected in the white balance bracketing program.
1 Choose the number of shots and exposure
increment.
· Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
· At settings other than zero, a M icon and WB bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel and BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder.
232 Shooting Settings
· Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the white balance adjustment.
· The size of the increment can be chosen from 1 (1 step), 2 (2 steps), or 3 (3 steps).
· Each step is equivalent to 5 mired. Higher A values correspond to increased amounts of amber. Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue (0 200).
Shooting Settings 233
· The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below.
Control panel display
WB bracketing indicator
No. of shots
White balance increment
Bracketing order
0
1
0
3
1B
0/B1/B2
3
1A
0/A2/A1
2
1B
0/B1
2
1A
0/A1
3 1A, 1B 0/A1/B1
5
1A, 1B
0/A2/A1/B1/ B2
7
1A, 1B
0/A3/A2/A1/ B1/B2/B3
0/A4/A3/A2/ 9 1A, 1B A1/B1/B2/
B3/B4
234 Shooting Settings
2 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
· Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a different white balance. Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine-tuning.
· If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining, n and the icon for the affected card will flash in the control panel, a flashing j icon will appear in the viewfinder, and the shutter release will be disabled. Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted.
Shooting Settings 235
D White Balance Bracketing Restrictions White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG. D White Balance Bracketing · [Number of shots] and [Increment] can also be selected via the [Auto
bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu. · White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-
blue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 200). No adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis. · If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded.
236 Shooting Settings
Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and M is no longer displayed. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 282), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
Shooting Settings 237
ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures. To use ADL bracketing:
1 Choose the number of shots.
· Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
· At settings other than zero, a M icon and an ADL bracketing indicator appear in the control panel and BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder.
· Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active D-Lighting off and another at a selected value. Choose three to five shots to take a series of photographs with Active D-Lighting set to [Off], [Low], and [Normal] (three shots), [Off], [Low], [Normal], and [High] (four shots), or [Off], [Low], [Normal], [High], and [Extra high] (five shots). If you choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 3.
238 Shooting Settings
2 If the number of shots in the bracketing sequence
is 2, choose the Active D-Lighting amount.
· Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub-command dial to choose the Active D-Lighting setting for the second shot.
Shooting Settings 239
· Active D-Lighting is shown in the control panel.
ADL
Control panel display
Y [Auto]
Z [Extra high]
P [High]
Q [Normal]
R [Low]
240 Shooting Settings
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-byshot according to the bracketing program selected. While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel. A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot.
No. shots: 3
Display after first shot
A ADL Bracketing · [Number of shots] and [Amount] can also be selected via the [Auto
bracketing] item in the photo shooting menu. · In continuous release modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed. · If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
Shooting Settings 241
Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero (r) and M is no longer displayed. The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (0 282), although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated.
242 Shooting Settings
Image Processing (Picture Controls)
Selecting a Picture Control
Adjust image processing (Picture Control) settings according to your subject or creative intent. Picture Control options can be accessed via the [Set Picture Control] items in the photo and movie shooting menus (0 553, 577).
· In modes other than P, S, A, and M, the camera chooses a Picture Control automatically according to the scene.
Option n [Auto]
Q [Standard] R [Neutral] S [Vivid]
Description
The camera automatically adjusts hues and tones based on the [Standard] Picture Control. The complexions of portrait subjects will appear softer, and such elements as the foliage and sky in outdoor shots more vivid, than in pictures taken with the [Standard] Picture Control.
Standard processing for balanced results. Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for photographs that will later be processed or retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect. Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors.
Shooting Settings 243
Option
Description
T [Monochrome] Take monochrome photographs.
o [Portrait]
Smooth complexions for natural-looking portraits.
p [Landscape] Shoot vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
q [Flat]
Details are preserved over a wide tone range, from highlights to shadows. Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched.
k01 [Creative Picture
k20 Control]
Creative Picture Controls offer unique combinations of hue, tone, saturation, and other settings tuned for particular effects. Choose from a total of 20 options, including [Dream] and [Morning].
A Set Picture Control The [Set Picture Control] item in the movie shooting menu also offers a [Same as photo settings] option that sets the Picture Control for movies to the same as that used for photographs.
244 Shooting Settings
Modifying Picture Controls
Picture Controls can be modified to suit the scene or the photographer's creative intent.
1 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Picture Control list and press 2.
2 Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired setting (0 247) and press 4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in increments of 0.25 (the options available vary with the Picture Control selected). To quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening], [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity], highlight [Quick sharp] and press 4 or 2. Repeat this step until all settings have been adjusted. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button.
Shooting Settings 245
3 Save changes and exit.
Press J to save changes and return to the Picture Control list. Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk ("U").
246 Shooting Settings
Picture Control Settings
Option
Description
[Effect level]
Mute or heighten the effect of Creative Picture Controls.
[Quick sharp]
Quickly adjust levels for balanced [Sharpening], [Mid-range sharpening], and [Clarity]. These parameters can also be adjusted individually.
[Sharpening]
[Sharpening]: Control the sharpness of details and outlines.
[Mid-range sharpening]
[Mid-range sharpening]: Adjust the sharpness of patterns and lines in the range between [Sharpening] and [Clarity].
[Clarity]
[Clarity]: Adjust overall sharpness and the sharpness of thicker outlines without affecting brightness or dynamic range.
[Contrast]
Adjust contrast.
[Brightness]
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in highlights or shadows.
[Saturation]
Control the vividness of colors.
[Hue]
Adjust hue.
[Filter effects]
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome pictures.
[Toning]
Choose the tint used in monochrome pictures. Pressing 2 when an option other than [B&W] (black-and-white) is selected displays saturation options.
[Toning] (Creative Choose the shade of color used for Creative
Picture Control)
Picture Controls.
Shooting Settings 247
D [Filter Effects] Choose from the following [Filter effects]:
Option
Description
[Y] (yellow) * [O] (orange) *
[R] (red) *
These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in landscape photographs. Orange ([O]) produces more contrast than yellow ([Y]), red ([R]) more contrast than orange.
[G] (green) * Green softens skin tones. Use for portraits and the like.
* The term in parentheses is the name of the corresponding third-party color filter for black-and-white photography.
D The i Menu Highlighting [Set Picture Control] in the i menu and pressing J displays a Picture Control list. Highlight a Picture Control and press 3 to adjust settings. · Press 1 or 3 to highlight settings. Press 4 or
2 to choose a value in increments of 1, or rotate the sub-command dial to choose a value in increments of 0.25. · The options available vary with the Picture Control selected. · Default settings can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button. · Press J to save changes and return to the i menu. · Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk ("U").
248 Shooting Settings
D The j Indicator The j indicator under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting. D [A] (Auto) · Selecting the [A] (auto) option available for
some settings lets the camera adjust the setting automatically. · Results vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame. A The [Auto] Picture Control Settings can be adjusted in the range [A-2] to [A+2].
Shooting Settings 249
Creating Custom Picture Controls
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls.
Option
Description
Create a new custom Picture Control based on an [Save/edit] existing preset or custom Picture Control, or edit existing
custom Picture Controls.
[Rename] Rename custom Picture Controls.
[Delete] Delete custom Picture Controls.
[Load/save]
Copy custom Picture Controls to and from the memory card.
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1 Highlight [Manage Picture
Control] in the photo or movie shooting menu and press 2.
2 Select [Save/edit].
Highlight [Save/edit] and press 2 to view [Choose Picture Control] options.
250 Shooting Settings
3 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture Control and press 2, or press J to proceed to Step 5 to save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification.
4 Edit the selected Picture Control.
To abandon any changes and start over from default settings, press the O (Q) button. Press J when settings are complete.
5 Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) and press 2.
Shooting Settings 251
6 Name the Picture Control.
· A text-entry dialog will be displayed.
· By default, new Picture Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control. Skip to Step 7 to proceed without renaming the Picture Control, or rename the Picture Control as described in "Text Entry" (0 61). Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long. Any characters after the nineteenth will be deleted.
7 Press the X (T) button.
· Text entry will end.
· The new Picture Control will be added to the Picture Control list.
252 Shooting Settings
A The Original Picture Control Icon The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display.
A Custom Picture Control Options The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based. A Sharing Custom Picture Controls The [Load/save] item in the [Manage Picture Control] menu offers the options listed below. Use these options to copy custom Picture Controls to and from memory cards (these options are available only with the memory card in Slot 1 and cannot be used with the card in Slot 2). Once copied to memory cards, Picture Controls can be used with other cameras or compatible software. · [Copy to camera]: Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card
to custom Picture Controls C-1 through C-9 on the camera and name them as desired. · [Delete from card]: Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the memory card. · [Copy to card]: Copy a custom Picture Control (C-1 through C-9) from the camera to a selected destination (1 through 99) on the memory card.
Shooting Settings 253
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows (Active D-Lighting and HDR)
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting, accessed via the [Active D-Lighting] item in the photo or movie shooting menu, is used to preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with natural contrast. Use for high-contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly-lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting is most effective when [Matrix metering] is selected for metering.
[Off]
[Auto]
254 Shooting Settings
Active D-Lighting Options
Option
Description
Y [Auto]
Z [Extra high] P [High] Q [Normal] R [Low]
The camera automatically adjusts Active D-Lighting in response to shooting conditions.
Choose the amount of Active D-Lighting performed from [Extra high], [High], [Normal], and [Low].
[Off]
Active D-Lighting off.
D Active D-Lighting and Movies If [Same as photo settings] is selected for [Active D-Lighting] in the movie shooting menu and [Auto] is selected in the photo shooting menu, movies will be shot at a setting equivalent to [Normal].
D Active D-Lighting · "Noise" in the form of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines may
appear in photos taken with Active D-Lighting. · In mode M, [Auto] is equivalent to [Normal]. · Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects. · Active D-Lighting does not apply at high ISO sensitivities (Hi 0.3Hi 2),
including high sensitivities selected via auto ISO sensitivity control.
Shooting Settings 255
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
The [HDR (high dynamic range)] item in the photo shooting menu can be used with high-contrast subjects to preserve details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures. Use with high-contrast scenes and other subjects to preserve a wide range of details, from highlights to shadows.
HDR Options
The following options are available: · [HDR mode]: Choose from [On (series)] (take a series of HDR
photographs, ending when [Off] is selected), [On (single photo)] (take one HDR photograph), and [Off] (exit without taking additional HDR photographs). · [HDR strength]: Choose the HDR strength. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically adjust HDR strength to suit the scene. · [Save individual images (NEF)]: Choose [On] to save each of the individual shots used to create the HDR image; the shots are saved in NEF (RAW) format.
256 Shooting Settings
Taking HDR Photographs
We recommend that you use the [Matrix metering] metering option when shooting with HDR.
1 Select [HDR (high dynamic
range)].
Highlight [HDR (high dynamic range)] in the photo shooting menu and press 2.
2 Select a mode.
· Highlight [HDR mode] and press 2.
· Choose an HDR mode using 1 or 3 and press J.
Shooting Settings 257
3 Choose the [HDR strength].
· To choose the difference in exposure between the two shots (HDR strength), highlight [HDR strength] and press 2.
· Highlight the desired option and press J. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically adjust HDR strength to suit the scene.
4 Choose whether to keep
individual exposures.
To choose whether to save the individual NEF (RAW) images that make up the HDR photograph, highlight [Save individual images (NEF)] and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired option and press J to select.
258 Shooting Settings
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
· The camera takes two exposures when the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down. Flashing "1" and "2" indicators will appear respectively in the control panel and viewfinder while the images are combined. No pictures can be taken until recording is complete.
· If [On (series)] is selected, HDR will only turn off when [Off] is selected for HDR mode; if [On (single photo)] is selected, HDR turns off automatically after the photograph is taken.
D NEF (RAW) HDR photographs taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option is selected for image quality will be recorded in JPEG format.
Shooting Settings 259
D HDR Photography · The edges of the image will be cropped out. · The desired results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves
during shooting. Use of a tripod is recommended. · Depending on the scene, you may notice shadows around bright
objects or halos around dark objects. In some cases, HDR may have little effect. · Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects. · With non-CPU lenses and when [Spot metering] or [Center-weighted metering] is selected, an [HDR strength] setting of [Auto] is equivalent to [Normal]. · Optional flash units will not fire. · Regardless of the option currently selected for release mode, only one photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed. · Shutter speeds of Bulb (Bulb) and Time (Time) are not available. D HDR Restrictions HDR cannot be combined with some camera features, including: · Modes other than P, S, A, and M · Flicker reduction · Bracketing · Multiple exposure · Interval-timer photography · Time-lapse movies · Focus shift · The negative digitizer
260 Shooting Settings
A Choosing HDR Mode and Strength via the BKT Button and Command Dials
When [HDR (high dynamic range)] is selected for Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls] > [BKT button], [HDR mode] (Step 2) and [HDR strength] (Step 3) can be selected using the BKT button and command dials. · Hold the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial to choose from the following HDR modes: a ([Off]), 1 ([On (single photo)]), and b ([On (series)]). · When 1 ([On (single photo)]) or b ([On (series)]) is selected, you can adjust HDR strength by holding the BKT button and rotating the sub-command dial.
Shooting Settings 261
Options for Movie Recording and Editing
Image Area: Choosing a Movie Crop
You can choose an image area using the [Image area] > [Choose image area] item in the movie shooting menu. Select [FX] to shoot movies in what is referred to as "FX-based movie format", [DX] to shoot in "DX-based movie format". The differences between the two are illustrated below.
262 Options for Movie Recording and Editing
· The sizes of the areas recorded are approximately 35.9 × 20.2 mm (FX-based movie format) and 23.5 × 13.2 mm (DXbased movie format). Movies shot with a DX-format lens and [On] selected for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop] in the movie shooting menu are recorded in DX-based movie format.
· Enabling electronic vibration reduction by selecting [On] for [Electronic VR] in the movie shooting menu reduces the size of the crop, slightly increasing the apparent focal length.
Options for Movie Recording and Editing 263
Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality
The [Frame size/frame rate] item in the movie shooting menu is used to choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. You can also choose from two [Movie quality] options: [High quality] and [Normal]. Together, these options determine the maximum bit rate and recording time, as shown in the following table.
Frame size/frame rate1
r [3840 × 2160; 30p] 2 s [3840 × 2160; 25p] 2 t [3840 × 2160; 24p] 2 w [1920 × 1080; 120p] 4, 5 x [1920 × 1080; 100p] 4, 5 y/y [1920 × 1080; 60p] z/z [1920 × 1080; 50p] 1/1 [1920 × 1080; 30p] 2/2 [1920 × 1080; 25p] 3/3 [1920 × 1080; 24p]
Max. bit rate (Mbps) Max.
High quality
recording
Normal
time
144
-- 3
29 min.
59 s 6
56
28
28
14
264 Options for Movie Recording and Editing
Frame size/frame rate1
A
[1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)] 4, 5, 7
B
[1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)] 4, 5, 7
C
[1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)] 4, 5, 7
Max. bit rate (Mbps) Max.
High quality
recording
Normal
time
36
-- 3
3 min.
29
1 Actual frame rates for values listed as 120p, 60p, 30p, and 24p are respectively 119.88 fps, 59.94 fps, 29.97 fps, and 23.976 fps.
2 Record movies in 4K UHD. 3 [Movie quality] fixed at [High quality]. 4 Image area fixed at [FX]; face detection not enabled in [Auto-area AF]
AF-area mode. 5 Movies shot in l or e mode with 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080
100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion selected will be recorded at the following frame sizes and rates: · [1920 × 1080; 120p] or [1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)]
selected: recorded at [1920 × 1080; 30p] · [1920 × 1080; 100p] or [1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)]
selected: recorded at [1920 × 1080; 25p] · [1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)] selected: recorded at [1920 ×
1080; 24p] 6 Each movie may be recorded across up to 8 files of up to 4 GB each.
The number of files and the length of each file vary with the option selected for [Movie quality] in the movie shooting menu. Movies recorded to memory cards formatted in the camera will however be recorded as a single file regardless of size if the card has a capacity over 32 GB. 7 See "Slow Motion Movies" (0 266).
Options for Movie Recording and Editing 265
Slow-Motion Movies
To record silent slow-motion movies, select [1920×1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)], [1920×1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)], or [1920×1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)] for [Frame size/frame rate] in the movie shooting menu. Movies recorded at 4 or 5 times the rated speed are played back at the rated speed for a slow-motion effect. Movies shot at [1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slowmotion)], for example, are recorded at a frame rate of roughly 120 fps and play back at around 30 fps, meaning that 10 seconds recording produces about 40 seconds of footage.
· Recording and playback speeds are shown below.
Frame size/frame rate
Frame rate * Recorded at Plays back at
[1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-motion)]
120p
30p
[1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-motion)]
100p
25p
[1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-motion)]
120p
24p
* Actual frame rate is 119.88 fps for values listed as 120p, 29.97 fps for values listed as 30p, and 23.976 fps for values listed as 24p.
266 Options for Movie Recording and Editing
D Slow-Motion Movies · When a slow-motion option is selected, quality is fixed at "high quality"
and the image area is fixed at [FX] regardless of the lens used or the option selected for [Image area] > [Choose image area] in the movie shooting menu (0 129). · Features such as flicker reduction, electronic vibration reduction, and time code output cannot be used when a "slow-motion" option is selected.
Options for Movie Recording and Editing 267
Points to Note When Recording Movies
Note the following points when recording movies: · Depending on memory card write speed, shooting may end
before the maximum length (0 264) is reached. · Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in face-
detection AF drops during movie recording. · A 0 icon indicates that movies cannot be recorded. · [Spot metering] is not available during movie recording. · Flash lighting cannot be used.
268 Options for Movie Recording and Editing
A Movie Recording: Shooting Mode · If the subject is over- or under-exposed in mode P or S, end live view
and start live view again or select mode A and adjust aperture. · The following exposure settings can be adjusted during filming:
Mode
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO sensitivity 2
P, S 1
--
--
-- 3
A
4
--
-- 3
M
4
4
4 4
Other shooting modes
--
--
--
1 Exposure for mode S is equivalent to mode P. 2 Regardless of the option chosen for [ISO sensitivity settings] >
[Maximum sensitivity] or for [ISO sensitivity (mode M)], the upper limit when [On] is selected for [Electronic VR] in the movie shooting menu is ISO 51200. 3 The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity] item in the movie shooting menu. 4 If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO control (mode M)] in the movie shooting menu, the upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using [Maximum sensitivity].
Options for Movie Recording and Editing 269
A Adjusting White Balance During Movie Recording White balance can be adjusted during movie recording by pressing the Q/g (U) button and rotating the main command dial. Options for the selected setting, if any, can be selected by holding the Q/g (U) button and rotating the sub-command dial (0 195). A Recording Movies in Mode M In mode M shutter speed can be set to values between 1/25 s and 1/8000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame rate; 0 264). A Wireless Remote Controllers and Remote Cords If [Record movies] is selected for Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Shutter-release button], the shutter-release buttons on optional wireless remote controllers and remote cords can be pressed halfway to start live view or pressed all the way down to start and end movie recording. A Using an External Microphone The optional ME-1 stereo microphone or ME-W1 wireless microphone can be used to record sound for movies.
270 Options for Movie Recording and Editing
Editing Movies
Movies can be edited using the following options:
Option
Description
9 [Choose start/ end point]
4 [Save current frame]
r [Add index]
o [Delete index]
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed.
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
Add indices to movies during playback. Indices can be used to quickly locate frames during playback and editing (0 277). Delete indices from movies (0 277).
Options for Movie Recording and Editing 271
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1 Display a movie full frame (0 353). 2 Pause the movie on the new
opening frame.
Play the movie back as described in "Viewing Movies" (0 53), pressing J to start and resume playback and 3 to pause and pressing 4 or 2 or rotating the main command dial to locate the desired frame. Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause playback when you reach the new opening frame.
272 Options for Movie Recording and Editing
3 Select [Choose start/end
point].
Press the i button, then highlight [Choose start/end point] and press 2.
4 Choose the start point.
To create a copy that begins from the current frame, highlight [Start point] and press J. The frames before the current frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 10.
Options for Movie Recording and Editing 273
5 Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back, rotate the main command dial; to skip to the first or last frame, rotate the sub-command dial).
6 Choose the end point.
Press Q/g (U) to switch from the start point (w) to the end point (x) selection tool and then select the closing frame as described in Step 5. The frames after the selected frame will be removed when you save the copy in Step 10.
7 Create the copy.
Once the desired closing frame is displayed, press 1.
274 Options for Movie Recording and Editing
8 Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight [Preview] and press J (to interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu, press 1). To abandon the current copy and select a new start point or end point as described above, highlight [Cancel] and press J; to save the copy, proceed to Step 9.
9 Choose a save option.
· [Save as new file]: Save the edited copy to a new file.
· [Overwrite existing file]: Replace the original movie with the edited copy.
10 Save the copy.
Press J to save the copy.
Options for Movie Recording and Editing 275
D Trimming Movies · Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved if
there is insufficient space available on the memory card. · Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original. A Removing Opening or Closing Footage To remove only the opening footage from the movie, proceed to Step 7 without pressing the Q/g (U) button in Step 6. To remove only the closing footage, select [End point] in Step 4, select the closing frame, and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the Q/g (U) button in Step 6. A The Retouch Menu [Trim Movie] Option Movies can also be edited using the [Trim movie] item in the retouch menu.
276 Options for Movie Recording and Editing
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1 Pause the movie on the desired
frame.
Play the movie back as described in "Viewing Movies" (0 53), pressing J to start and resume playback and 3 to pause. Pause the movie at the frame you intend to copy.
2 Choose [Save current frame].
Press the i button, then highlight [Save current frame] and press J to create a JPEG copy of the current frame. The image will be recorded at the dimensions selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in the movie shooting menu. A Save Current Frame
JPEG movie stills created using [Save current frame] cannot be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo information (0 366).
Options for Movie Recording and Editing 277
Adding Indices to Movies
1 Pause playback on the desired
frame. · Press 3 to pause playback. · Press 4 or 2 to locate the desired
frame.
2 Select [Add index].
· Press the i button, highlight [Add index], and press J to add an index.
· Up to 20 indices can be added to each movie.
A Deleting Indices After rotating the sub-command dial to skip to the desired index, either while playback is in progress or while playback is paused, press the i button to display a menu. The selected index can then be deleted by highlighting [Delete index] and pressing J.
278 Options for Movie Recording and Editing
Other Shooting Options
Using Two Memory Cards
To choose the role played by the memory card in Slot 2 when two memory cards are inserted, press the G button and select [Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu.
Option
Description
P [Overflow]
The card in Slot 2 is used only when the card in Slot 1 is full.
Q [Backup]
Each picture is recorded twice, once to the card in Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2.
· The NEF (RAW) copies of photos taken at
settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are recorded
only to the card in Slot 1, the JPEG copies
R [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG only to the card in Slot 2.
Slot 2]
· Pictures taken at other image quality
settings are recorded twice at the same
setting, once to the card in Slot 1 and
again to the card in Slot 2.
Other Shooting Options 279
D [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] · If [On] is selected for [Multiple exposure] > [Save individual images
(NEF)] in the photo shooting menu, or if [On] is selected for [HDR (high dynamic range)] > [Save individual images (NEF)] in the photo shooting menu, unprocessed copies of the individual NEF (RAW) photos that make up each multiple exposure or HDR image will be recorded to both memory cards together with the JPEG composite, regardless of the option selected for image quality. · If [On] is selected for Custom Setting d8 [Save original (EFFECTS)], unprocessed NEF (RAW) copies of pictures taken in f, d, e, k, l, and m modes will be saved to both memory cards together with the final JPEG picture, regardless of the option selected for image quality.
A [Backup] and [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] · The control panel and viewfinder show the number of exposures
remaining on the card with the least amount of space available. · Shutter release will be disabled when either card is full. A Recording Movies When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to record movies can be selected using the [Destination] item in the movie shooting menu.
280 Other Shooting Options
Deleting Copies
When deleting pictures recorded using [Backup] or [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2], you have the choice of erasing either both copies or only the copy on the card in the current slot. · Pressing O (Q) when picture created
using either of these options is highlighted during playback displays a confirmation message. · To delete only the copy on the card in the current slot, highlight [Selected image] and press O (Q) again. The copy on the remaining card is not deleted. · To delete both copies, highlight [Same images on w and x] and press O (Q).
Other Shooting Options 281
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings
The camera settings listed below can be restored to default values by holding the W (Y) and E buttons down together for more than two seconds (these buttons are marked by a green dot). The control panel turns off briefly while settings are reset.
Settings Accessible from the Photo Shooting Menu
Option
Image quality
Image size
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
P, S, A, M Other modes
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Default JPEG normal
Large
100 Auto On
282 Other Shooting Options
Option
White balance
Fine tuning Set Picture Control Active D-Lighting Flicker reduction
Flicker reduction setting Flicker reduction indicator Auto bracketing Multiple exposure HDR (high dynamic range) Silent live view photography
Default Auto > Keep overall
atmosphere A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Auto Off
Disable On Off 1 Off 2 Off 3 Off
1 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1 EV (exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). [Auto] is selected for the second shot of two-shot ADL bracketing programs.
2 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple exposure will be created from exposures recorded to that point. If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, the multiple exposure mode will be reset to [Off]. [Overlay mode], [Number of shots], and [Save individual images (NEF)] are not reset.
3 [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] will be reset to [Off]. [HDR strength] and [Save individual images (NEF)] are not reset.
Other Shooting Options 283
Settings Accessible from the Movie Shooting Menu
Option ISO sensitivity settings
Maximum sensitivity Auto ISO control (mode M) ISO sensitivity (mode M) White balance Set Picture Control Active D-Lighting Electronic VR Headphone volume
Default
51200 On 100
Same as photo settings Same as photo settings
Off Off 15
284 Other Shooting Options
Other Settings
Option Focus point * Flexible program Exposure compensation AE lock hold
Viewfinder photography
AF-area mode
Live view photography
Default
Center
Off
Off
Off
j, l, 8, 9, !
Single-point AF
b, f, d, e, k, m, Auto-area AF
P, S, A, M
e, l Single-point AF
b, j, f, d, k, m, 8, 9, !,
P, S, A, M
Auto-area AF
Other Shooting Options 285
Option
Viewfinder photography
Still photography
Autofocus mode
Live view photography
Movie recording
Metering Flash mode Flash compensation FV lock Multi-selector power aperture Multi selector exposure comp. Exposure delay mode Exposure preview (Lv) Highlight display
Default
b, f, d, e, k, l, m, 8, 9, !,
P, S, A, M
AF-A
j
AF-S
b, j, f, d, k, m, 8, 9, !,
P, S, A, M
AF-A
e, l
AF-S
j, f, d,
k, m, 8,
AF-S
9, !
e, l
AF-C
b, P, S, A, M
AF-F
Matrix metering
Fill flash
Off
Off
Disable
Disable
Off
Off
Off
* Focus point not displayed if [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
286 Other Shooting Options
Combining Multiple Exposures in a Single Photo (Multiple Exposure)
Use the [Multiple exposure] item in the photo shooting menu to record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph.
Multiple Exposure Options
Option
[Multiple exposure
mode]
[Number of shots]
Description
· [On (series)]: Take a series of multiple exposures. Select [Off] to resume normal shooting.
· [On (single photo)]: Take one multiple exposure. · [Off]: Exit without creating additional multiple
exposures.
Choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph.
Other Shooting Options 287
Option
[Overlay mode]
Description
· [Add]: The exposures are overlaid without modification; gain is not adjusted.
· [Average]: Before the exposures are overlaid, the gain for each is divided by the total number of exposures taken (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for 2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc).
· [Lighten]: The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and uses only the brightest.
· [Darken]: The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and uses only the darkest.
[Save individual
images (NEF)]
· [On]: Save both the multiple exposure and the shots that make it up; the pictures are saved in NEF (RAW) format.
· [Off]: Discard the individual shots and save only the multiple exposure.
288 Other Shooting Options
Option
[Overlay shooting]
[Select first exposure
(NEF)]
Description · [On]: Earlier exposures are superimposed on the view
through the lens during live view photography. The earlier exposures aid composition of the next shot. · [Off]: Earlier exposures are not displayed while shooting is in progress.
Choose the first exposure from the NEF (RAW) images on the memory card.
Other Shooting Options 289
Creating a Multiple Exposure
1 Select [Multiple exposure].
Highlight [Multiple exposure] in the photo shooting menu and press 2.
2 Select a mode.
· Highlight [Multiple exposure mode] and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired mode and press J to select.
· If [On (series)] or [On (single photo)] is selected, a n icon will be displayed in the control panel.
3 Choose the number of shots.
· Highlight [Number of shots] and press 2.
· Press 1 or 3 to choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a single photograph and press J.
290 Other Shooting Options
4 Choose the overlay mode.
Highlight [Overlay mode] and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired mode and press J to select.
5 Choose whether to keep
individual exposures.
· Highlight [Save individual images (NEF)] and press 2.
· Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J.
· To save both the multiple exposure and the shots that make it up, select [On]; the individual shots are saved in NEF (RAW) format. To save only the multiple exposure, select [Off].
6 Choose whether to view
progress in the display.
To choose whether earlier exposures are superimposed over the view through the lens as shooting progresses (live view only), highlight [Overlay shooting] and press 2, then press 1 or 3 to choose the desired option and press J to select.
Other Shooting Options 291
7 Choose the first exposure.
· To choose the first exposure from existing NEF (RAW) photos, highlight [Select first exposure (NEF)] and press 2.
· Use the multi selector to highlight the desired picture.
· To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X (T) button.
· After choosing the desired picture, press J. · If the NEF (RAW) image selected for the first exposure was
recorded at an ISO sensitivity of Hi 0.3 to Hi 2, the electronic front-curtain shutter will not be used during the multiple exposure even if [Enable] is selected for Custom Setting d5 [Electronic front-curtain shutter].
292 Other Shooting Options
8 Frame a photograph, focus,
and shoot.
· The n icon starts to flash when the first shot is taken.
· Take the selected number of shots. If you chose an existing NEF (RAW) image as the first exposure using [Select first exposure (NEF)] in Step 7, shooting will start from the second exposure.
· The number of exposures remaining in the current multiple exposure can be displayed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway between shots.
· In [On (single photo)] mode, the n icon clears from the display and multiple exposure shooting ends automatically when the multiple exposure is complete.
· In [On (series)] mode, multiple exposure shooting continues until you select [Off] for [Multiple exposure mode].
Other Shooting Options 293
D NEF (RAW) Multiple exposures shot with an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option selected for image quality will be recorded in JPEG format.
D Multiple Exposure · If the monitor turns off during playback or menu operations and no
operations are performed for about 30 s, shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point. The time available to record the next exposure can be extended by choosing longer times for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer]. · Multiple exposures may be affected by noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines). · In continuous shooting modes, the camera records all exposures in a single burst. If [On (single photo)] is selected, multiple exposure shooting will end after the first multiple exposure is recorded. If [On (series)] is selected, an additional multiple exposure will be recorded each time the shutter-release button is pressed. · In self-timer mode (0 183), the camera will automatically record the number of exposures selected in Step 3, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 [Self-timer] > [Number of shots]; the interval between shots is however controlled by Custom Setting c3 [Self-timer] > [Interval between shots]. · The shooting settings and photo info for multiple exposure photographs are those for the first exposure. · Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure. · While a multiple exposure is being shot, memory cards cannot be formatted and some menu items are grayed out and cannot be changed.
294 Other Shooting Options
A The BKT Button If [Multiple exposure] is selected for Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls] > [BKT button], you can select an option for [Multiple exposure mode] by pressing the BKT button and rotating the main command dial and a value for [Number of shots] by pressing the BKT button and rotating the sub-command dial. · Press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial to choose from a ([Off]), 1 ([On (single photo)]), and b ([On (series)]).
· Press the BKT button and rotate the subcommand dial to choose the number of shots.
A Multiple Exposure: Restrictions Multiple exposure cannot be combined with some camera features, including: · Modes other than P, S, A, and M · Movie recording · Bracketing · HDR (high dynamic range) · Interval-timer photography · Time-lapse movies · Focus shift · The negative digitizer
Other Shooting Options 295
Using the i Button
Pictures can be viewed by pressing the K button while a multiple exposure is in progress. The most recent shot in the current multiple exposure is indicated by a o icon; pressing the i button when this icon is present displays the multiple exposure i menu.
· Use the touch screen or navigate the menu using the multi selector, pressing 1 or 3 to highlight items and pressing J to select.
Option
Description
[View progress]
View a preview created from the exposures recorded to the current point.
[Retake last exposure]
Retake the most recent exposure.
[Save and exit]
Create a multiple exposure from the exposures taken to current point.
Exit without recording a multiple exposure. If [On] [Discard and exit] is selected for [Save individual images (NEF)], the
individual exposures will be kept.
296 Other Shooting Options
Ending Multiple Exposures
To end a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken, select [Off] for multiple exposure mode or press the K button followed by the i button and select either [Save and exit] or [Discard and exit]. If shooting ends or you select [Save and exit] before the specified number of exposures have been taken, a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point. If [Average] is selected for [Overlay mode], gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if: · A two-button reset is performed · The camera is turned off · The battery is exhausted
Other Shooting Options 297
Taking Photos at a Set Interval (Interval Timer Shooting)
Use the [Interval timer shooting] item in the photo shooting menu to take photographs at a selected interval until a specified number of shots has been recorded. Select a release mode other than E and MUP when using the interval timer.
Interval Timer Shooting Options
Option
Description
[Start]
Start interval-timer photography, either after 3 s ([Now] selected for [Choose start day/time]) or at a selected date and time [Choose day/time]. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken.
[Choose start day/time]
Choose a start option. To start shooting immediately, select [Now]. To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select [Choose day/time].
[Interval]
Choose the interval (hours, minutes, and seconds) between shots.
[Intervals× shots/
interval]
Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval.
298 Other Shooting Options
Option
Description
[Exposure smoothing]
Selecting [On] allows the camera to adjust exposure to match the previous shot. · Large changes in subject brightness during shooting
may result in apparent variations in exposure. This can be addressed by shortening the interval between shots. · Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M if [Off] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] in the photo shooting menu.
Select [On] to silence the shutter and eliminate the
vibrations it produces during shooting.
[Silent photography]
· Selecting [On] does not completely silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in
the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller
(i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
Other Shooting Options 299
Option
Description
[Interval priority]
· [On]: Select [On] to ensure that frames shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen interval. - Flash photography is disabled. - The number of shots is set to 1, even if the number of shots chosen for [Intervals×shots/interval] is 2 or more. - If AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, or if AF-A is selected and photographs are being taken using AF-S, select [Release] for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S priority selection]. If AF-C is selected, or if AF-A is selected and photographs are being taken using AF-C, select [Release] for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C priority selection]. - If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] and the time chosen for [Minimum shutter speed] is longer than the interval, the time selected for the interval will take priority over the selected shutter speed.
· [Off]: Select [Off] to ensure that photos are correctly exposed.
[Focus before If [On] is selected, the camera will focus before each each shot] shot after the first.
300 Other Shooting Options
Option
[Options]
[Starting storage folder]
Description
Combine interval-timer photography with other options. · [AE bracketing]: Perform exposure bracketing during
interval-timer photography. · [Time-lapse movie]: Use the photos taken during
interval-timer photography to create a time-lapse movie with an aspect ratio of 16:9. The camera saves both the photos and the time-lapse movie. - Selecting [1:1 (24×24)] for [Image area] > [Choose
image area] in the photo shooting menu disables the shutter release. - Movies created using [Time-lapse movie] are recorded in the [sRGB] color space, regardless of the option selected for [Color space] in the photo shooting menu. · [Off]: Do not perform additional operations during interval-timer photography.
Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select or deselect: · [New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
sequence. · [Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.
Other Shooting Options 301
D Before Shooting · Before beginning interval-timer photography, take a test shot at current
settings. · Select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure that the
camera clock is set to the correct time and date. · We recommend using a tripod and disabling lens vibration reduction
(VR). Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. · To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is
fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an AC adapter and power connector (available separately). · When taking photos with your eye from the viewfinder and [Off] selected for [Silent photography], remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs and exposure (0 10).
302 Other Shooting Options
Interval-Timer Photography
1 Highlight [Interval timer
shooting] in the photo shooting menu and press 2.
2 Adjust interval timer settings.
Adjust interval timer settings as described below. · To choose a start day and time:
Highlight [Choose start day/ Highlight an option and
time] and press 2.
press J.
- To start shooting immediately, select [Now]. To start shooting at a chosen date and time, select [Choose day/ time], then choose the date and time and press J.
Other Shooting Options 303
· To choose the interval between shots:
Highlight [Interval] and press 2.
Choose an interval (hours,
minutes, and seconds) and press J.
· To choose the number of shots per interval:
Highlight [Intervals×shots/ interval] and press 2.
Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots per interval and press J.
- In S (single frame) mode, the photographs for each interval will be taken at the rate for CH release mode. - When [Off] is selected for [Silent photography], the maximum number of intervals will vary with the number of shots per interval.
304 Other Shooting Options
· To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Highlight [Exposure smoothing] and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
· To enable or disable silent photography:
Highlight [Silent
Highlight an option and
photography] and press 2. press J.
- If [On] is selected, the only time the sound of the shutter or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or lowered at the start and end of shooting.
Other Shooting Options 305
· To choose an interval priority option:
Highlight [Interval priority] Highlight an option and
and press 2.
press J.
· Choose whether the camera focuses before each shot after the first:
Highlight [Focus before each shot] and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
306 Other Shooting Options
· To choose additional options:
Highlight [Options] and press 2.
Highlight [AE bracketing] or [Time-lapse movie] and press 2.
- Choose the [Number of shots] and [Increment] ([AE bracketing]) or the [Frame size/frame rate] and [Destination] ([Time-lapse movie]). · Choosing start folder options:
Highlight [Starting storage folder] and press 2.
Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect. Press J to proceed.
Other Shooting Options 307
3 Start shooting.
Highlight [Start] and press J. The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time, or after about 3 s if [Now] was selected for [Choose start day/time] in Step 2. Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken.
308 Other Shooting Options
D Interval-Timer Photography · Choose an interval longer than the time needed to take the selected
number of shots at the predicted shutter speed. Note that during actual interval-timer photography, the camera must not only take shots at the selected interval but must also have sufficient time to complete the exposures and perform such tasks as processing the photographs. If the interval is too short to take the selected number of photos, the camera may skip to the next interval without shooting. · If the interval is too short, the total number of shots taken may be less than that selected for [Intervals×shots/interval]. · If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time need for the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at less than the power needed for full exposure. · If shooting cannot proceed at current settings--for example, if shutter speed is set to A (Bulb) or % (Time), the interval is [00:00'00"], or the start time is in less than a minute--a warning will be displayed in the monitor. · If [On] is selected for [Silent photography] or [Time-lapse movie] is selected for [Options], the standby timer will not expire during intervaltimer photography, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer]. · If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken. Insert another memory card and resume shooting (0 312).
Other Shooting Options 309
· Interval-timer photography will pause if: - The camera is turned off and then on again (when the camera is off, batteries and memory cards can be replaced without ending intervaltimer photography) - E or MUP is selected for release mode
· Changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause shooting to end.
D Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval. D Adjusting Settings Between Shots Pictures can be viewed and shooting and menu settings adjusted between shots. Note, however, that the monitor will turn off approximately 2 s before the next shot is taken. D Interval-Timer Photography: Restrictions Interval-timer photography cannot be combined with some camera features, including: · Live view · Movie recording · Long time-exposures (bulb or time photography) · The self-timer · Bracketing · Multiple exposure · HDR (high dynamic range) · Focus shift · The negative digitizer
310 Other Shooting Options
D When [On] Is Selected for [Silent Photography] Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features, including: · ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 · Flash photography · Exposure delay mode · Long exposure noise reduction · Flicker reduction D Interval Timer Settings Turning the camera off or selecting a new release mode does not affect interval-timer photography settings.
A During Shooting During interval-timer photography, the memory card access lamp will flash. Immediately before the next shooting interval begins, the shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining, and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval. · Between shots, the number of intervals remaining and the number of
shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. · If [Time-lapse movie] is selected for [Options], the memory card access lamp will remain lit during interval-timer photography.
Other Shooting Options 311
Pausing Interval-Timer Photography
Interval-timer photography can be paused between intervals by pressing J or by selecting [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlighting [Pause], and pressing J. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. · If [Time-lapse movie] is selected for [Options], pressing J
between intervals will end interval-timer photography.
312 Other Shooting Options
Resuming Interval-Timer Photography
Shooting can be resumed using the [Interval timer shooting] item in the photo shooting menu. The procedure is as follows: To resume shooting immediately:
Highlight [Restart] and press J.
To resume shooting at a specified time:
For [Restart option], highlight [Choose day/time] and press 2.
Choose a starting
date and time and press J.
Highlight [Restart] and press J.
Other Shooting Options 313
Ending Interval-Timer Photography
To end interval-timer photography before all the photos are taken, select [Off] for [Interval timer shooting]. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. In this case you will need to press J to pause interval-timer photography and then select [Interval timer shooting] in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Off], and press J.
314 Other Shooting Options
Creating a Movie from Photos (TimeLapse Movie)
Use the [Time-lapse movie] item in the photo shooting menu to create silent time-lapse movies from photos taken automatically at a selected interval.
Time-Lapse Movie Options
Option [Start]
[Interval] [Shooting
time]
[Exposure smoothing]
Description
Start time-lapse recording. Shooting starts after about 3 s and continues at the selected interval for the selected shooting time.
Choose the interval between shots in minutes and seconds.
Choose how long the camera will continue to take pictures (hours and minutes).
Selecting [On] smooths abrupt changes in exposure in modes other than M (note that exposure smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval between shots.
Other Shooting Options 315
Option
Description
Select [On] to silence the shutter and eliminate the
vibrations it produces during shooting.
[Silent photography]
· Selecting [On] does not completely silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in
the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller
(i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
[Image area]
· [Choose image area]: Choose the image area for time-lapse movies from [FX] and [DX].
· [Auto DX crop]: If [On] is selected, the camera will automatically choose the [DX] crop when a DX lens is attached.
[Frame size/ frame rate]
Choose the frame size and rate for the final movie.
316 Other Shooting Options
Option
Description
[Interval priority]
· [On]: Select [On] to ensure that frames shot in modes P and A are taken at the chosen interval. - If AF-S is selected for autofocus mode, or if AF-A is selected and photographs are being taken using AF-S, select [Release] for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S priority selection]. If AF-C is selected, or if AF-A is selected and photographs are being taken using AF-C, select [Release] for Custom Setting a1 [AF-C priority selection]. - If [On] is selected for [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Auto ISO sensitivity control] and the time chosen for [Minimum shutter speed] is longer than the interval, the time selected for the interval will take priority over the selected shutter speed.
· [Off]: Select [Off] to ensure that photos are correctly exposed.
[Focus before If [On] is selected, the camera will focus before each each shot] shot after the first.
[Destination]
Choose the slot used to record time-lapse movies when two memory cards are inserted.
Other Shooting Options 317
Recording Time-Lapse Movies
D Before Shooting · Choose a mode other than EFCT. · Before shooting a time-lapse movie, take a test shot at current settings
and view the results. · Time-lapse movies are shot using the movie crop. · Select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and make sure that the
camera clock is set to the correct time and date. · We recommend using a tripod and disabling lens vibration reduction
(VR). Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. · To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an optional AC adapter
and power connector or a fully-charged battery. · When taking photos with your eye from the viewfinder and [Off]
selected for [Silent photography], remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs and exposure (0 10).
1 Highlight [Time-lapse movie]
in the photo shooting menu and press 2.
318 Other Shooting Options
2 Adjust time-lapse movie settings.
Adjust time-lapse movie settings as described below. · To choose the interval between frames:
Highlight [Interval] and press 2.
Choose an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed (minutes and seconds) and press J.
· To choose the total shooting time:
Highlight [Shooting time] and press 2.
Choose shooting time (up to
7 hours 59 minutes) and press J.
Other Shooting Options 319
· To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Highlight [Exposure smoothing] and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
- Select [On] to smooth changes in exposure for naturallooking footage. · To enable or disable silent photography:
Highlight [Silent
Highlight an option and
photography] and press 2. press J.
- If [On] is selected, the only time the sound of the shutter or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or lowered at the start and end of shooting.
320 Other Shooting Options
· To choose the image area:
Highlight [Image area] and press 2.
Highlight [Choose image area] or [Auto DX crop] and press 2.
- If you selected [Choose image area], choose [FX] or [DX]; if you selected [Auto DX crop], highlight [On] or [Off] and press J.
· To choose the frame size and rate:
Highlight [Frame size/frame Highlight an option and
rate] and press 2.
press J.
Other Shooting Options 321
· To choose an interval priority option:
Highlight [Interval priority] Highlight an option and
and press 2.
press J.
· Choose whether the camera focuses before each shot after the first:
Highlight [Focus before each shot] and press 2.
Highlight an option and press J.
- If [On] is selected for [Focus before each shot], the camera will focus before each shot according to the option currently selected for autofocus mode.
322 Other Shooting Options
· Choose a destination:
Highlight [Destination] and press 2.
Highlight the slot that will be used to record time-lapse movies when two memory cards are inserted and press J.
3 Highlight [Start] and press J.
· Shooting starts after about 3 s. · The camera takes photographs at
the [Interval] and for the [Shooting time] selected in Step 2.
Other Shooting Options 323
Ending Shooting
To end shooting before all the photos are taken, press J or select [Time-lapse movie] in the photo shooting menu, highlight [Off], and press J. Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected for [Interval] is very short. · A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point
where shooting ended and normal photography will resume.
D Calculating the Length of the Final Movie The total number of frames in the final movie can be calculated by dividing the shooting time by the interval, rounding up, and adding 1. The length of the final movie can then be calculated by dividing the number of shots by the frame rate selected for [Frame size/frame rate]. A 48-frame movie recorded at 1920 × 1080; 24p, for example, will be about two seconds long. The maximum length for time-lapse movies is 20 minutes.
1 Frame size/frame rate 2 Memory card indicator 3 Length recorded/maximum
length
D Image Review The K button cannot be used to view pictures while shooting is in progress, but the current frame will be displayed for a few seconds after each shot if [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu (the frame may not be displayed if the interval is very short). Other playback operations cannot be performed while the frame is displayed.
324 Other Shooting Options
D Time-Lapse Movies · Sound is not recorded with time-lapse movies. · The shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the
memory card may vary from shot to shot. As a result, the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. · Shooting will not begin if a time-lapse movie cannot be recorded at current settings, for example if: - The value selected for [Interval] is longer than that selected for
[Shooting time] - [00:00'00"] is selected for [Interval] or [Shooting time] - The memory card is full · The K button cannot be used to view pictures while time-lapse recording is in progress. · For consistent coloration, choose a white balance setting other than 4 ([Auto]) or D ([Natural light auto]) when recording time-lapse movies. · Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire while recording is in progress. · Shooting may end if camera controls are used or settings are changed or HDMI cable is connected. A movie will be created from the frames shot to the point where shooting ended. · The following end shooting without a beep sounding or a movie being recorded: - Disconnecting the power source - Ejecting the memory card
Other Shooting Options 325
D During Shooting · During shooting, the memory card access
lamp will light and a time-lapse recording indicator will be displayed in the control panel. The time remaining (in hours and minutes) appears in the control panel shutter-speed display immediately before each frame is recorded. · At other times, the time remaining can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release button halfway. D Adjusting Settings Between Shots Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted between shots. Note, however, that the monitor will turn off approximately 2 s before the next shot is taken. D Time-Lapse Movies: Restrictions Time-lapse movie recording cannot be combined with some camera features, including: · EFCT mode · Live view photography · Movie recording · Long time-exposures (bulb or time photography) · The self-timer · Bracketing · Multiple exposure · HDR (high dynamic range) · Interval-timer photography · Focus shift · The negative digitizer
326 Other Shooting Options
D When [On] Is Selected for [Silent Photography] Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features, including: · ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 · Flash photography · Exposure delay mode · Long exposure noise reduction · Flicker reduction
Other Shooting Options 327
Varying Focus over a Series of Photos (Focus Shift Shooting)
Use the [Focus shift shooting] item in the photo shooting menu to vary focus automatically over a series of photographs. This feature can be used to take photos that can later be copied to a computer and combined using third-party focus-stacking software.
328 Other Shooting Options
Focus Shift Shooting Options
Option
Description
[Start]
Start shooting. Shooting will take the selected number of shots, changing the focus distance by the selected amount with each shot.
[No. of shots] Choose the number of shots (maximum 300).
[Focus step Choose the amount the focus distance changes with width] each shot.
The time between shots, in seconds. Select [00] to take [Interval until photos at up to about 3 fps. To ensure the correct
next shot] exposure when using a flash, choose an interval long enough for the flash to charge.
[First-frame exposure lock]
If [On] is selected, the camera will lock exposure for all images at the setting for the first frame.
Select [On] to silence the shutter and eliminate the
vibrations it produces during shooting.
[Silent photography]
· Selecting [On] does not completely silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in
the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller
(i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6.
Other Shooting Options 329
Option
[Starting storage folder]
Description
Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select or deselect: · [New folder]: A new folder is created for each new
sequence. · [Reset file numbering]: File numbering is reset to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.
D Before Shooting · Use an AF-S or AF-P lens. · Choose a release mode other than E. · For best results, we recommend that you choose mode A or M so that
aperture does not change during shooting. Focus shift is not available in b and EFCT modes. · We recommend that you stop aperture down two or three stops from the maximum. · We recommend that you take all shots at the same ISO sensitivity. · Take a test shot at current settings and view the results. · We recommend using a tripod and disabling lens vibration reduction (VR). · To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, use an optional AC adapter and power connector or a fully-charged battery. · When taking photos with your eye from the viewfinder and [Off] selected for [Silent photography], remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied eyepiece cap to prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs and exposure (0 10).
330 Other Shooting Options
Focus-Shift Photography
1 Rotate the focus-mode selector to AF.
Focus shift is not available with manual focus lenses.
2 Focus.
· The camera takes a series of shots starting from a selected focus position and continuing toward infinity. The starting focus position should be slightly in front of the closest point on the subject.
· Do not move the camera after focusing.
3 Highlight [Focus shift
shooting] in the photo shooting menu and press 2.
Other Shooting Options 331
4 Adjust focus shift settings.
Adjust focus shift settings as described below. · To choose the number of shots:
Highlight [No. of shots] and Choose the number of shots
press 2.
(max. 300) and press J.
- We recommend taking more shots than you think you'll need and winnowing them down during focus stacking. More than 100 shots may be required for photographs of insects or other small objects, while only a few are needed to photograph a landscape from front to back with a wide-angle lens.
332 Other Shooting Options
· To choose the amount the focus distance changes with each shot:
Highlight [Focus step width] and press 2.
Press 4 to reduce the focus step width, 2 to increase. Press J to proceed.
- A value of 5 or less is recommended, as higher settings increase the risk that some areas will be out of focus when the shots are stacked. Try experimenting with different settings before shooting.
Other Shooting Options 333
· To choose the interval between shots:
Highlight [Interval until next shot] and press 2.
Choose the number of
secodns between shots and press J.
- Select 00 to take photos at up to approximately 3 fps. A setting of 00 is recommended when shooting without a flash; to ensure the correct exposure when using a flash, choose an interval long enough for the flash to charge.
334 Other Shooting Options
· To enable or disable first-frame exposure lock:
Highlight [First-frame
Highlight an option and
exposure lock] and press 2. press J.
- [Off] is recommended if lighting and other conditions will not change during shooting, [On] when photographing landscapes and the like under variable lighting.
- Selecting [On] locks exposure at the value for the first shot, ensuring that all photos have the same exposure. Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may however result in apparent variations in exposure. This can be addressed by selecting [Off].
Other Shooting Options 335
· To enable or disable silent photography:
Highlight [Silent
Highlight an option and
photography] and press 2. press J.
- If [On] is selected, the only time the sound of the shutter or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or lowered at the start and end of shooting. · Choose start folder options:
Highlight [Starting storage folder] and press 2.
Highlight options and press 2 to select or deselect. Press J to proceed.
- Select [New folder] to create a new folder for each new sequence, [Reset file numbering] to reset file numbering to 0001 whenever a new folder is created.
336 Other Shooting Options
5 Start shooting.
Highlight [Start] and press J. Shooting starts after about 3 s. The camera takes photographs at the selected interval, starting at the focus distance selected at the start of shooting and progressing out toward infinity by the selected focus step distance with each shot. Shooting ends when the selected number of shots has been taken or focus reaches infinity. To end shooting before all shots have been taken, select [Off] for [Focus shift shooting] in the photo shooting menu or press the shutter-release button halfway or press the J button between shots.
Other Shooting Options 337
D Focus-Shift Photography · The shutter speed and the time needed to record the image may vary
from shot to shot. As a result, the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary. · Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer], the standby timer will not expire while shooting is in progress. · If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed for the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at less than the power needed for full exposure. · If shooting cannot proceed at current settings, for example because shutter speed is set to A (bulb) or % (time), a warning will be displayed. · Changing camera settings while focus-shift photography is in progress may cause shooting to end. D Adjusting Settings Between Shots Shooting and menu settings adjusted between shots. Note, however, that the monitor will turn off approximately 2 s before the next shot is taken.
A Close-ups Because depth of focus is reduced at short focus distances, we recommend choosing smaller focus steps and increasing the number of shots when photographing subjects close to the camera.
338 Other Shooting Options
A During Shooting Immediately before each shot taken during focus-shift photography, the shutter-speed display in the control panel will show the number of shots remaining.
A Focus-Shift Photography: Restrictions · Focus-shift photography will not start if:
- The camera clock is not set - An incompatible lens is attached (use only AF-S or AF-P lenses) - No memory card is inserted · Focus-shift photography cannot be combined with some camera features, including: - Live view - Movie recording - Long time-exposures (bulb or time photography) - The self-timer - Bracketing - Multiple exposure - HDR (high dynamic range) - Interval-timer photography - Time-lapse movies - The negative digitizer
A When [On] Is Selected for [Silent Photography] Selecting [On] for [Silent photography] disables some camera features, including: · ISO sensitivities of [Hi 0.3] through [Hi 2.0] · Flash photography · Exposure delay mode · Long exposure noise reduction · Flicker reduction
Other Shooting Options 339
The Electronic Shutter (Silent Live View Photography)
To enable the electronic shutter during live view photography, muting the shutter and eliminating the vibrations it produces, select [On] for [Silent live view photography] in the photo shooting menu. Use for landscapes, still lifes, and other static subjects. · Use of a tripod is recommended. · Enabling silent live view photography changes the frame
advance rates for continuous release modes (0 178).
340 Other Shooting Options
A Silent Live View Photography · Selecting [On] for [Silent live view photography] does not completely
silence the camera. Camera sounds may still be audible, for example during autofocus or aperture adjustment, in the latter case most noticeably at apertures smaller (i.e., at f-numbers higher) than f/5.6. · During silent live view, you may notice the following in the display. These phenomena will also be visible in the final pictures. - Flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent,
mercury vapor, or sodium lamps - Distortion associated with motion (individual subjects such as trains
or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be distorted, or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is panned horizontally) - Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright spots in the display - Bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or when the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source · Selecting [On] for [Silent live view photography] mutes the shutter, but this does not absolve photographers of the need to respect their subjects' privacy and image rights.
Other Shooting Options 341
A Silent Photography Selecting [On] for [Silent live view photography] disables some camera features, including: · ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 · Flash photography · Long exposure noise reduction · Flicker reduction A Silent Burst Photography Custom Setting d13 [Live view in continuous mode] controls whether the monitor remains on during burst photography in silent mode.
342 Other Shooting Options
Photographing Film Negatives (Negative Digitizer)
Create positive copies of color or black-and-white film negatives. [Negative Digitizer] is accessed via the i menu during live view photography.
1 Position the negatives in front of a featureless
white or gray background.
· We recommend using an AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f/2.8G ED or other micro lens and an ES-2 film digitizing adapter.
· We recommend using either natural light or an artificial light source with a high Ra (color rendering index), such as a light box or a high-CRI fluorescent lamp.
2 Rotate the mode dial to A.
We recommend that you choose a sensitivity of ISO 100 and an aperture of f/8.
Other Shooting Options 343
3 Rotate the live view selector to
C and press a.
The view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor.
4 In live view, press the i button
and select [Negative digitizer].
· Highlight [Negative digitizer] using the multi selector and press J; the colors in the display will be reversed.
· The flash mode is automatically set to s. To use a flash, choose a flash mode other than s.
5 Choose the film type.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight [Color negatives] or [Monochrome negatives] and then press J.
344 Other Shooting Options
6 Compose the shot to capture a frame of the film
negative.
7 Adjust exposure.
· Press J to display brightness adjustment options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust exposure. Press J again to save changes and exit.
· To view your subject at a higher magnification, press X (T).
8 Take photographs.
· The photographs will be saved in JPEG format. · Press the i button to exit negative digitizer mode.
Other Shooting Options 345
D Negative Digitizer · No options are available for correcting dust, scratches, or uneven colors
due to faded film. · Photos are saved in JPEG format even when [NEF (RAW)] is selected for
image quality. Photos taken with a JPEG option selected will be saved at the chosen setting, while photos taken with [NEF (RAW)] selected will be saved in [JPEG finem] format. D Negative Digitizer: Restrictions Some camera features cannot be used with the negative digitizer, including: · Modes other than A · Movie recording · Bracketing · Multiple exposure · HDR (high dynamic range) · Interval-timer photography · Time-lapse movies · Focus shift
346 Other Shooting Options
Customizing the i Menu: Customize i Menu
Choose the items displayed in the i menus during shooting. Use Custom Setting f1 [Customize i menu] to choose the items displayed during viewfinder photography, Custom Setting f2 [Customize i menu (Lv)] to choose the items displayed during live view photography, and Custom Setting g1 [Customize i menu] to choose the items displayed during movie recording. The procedure is described below.
Other Shooting Options 347
1 Highlight the position you
want to change and press J.
A list of the items available for the selected position will be displayed.
2 Highlight the desired item and
press J.
· The item will be assigned to the selected position and the options shown in Step 1 will be displayed.
· Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as desired.
3 Press the G button.
Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be displayed.
348 Other Shooting Options
Using Non-CPU Lenses (Non-CPU Lens Data)
Non-CPU lenses (0 786) can be used in modes A and M, with aperture set using the lens aperture ring. By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain access to the following CPU lens functions. · If the focal length of the lens is known:
- Power zoom can be used with optional flash units - Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display · If the maximum aperture of the lens is known: - The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder - Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit supports qA (auto aperture) mode - Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display
Other Shooting Options 349
· Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens: - Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to use [Center-weighted metering] or [Spot metering] to achieve accurate results with some lenses, including ReflexNIKKOR lenses) - Improves the precision of [Center-weighted metering] and [Spot metering] and i-TTL flash control
D Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses · If the correct focal length is not available, for example because you are
using a teleconverter or zoom lens, choose the next largest value. · The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum
aperture of the teleconverter and the lens.
350 Other Shooting Options
Entering Lens Data
1 Select Non-CPU lens data.
Highlight [Non-CPU lens data] in the setup menu and press 2.
2 Select a lens number.
Highlight [Lens number] and press 4 or 2 to choose a lens number.
3 Enter the focal length and
aperture.
Highlight [Focal length (mm)] or [Maximum aperture] and press 4 or 2 to edit the highlighted item.
4 Save settings and exit.
Press J. The specified focal length and aperture will be stored under the chosen lens number.
Other Shooting Options 351
Recalling Non-CPU Lens Data
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera
control.
Assign [Choose non-CPU lens number] to a control using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls].
2 Use the selected control to
choose a lens number.
Press the selected control and rotate a command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel.
1 Focal length 2 Maximum aperture 3 Lens number
A Zoom Lenses Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. The data for different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers, or the data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.
352 Other Shooting Options
Playback
Viewing Pictures
Full-Frame Playback
Press the K button to view the most recent picture full frame in the display.
· Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing 4 or 2; to view additional information on the current photograph, press 1 or 3 (0 366).
Playback 353
Thumbnail Playback
To view multiple images, press the W (Y) button when a picture is displayed full frame.
· The number of images displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each time the W (Y) button is pressed, and decreases with each press of the X (T) button. Use the multi selector to highlight images.
354 Playback
Calendar Playback
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Y) button when 72 images are displayed.
· Use the multi selector (1, 3, 4, or 2) to highlight a date in the date list (q) and press W (Y) to place the cursor in the thumbnail list (w). Press 1 or 3 to highlight pictures in the thumbnail list. To return to the date list, press the W (Y) button a second time.
· To zoom in on the picture highlighted in the thumbnail list, press and hold the X (T) button.
· To exit to thumbnail playback, press X (T) when the cursor is in the date list.
Playback 355
Playback Controls
1
2 3 4 5
1 O (Q): Delete the current picture (0 383)
2 G: View the menus (0 57)
3 Q/g (U): Protect the current picture (0 378)
4 X (T): Zoom in (0 376) 5 W (Y): View multiple pictures
(0 354)
D Touch Controls Touch controls can be used when pictures are displayed in the monitor (0 14).
D Rotate Tall To display "tall" (portrait-orientation) photographs in tall orientation, select [On] for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu.
356 Playback
A Image Review When [On] is selected for [Image review] in the playback menu, photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting (because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are not rotated automatically during image review). In CL, CH, and QC modes, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in the current series displayed.
Playback 357
Using the Touch Screen
During playback, the touch sensitive monitor can be used for the following operations.
Viewing Other Pictures
Flick left or right to view other pictures.
Scrolling Rapidly to Other Pictures
In full frame playback, you can touch the bottom of the display to display a frame advance bar, then slide your finger left or right to scroll rapidly to other pictures.
358 Playback
Zoom (Photos Only)
Use stretch and pinch gestures to zoom in and out and slide to scroll (0 376). You can also give the display two quick taps to zoom in from full-frame playback or cancel zoom.
Viewing Thumbnails
To "zoom out" to a thumbnail view (0 354), use a pinch gesture in full-frame playback. · Use pinch and stretch to choose the
number of images displayed from 4, 9, and 72 frames. · Using a pinch gesture when 72 frames are displayed takes you to calendar playback. To return to 72-frame playback, use a stretch gesture.
Playback 359
View Movies
Tap the on-screen guide to start movie playback (movies are indicated by a 1 icon). Tap the display to pause or resume, or tap Z to exit to full-frame playback (note that some of the icons in the movie playback display do not respond to touch-screen operations).
360 Playback
The i Button
Pressing the i button during playback zoom or full-frame or thumbnail playback displays the i menu for playback mode. Select options using the multi selector and J button and press the i button to exit the menu and return to playback.
Playback 361
Photos
Option
[Quick crop] 1
[Rating] [Select to send/ deselect (smart
device)] [Select to send/ deselect (PC)] [Select to send/ deselect (WT)]
[Retouch]
[Side-by-side comparison] 2
[Choose slot and folder]
[Select R, G, B] 3
Description Save a copy of the current image cropped to the area visible in the display. This option is not available when histograms are displayed (0 369). Rate the current picture (0 380).
Select the current picture for upload (0 381). The option displayed varies with the type of device connected.
Use the options in the retouch menu (0 709) to create a retouched copy of the current photograph. Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a slot and press 2 to list the folders on the selected card, then highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures in the highlighted folder. Press 4 or 2 to choose the color channel for the highlight display.
1 Displayed only during playback zoom. 2 Available only when a retouched copy (indicated by a N icon) or the
source picture for a retouched copy is selected. 3 Available only when highlights or RGB histograms are displayed.
362 Playback
A [Side-by-Side Comparison] Choose [Side-by-side comparison] to compare retouched copies with the unretouched originals.
1 Options used to create copy 2 Source image 3 Retouched copy
· The source image is displayed on the left, the retouched copy on the right.
· The options used to create the copy are listed at the top of the display. · Press 4 or 2 to switch between the source image and the retouched
copy. · If the copy was created from multiple source images using [Image
overlay], press 1 or 3 to view the other images. · If the source has been copied multiple times, press 1 or 3 to view the
other copies. · To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X (T)
button. · Press J to return to playback with the highlighted image displayed full-
frame. · To exit to playback, press the K button. · The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that is now protected. · The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that has since been deleted.
Playback 363
Movies
Option [Rating] [Select to send/ deselect (PC)] [Select to send/ deselect (WT)] [Volume control]
[Trim movie]
[Choose slot and folder]
[Select R, G, B] *
Description Rate the current movie (0 380).
Select the current movie for upload (0 381). The option displayed varies with the type of device connected.
Adjust playback volume. Trim footage from the current movie and save the edited copy in a new file (0 272). Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a slot and press 2 to list the folders on the selected card, then highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures in the highlighted folder. Press 4 or 2 to choose a color channel for the highlight display.
* Available in the highlight and RGB histogram displays only.
364 Playback
Movies (Playback Paused)
Option
Description
9 [Choose start/end point]
Trim footage from the current movie and save the edited copy in a new file (0 272).
4
[Save current frame]
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still (0 277).
r [Add index] o [Delete index]
Add indices to movies during playback (0 278). Indices can be used to quickly locate frames during playback and editing.
Delete indices (0 278).
Playback 365
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below.
1 File information 2 Exposure data 1 3 Highlights 1 4 RGB histogram 1
5 Shooting data 1 6 Location data 2 7 Overview data 1 8 None (image only) 1
1 Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for [Playback display options] in the playback menu.
2 Displayed only if embedded in the picture.
366 Playback
File Information
123 4
5
15
6
14
13
12
7
11 10 9 8 1 Protect status (0 378) 2 Retouch indicator (0 709) 3 Upload marking (0 381) 4 Focus point * (0 36)
5 Frame number/total number of frames
6 AF-area brackets * 7 Image quality (0 134) 8 Image size (0 137) 9 Image area (0 129) 10 Time of recording (0 658) 11 Date of recording (0 658) 12 Current card slot (0 279) 13 Rating (0 380) 14 Folder name (0 545) 15 File name (0 550)
* Displayed only if [Focus point] is selected for [Playback display options].
Playback 367
Exposure Data
1
1 Folder numberframe number
(0 545)
2 Shooting mode (0 107)
3 Shutter speed (0 110, 113)
4 Aperture (0 111, 113)
23 4 5 6
5 Exposure compensation (0 175)
6 ISO sensitivity * (0 187)
* Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
Highlights
To choose a color channel for the highlight display, select [Select R, G, B] in the i menu and press 4 or 2.
1
2
1 Highlights (areas that may be
overexposed)
2 Folder number-frame number
(0 545)
368 Playback
RGB Histogram
To choose a color channel for the highlight display, select [Select R, G, B] in the i menu and press 4 or 2.
1 Folder number-frame number
3
(0 545)
4 2 White balance (0 195)
1
5
Color temperature (0 204)
2
6
Preset manual (0 209)
White balance fine-tuning
(0 200)
3 Histogram (RGB channel)
4 Histogram (red channel)
5 Histogram (green channel)
6 Histogram (blue channel)
D Playback Zoom To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed, press X (T). Use the X (T) and W (Y) buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector. The histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the display.
Playback 369
D Histograms Histograms show tone distribution, with pixel brightness (tone) plotted on the horizontal axis and the number of pixels on the vertical axis. Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are shown below: · If the image contains objects
with a wide range of brightnesses, the distribution of tones will be relatively even. · If the image is dark, tone distribution will be shifted to the left.
· If the image is bright, tone distribution will be shifted to the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see pictures in the display.
370 Playback
Shooting Data
View the settings in effect at the time the picture was taken.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 8 9 10 11
12 13
1 Metering (0 166) Shutter speed (0 110, 113) Aperture (0 111, 113)
2 Shooting mode (0 107) ISO sensitivity 1 (0 187)
3 Exposure compensation (0 175) Optimal exposure tuning 2 (0 604)
4 Focal length 3
5 Lens data
6 Autofocus mode (0 140) AF-area mode (0 145)
7 Lens vibration reduction (VR) on/off
8 White balance 4 (0 195)
9 White balance fine-tuning (0 200)
10 Color space (0 554)
11 Camera name
12 Image area (0 129)
13 Folder numberframe number
Playback 371
1
1 Flash type 5
2
2 Remote flash control 5
3
3 Flash mode 5 (0 465)
4
4 Flash control mode 5 (0 463)
Flash compensation 5 (0 469)
1 Picture Control 6 (0 243) 1
1
1 High ISO noise reduction
2
(0 557)
3
Long exposure noise
4
reduction (0 556)
5
2 Active D-Lighting (0 254)
3 HDR strength (0 256)
6
4 Vignette control (0 558)
5 Retouch history (0 709)
6 Image comment (0 681)
372 Playback
1 Name of photographer 7
1
(0 682)
2 Copyright holder 7 (0 682) 2
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b5 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Also includes the magnification for pictures taken with a teleconverter.
4 Also includes color temperature of photos taken using 4 ([Auto]). 5 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 459,
477). 6 The items displayed vary with the Picture Control selected when the
picture was taken. 7 Copyright information is only displayed if recorded with the
photograph using the [Copyright information] item in the setup menu.
Location Data
The latitude, longitude, and other location data are supplied by and vary with the smart device (0 687). In the case of movies, the data give the location at the start of recording.
Playback 373
Overview Data
1 234 5
6
7 18 19 20 21 22 23
17
8 30
29
16
9
15 14 13 12 11 10
1 Frame number/total number of frames
2 Upload marking (0 381)
3 Protect status (0 378)
4 Retouch indicator (0 709)
5 Camera name
6 Image comment indicator (0 681)
7 Location data indicator (0 687)
8 Histogram (0 370)
9 Image quality (0 134)
10 Image size (0 137)
11 Image area (0 129)
12 File name (0 550)
28 27 26 25 24
13 Time of recording (0 658) 14 Folder name (0 545) 15 Date of recording (0 658) 16 Current card slot (0 279) 17 Rating (0 380) 18 Metering (0 166) 19 Shooting mode (0 107) 20 Shutter speed (0 110, 113) 21 Aperture (0 111, 113) 22 ISO sensitivity 1 (0 187) 23 Focal length 24 Active D-Lighting (0 254)
374 Playback
25 Picture Control (0 243) 26 Color space (0 554) 27 Flash mode 2 (0 465) 28 White balance (0 195)
Color temperature (0 204) Preset manual (0 209) White balance fine-tuning (0 200) 29 Flash compensation 2 (0 469) Commander mode 2 30 Exposure compensation (0 175) 1 Displayed in red if photo was taken in mode P, S, A, or M with auto ISO sensitivity control on. 2 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit.
Playback 375
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
To zoom in on an image displayed in fullframe playback, press the X (T) or J button or give the display two quick taps.
Playback Zoom
To
Description
Press X (T) or use
stretch gestures to zoom in
to maximum of
approximately 24× (large
images in FX/36 × 24
format), 18× (medium
Zoom in or out/view other areas of image
images) or 12× (small images). Press W (Y) or use pinch gestures to zoom out. While photo is zoomed in, use multi selector or slide finger over screen to view areas of image not
visible in monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to scroll
rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation window is
displayed when zoom ratio is altered; area currently
visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border. Bar
under navigation window shows zoom ratio, turning
green at 1 : 1.
376 Playback
To Crop image
Select faces
Description
To create crop image to area currently visible in monitor, press i, highlight [Quick crop] and press J. Note that [Quick crop] is not available when RGB histogram is displayed (0 369).
Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in navigation window. Rotate sub-command dial or tap on-screen guide to view other faces.
View other images
Rotate main command dial or tap e or f icons at bottom of display to view same location in other photos at current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a movie is displayed.
Change Press Q/g (U) to protect or remove protection from protect status images (0 378).
Return to Press the shutter-release button halfway or press the shooting mode K button to exit to shooting mode.
Display menus Press G to view the menus.
Playback 377
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the Q/g (U) button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files cannot be deleted using the O (Q) button or the [Delete] item in the playback menu. Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (0 656).
To protect a photograph:
1 Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2 Press the Q/g (U) button.
The photograph will be marked with a P icon. To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted, display the photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press the Q/g (U) button.
378 Playback
A Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu, press the Q/g (U) and O (Q) buttons together for about two seconds during playback.
Playback 379
Rating Pictures
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion. Ratings can also be viewed in ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D. Rating is not available with protected images.
1 Select a picture.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail playback.
2 Display playback options.
Press the i button to display playback options.
3 Select [Rating].
Highlight [Rating] and press 2.
4 Choose a rating.
Press 4 or 2 to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select d to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion. Press J to complete the operation.
380 Playback
Selecting Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to select the current picture for upload to a smart device, computer, or ftp server. · The i menu items used to select pictures for upload vary with
the type of device connected: - [Select to send/deselect (smart device)]: Displayed when the camera is connected to a smart device via built-in Bluetooth using the [Connect to smart device] item in the setup menu (0 692). - [Select to send/deselect (PC)]: Displayed when the camera is connected to a computer via built-in Wi-Fi using the [Connect to PC] item in the setup menu (0 696). - [Select to send/deselect (WT)]: Displayed when the camera is connected to a computer or ftp server via an WT-7 wireless transmitter (available separately) using the [Wireless transmitter (WT-7)] item in the setup menu (0 700). · Movies cannot be selected for upload when the camera is connected to a smart device via the SnapBridge app. · The maximum file size for movies uploaded by other means is 4 GB.
Playback 381
1 Select a picture.
Display a picture in full-frame playback or playback zoom or select it in the thumbnail list.
2 Choose [Select to send/
deselect].
Press the i button to display the i menu, then highlight [Select to send/deselect] and press J. Pictures selected for upload are indicated by a W icon; to deselect, repeat Steps 1 and 2.
382 Playback
Deleting Pictures
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current picture or use the [Delete] item in the playback menu to delete multiple selected pictures, all pictures taken on a selected date, or all pictures in the current playback folder (protected pictures cannot be deleted). Exercise caution when deleting pictures, as pictures cannot be recovered once deleted.
During Playback
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph.
1 Press the O (Q) button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
2 Press the O (Q) button again.
To delete the picture, press the O (Q) button again. To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
Playback 383
A Calendar Playback During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the O (Q) button. A Deleting Copies If the picture selected in the playback display when the O (Q) button is pressed was recorded with two memory cards inserted and [Backup] or [RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2] selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2], you will be prompted to choose whether to delete both copies or only the copy on the card in the current slot (0 281).
384 Playback
The Playback Menu
The [Delete] item in the playback menu contains the following options. Note that depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.
Option
Description
Q [Selected] Delete selected pictures. i [Select date] Delete all pictures taken on a selected date (0 387).
R [All]
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for playback. If two cards are inserted, you can select the card from which pictures will be deleted.
Playback 385
Selected
1 Select pictures.
· Use the multi selector to highlight a picture and press the W (Y) button to select or deselect. Selected pictures are marked by a O icon (to view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X/T button).
· Repeat as desired to select additional pictures.
2 Press J to complete the
operation.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press J.
386 Playback
Select Date
1 Select dates.
Highlight a date and press 2 to select all pictures taken on the highlighted date. Selected dates are marked with a M icon. Repeat as desired to select additional dates; to deselect a date, highlight it and press 2.
2 Delete the pictures taken on
the selected dates.
Press J. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press J.
Playback 387
All
1 Choose a slot.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the slot containing the memory card from which the pictures will be deleted and press J.
2 Delete the pictures.
· Highlight [Yes] and press J to delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
· Note that depending on the number of images, some time may be required for deletion.
388 Playback
Connecting to Computers and TVs
Connecting to Computers
To upload pictures to a computer, connect the camera via a wireless network or using the supplied USB cable.
Connecting via USB
If the supplied USB cable is used to connect the camera to a computer running ViewNX-i, you can copy pictures to the computer, where they can be viewed, edited, and organized.
Connecting to Computers and TVs 389
Installing ViewNX-i
Download the ViewNX-i installer from the following website and follow the on-screen instructions to complete installation (existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier versions may not support the camera). https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ · An Internet connection is required. · For system requirements and other information, see the Nikon
website for your region. D Capture NX-D
Use Nikon's Capture NX-D software to fine-tune photos or to change settings for NEF (RAW) pictures and save them in other formats. Capture NX-D is available for download from: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
390 Connecting to Computers and TVs
Copying Pictures to the Computer
For detailed instructions, see the online help for ViewNX-i.
1 Connect the USB cable.
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown.
2 Turn the camera on.
The Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX-i will start (if a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program, select Nikon Transfer 2). If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, launch ViewNX-i and click the "Import" icon.
Connecting to Computers and TVs 391
3 Click [Start
Transfer].
Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer.
4 Turn the camera off.
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete. D Windows 10 and Windows 8.1
Windows 10 and Windows 8.1 may display an AutoPlay prompt when the camera is connected. · Click the dialog and then click [Nikon
Transfer 2] to select Nikon Transfer 2.
392 Connecting to Computers and TVs
D macOS If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically, confirm that the camera is connected and then launch Image Capture (an application that comes with macOS) and select Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the camera is detected. D Transferring Movies Do not attempt to transfer movies from the memory card while it is inserted in another camera. Doing so could result in the movies being deleted without being transferred. D Connecting to Computers · Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is
in progress. · Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle. Be sure
also to keep the connectors straight when disconnecting the cable. · Turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting interface
cables. · To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera
battery is fully charged. D USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
Connecting to Computers and TVs 393
Wireless Networks (Wi-Fi)
The following methods can be used to connect to a computer via Wi-Fi. For more information, see "Network Connections" (0 402).
Built-in Wi-Fi
Use the [Connect to PC] item in the camera setup menu to connect to computers either directly or via a wireless router.
Connection via a wireless router
Direct wireless connection
394 Connecting to Computers and TVs
The WT-7 Wireless Transmitter
Connecting a WT-7 wireless transmitter enables the [Wireless transmitter (WT-7)] item in the setup menu. With Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately), the camera can be controlled and pictures saved to the computer as they are taken.
· The WT-7 can be used to upload pictures to computers or ftp servers.
· You can also connect via Ethernet. · Use the WT-7 for connections that are more reliable than those
offered by the camera's built-in Wi-Fi.
Connecting to Computers and TVs 395
Connecting to HDMI Devices
The optional High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable or a type C HDMI cable (available separately from third-party suppliers) can be used to connect the camera to high-definition video devices. Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable.
1 HDMI connector for connection to camera
2 HDMI connector * for connection to external device
* Choose a cable with a connector that matches the connector on the HDMI device.
396 Connecting to Computers and TVs
Connecting to HDMI TVs
· After connecting the camera to an HDMI television or other display, tune the device to the HDMI channel, then turn the camera on and press the K button. During playback, images will be displayed on the television screen.
· Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls cannot be used.
· If the camera is paired with a smart device running the SnapBridge app, the device can be used to control playback remotely while the camera is connected to a TV. See the SnapBridge app online help for details.
Connecting to HDMI Recorders
The camera can record video directly to connected HDMI recorders. Some recorders will even start and stop recording in response to camera controls. Use the [HDMI] item in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI output.
Connecting to Computers and TVs 397
Output Resolution
Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device. If [Auto] is selected, the camera will automatically select the appropriate format.
Advanced
Adjust settings for connection to the HDMI device.
Option
Description
[Auto] is recommended in most situations. If the camera is unable to determine the correct RGB video signal output range for the HDMI device, you can choose [Limited range] for devices with an RGB video [Output range] signal input range of 16 to 235 or [Full range] for devices with an RGB video signal input range of 0 to 255. Choose [Limited range] if you notice a loss of detail in shadows, [Full range] if shadows are "washed out" or too bright.
398 Connecting to Computers and TVs
Option
[External recording control]
[Output data depth]
Description
Enabling external recording control allows camera controls to be used to start and stop recording when the camera is connected via HDMI to a third-party recorder that supports the Atomos Open Protocol (Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, or SUMO-series Monitor recorders). An icon will be displayed in the camera monitor: A is displayed in movie live view, while B is displayed during movie recording. During recording, check the recorder and recorder display to ensure that footage is being saved to the device (note that the footage output to the device may be disrupted while external recording control is in effect). The camera display will turn off automatically when the standby timer expires, ending HDMI output; when recording movies to an external device, select Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer] and choose [No limit] or a time longer than the anticipated recording time. See the manual provided with the recorder for more information on device features and operation.
Choose from [8 bit] and [10 bit].
Connecting to Computers and TVs 399
Option
[N-Log/HDR output options]
[View assist]
Description
Preserve details in highlights and shadows and avoid over-saturated colors when recording movies. [N-Log] is intended for footage that will be color graded during post-production. [HDR (HLG)] is used to record footage in HLG format for such applications as HDR broadcasting. · The footage will be recorded directly to the external
device. It cannot be saved to the camera memory card. · This option is available only when [10 bit] is selected for [Output data depth] in modes other than EFCT. · The [ISO sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity] and [ISO sensitivity (Mode M)] items in the movie shooting menu can be set respectively to values of from ISO 1600 to 25600 and from ISO 800 to 51200.
Choose [On] for a live preview of video footage recorded with [N-Log] or [HDR (HLG)] selected for [N-Log/HDR output options]. The colors in the preview are simplified for enhanced contrast, but this has no effect on the footage actually recorded.
400 Connecting to Computers and TVs
D HDMI Output HDMI output is not available when movies are recorded at frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 120p, 1920 × 1080 100p, or 1920 × 1080 slow-motion or when the camera is connected to a device running Camera Control Pro 2. D [10 Bit] Selected for [Output Data Depth] [10 bit] can be used only with compatible recorders. No photos can be taken; during movie recording, the following additional restrictions apply when 3840 × 2160 is selected for frame size: · Movies are not recorded to memory cards inserted in the camera. · Icons and characters in the monitor will display at low resolution. · The angle of view is about 90%. D HDR (HLG) Output Optimal color reproduction can only be achieved if your equipment, including your storage device, computer, monitor, operating system, and software, support HDR (HLG). If a signal is received from the connected device indicating that it supports HDR (HLG), the camera will respond with a "gamma: HLG" identifier.
Connecting to Computers and TVs 401
Network Connections
Camera and Network System Chart
This section is chiefly devoted to describing how to connect to a wireless local area network (LAN) using the camera's built-in Wi-Fi and how to use network features once connected. The types of network connection available with the camera and optional accessories are shown below. · For information on connecting to networks using a WT-7
wireless transmitter, see the manual supplied with the WT-7.
402 Network Connections
Connecting to Smart Devices
To connect to the camera from a smartphone or tablet (below, "smart device"), download the SnapBridge app.
The SnapBridge App
Use the SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera and smart devices. The SnapBridge app is available free of charge from the Apple App Store® and on Google PlayTM. Visit the Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news.
Network Connections 403
What SnapBridge Can Do for You
Using the SnapBridge app, you can: · Download pictures from the camera
Download existing pictures or download new pictures as they are taken. · Control the camera remotely (remote photography) Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device. For details, see the SnapBridge app online help: https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html
404 Network Connections
Wireless Connections
Using the SnapBridge app, you can connect via Wi-Fi (0 406) or Bluetooth (0 415). Connecting using the SnapBridge app allows you to set the camera clock and update location data using information provided by the smart device. Connecting using Bluetooth allows pictures to be uploaded automatically as they are taken.
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Network Connections 405
Connecting via Wi-Fi (Wi-Fi Mode)
Follow the steps below to connect to the camera via Wi-Fi. D Before Connecting
Before connecting, enable Wi-Fi on the smart device (for details, see the documentation provided with the device), check that there is space available on the camera memory card, and ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
1 Smart device: Launch the
SnapBridge app.
If this is the first time you have launched the app, tap [Skip]. If you have launched the app before, you can instead proceed to Step 2.
406 Network Connections
2 Open the tab and tap > [Wi-Fi mode]. 3 Smart device: Tap [Wi-Fi
connection] when prompted.
Network Connections 407
4 Camera/smart device: Turn the
camera on.
The smart device will instruct you to ready the camera. Turn the camera on. Do not tap [Next] until you have completed the next step.
408 Network Connections
5 Camera: Enable Wi-Fi.
Select [Connect to smart device] > [Wi-Fi connection] in the setup menu, then highlight [Establish Wi-Fi connection] and press J. The camera SSID and password will be displayed.
D Enabling Wi-Fi You can also enable Wi-Fi by selecting [Wi-Fi connection] > [Establish Wi-Fi conn. with smart device] in the i menu for shooting mode.
Network Connections 409
6 Smart device: Tap [Next].
Tap [Next] once you have enabled Wi-Fi on the camera as described in the preceeding step.
410 Network Connections
7 Smart device: After reading
the instructions, tap [Open the device settings app].
· Android devices: Wi-Fi settings will be displayed.
· iOS devices: The "Settings" app will launch. Tap [< Settings] to open the "Settings" app. Next, scroll up and tap [Wi-Fi], which you'll find near the top of the settings list.
Network Connections 411
8 Smart device: Enter the camera SSID and
password.
· Enter the SSID and password displayed by the camera in Step 5. - Android device (actual displays may differ)
412 Network Connections
- iOS device (actual displays may differ) · You will not be required to enter the password when next
you connect to the camera.
Network Connections 413
9 Smart device: Return to the
SnapBridge app.
After a Wi-Fi connection is established, Wi-Fi mode options will be displayed. See online help for information on using the SnapBridge app.
D Terminating Wi-Fi Mode To end the Wi-Fi connection, tap When the icon changes to , tap select [Exit Wi-Fi mode.].
. and
414 Network Connections
Connecting via Bluetooth
Before connecting via Bluetooth for the first time, you will need to pair the camera and smart device as described below. The pairing instructions for Android and iOS differ slightly. D Before Pairing
Before beginning pairing, enable Bluetooth on the smart device (for details, see the documentation provided with the device), check that there is space available on the camera memory card, and ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly.
Network Connections 415
Android: Connecting for the First Time (Pairing)
For information on pairing the camera with iOS devices, see "iOS: Connecting for the First Time (Pairing)" (0 422).
1 Camera: Ready the camera.
Select [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] in the setup menu, then highlight [Start pairing] and press J... ...to display the camera name.
2 Android device: Launch the
SnapBridge app.
· If this is the first time you have launched the app, tap [Connect to camera] and proceed to Step 3.
416 Network Connections
· If you have launched the app before, open the tab and tap [Connect to camera].
3 Android device: Choose the
camera.
Tap the camera name.
Network Connections 417
4 Camera/Android device: Check the authentication
code.
Confirm that the camera and Android device display the same authentication code (circled in the illustration).
418 Network Connections
5 Camera/Android device: Initiate pairing.
· Camera: Press J.
· Android device: Tap the button indicated in the illustration (the label may differ depending on the version of Android you are using).
D Pairing Error If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping the button on the Android device, pairing will fail and an error will be displayed. Camera: Press J and return to Step 1. Android device: Tap [OK] and return to Step 2.
Network Connections 419
6 Camera/Android device: Follow the on-screen
instructions.
· Camera: Press J. The camera will display a message stating that the devices are connected.
· Android device: Pairing is complete. Tap [OK] to exit to the tab.
D Pairing for the First Time The first time you pair the Android device with a camera after installing the SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto link (auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization) options. This prompt will not appear again, but auto link settings can be accessed at any time using [Auto link] in the tab.
420 Network Connections
Pairing is now complete. The next time you use the SnapBridge app, you can connect as described in "Connecting to a Paired Device" (0 429). D Disabling Bluetooth
To disable Bluetooth, select [Disable] for [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection] in the camera setup menu.
Network Connections 421
iOS: Connecting for the First Time (Pairing)
For information on pairing the camera with Android devices, see "Android: Connecting for the First Time (Pairing)" (0 416).
1 Camera: Ready the camera.
Select [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] in the setup menu, then highlight [Start pairing] and press J... ...to display the camera name.
2 iOS device: Launch the
SnapBridge app.
· If this is the first time you have launched the app, tap [Connect to camera] and proceed to Step 3.
422 Network Connections
· If you have launched the app before, open the tab and tap [Connect to camera].
3 iOS device: Choose the camera.
Tap the camera name.
Network Connections 423
4 iOS device: Read the
instructions.
Read the pairing instructions carefully and tap [Understood].
5 iOS device: Select an
accessory.
When prompted to select an accessory, tap the camera name again.
424 Network Connections
6 Camera/iOS device: Initiate pairing.
· Camera: Press J. · iOS device: Tap the button
indicated in the illustration (the label may differ depending on the version of iOS you are using).
Network Connections 425
D Pairing Error If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping the button on the iOS device, pairing will fail and an error will be displayed. Camera: Press J and return to Step 1. iOS device: Dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that it is not running in the background, then open the iOS "Settings" app and request iOS to "forget" the camera as shown in the illustration before returning to Step 2.
426 Network Connections
7 Camera/iOS device: Follow the on-screen
instructions.
· Camera: Press J. The camera will display a message stating that the devices are connected.
· iOS device: Pairing is complete. Tap [OK] to exit to the tab.
Network Connections 427
D Pairing for the First Time The first time you pair the iOS device with a camera after installing the SnapBridge app, you will be prompted to select auto link (auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization) options. This prompt will not appear again, but auto link settings can be accessed at any time using [Auto link] in the tab. Pairing is now complete. The next time you use the SnapBridge app, you can connect as described in "Connecting to a Paired Device" (0 429). D Disabling Bluetooth To disable Bluetooth, select [Disable] for [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection] in the camera setup menu.
428 Network Connections
Connecting to a Paired Device
Connecting to a smart device that has already been paired with the camera is quick and easy.
1 Camera: Enable Bluetooth.
In the setup menu, select [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection], then highlight [Enable] and press J.
2 Smart device: Launch the
SnapBridge app.
A Bluetooth connection will be established automatically.
Network Connections 429
Connecting to Computers via Wi-Fi
What Wi-Fi Can Do for You
Connect via Wi-Fi to upload selected pictures to a computer.
The Wireless Transmitter Utility
After configuring the camera for connection, you will need to pair it with the computer using the Wireless Transmitter Utility before you will be able to upload images via Wi-Fi. Once the devices are paired, you will be able to connect to the computer from the camera. · The Wireless Transmitter Utility is a computer application
available for download from the Nikon Download Center: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ · Be sure to download the latest version after reading the release notes and system requirements.
430 Network Connections
Infrastructure and Access-Point Modes
The camera can connect either via a wireless router on an existing network (infrastructure mode) or by direct wireless link (access-point mode).
Access-Point Mode
The camera and computer connect via direct wireless link, with the camera acting as a wireless LAN access point and without the need for complicated adjustments to settings. Choose this option when working outdoors or in other situations in which the computer is not already connected to a wireless network. The computer cannot connect to the Internet while connected to the camera. · To create a new host profile, select
[Direct connection to PC] in the connection wizard.
Network Connections 431
Infrastructure Mode
The camera connects to a computer on an existing network (including home networks) via a wireless router. The computer can still connect to the Internet while connected to the camera. · To create a new network profile, select
[Search for Wi-Fi network] in the connection wizard.
D Infrastructure Mode This guide assumes you are connecting via an existing wireless network. Connection to computers beyond the local area network is not supported.
432 Network Connections
Connecting in Access-Point Mode
Follow the steps below to create a direct wireless link to a computer in access-point mode.
1 Display network settings.
Select [Connect to PC] in the camera setup menu, then highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
2 Select [Create profile].
Highlight [Create profile] and press J.
3 Select [Direct connection to
PC].
· Highlight [Direct connection to PC] and press J.
· The camera SSID and encryption key will be displayed.
Network Connections 433
4 Connect from the computer.
Windows: Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar and select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3. When prompted to enter the network security key, enter the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3. macOS: Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar and select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3. When prompted to supply a password, enter the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3.
434 Network Connections
5 Launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility.
When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer.
6 Select the camera.
In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, select the camera name displayed in Step 5 and click [Next].
Network Connections 435
7 Enter the authentication code.
· The camera will display an authentication code.
· Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next].
436 Network Connections
8 Complete the pairing process.
· When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is complete, press J.
· In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next]. You will be prompted to choose the destination folder; for more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
· A wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer when pairing is complete.
Network Connections 437
9 Check the connection.
· When a connection is established, the network SSID will be displayed in green in the camera [Connect to PC] menu.
· If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the camera via the wireless network list on your computer.
Now that a wireless connection has been established, you can upload images to the computer as described in"Uploading Pictures" (0 447).
438 Network Connections
Connecting in Infrastructure Mode
Follow the steps below to connect to a computer on an existing network in infrastructure mode.
1 Display network settings.
Select [Connect to PC] in the camera setup menu, then highlight [Network settings] and press 2.
2 Select [Create profile].
Highlight [Create profile] and press 2.
Network Connections 439
3 Search for existing networks.
Highlight [Search for Wi-Fi network] and press J. The camera will search for networks currently active in the vicinity and list them by name (SSID).
D [Easy Connect] To connect without entering an SSID or encryption key, press X (T) in Step 3, then press J and choose from the following options: · [Push-button WPS]: For routers that
support push-button WPS. Press the WPS button on the router and then press the camera J button to connect. · [PIN-entry WPS]: The camera will display a PIN; to connect, use a computer to enter the PIN into the router (for more information, see the documentation provided with the router). After connecting, proceed to Step 6.
440 Network Connections
4 Choose a network.
Highlight a network SSID and press J (if the desired network is not displayed, press X/T to search again). Encrypted networks are indicated by a O icon; if the selected network is encrypted, you will be prompted to enter the encryption key as described in Step 5. If the network is not encrypted, proceed to Step 6. D Hidden SSIDs
Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in the network list. If you highlight a blank entry and press J, you will be prompted to provide the network name; press J, enter a name, and then press X (T). Press X (T) again to proceed to Step 5.
Network Connections 441
5 Enter the encryption key.
· When prompted to enter the encryption key for the wireless router, press J.
· Next, enter the key as described below. For information on the encryption key, see the documentation for the wireless router. Press X (T) when entry is complete.
· Press X (T) again to initiate the connection. A message will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established.
442 Network Connections
6 Obtain or select an IP address.
· Highlight one of the following options and press J. - [Obtain automatically]: Select this option if the network is configured to supply the IP address automatically. - [Enter manually]: Press J; a dialog will be displayed where you can manually enter an IP address. Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments, press 4 or 2 to change, and press J to accept. Press X (T) to exit to the "IP address configuration complete" dialog when entry is complete. Pressing X (T) again displays the sub-net mask, which you can edit by pressing 1 and 3, pressing J to exit when entry is complete.
· Confirm the IP address and press J to proceed.
7 Launch the Wireless
Transmitter Utility.
When prompted, launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer.
Network Connections 443
8 Select the camera.
In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, select the camera name displayed in Step 7 and click [Next].
9 Enter the authentication code.
· The camera will display an authentication code.
· Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click [Next].
444 Network Connections
10 Complete the pairing process.
· When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is complete, press J.
· In the Wireless Transmitter Utility, click [Next]. You will be prompted to choose the destination folder; for more information, see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility.
· A wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer when pairing is complete.
Network Connections 445
11 Check the connection.
· When a connection is established, the network SSID will be displayed in green in the camera [Connect to PC] menu.
· If the camera SSID is not displayed in green, connect to the camera via the wireless network list on your computer.
Now that a wireless connection has been established, you can upload images to the computer as described in "Uploading Pictures" (0 447).
446 Network Connections
Uploading Pictures
You can select pictures for upload in the camera playback display or upload pictures as they are taken. D Destination Folders
By default, images are uploaded to the following folders: · Windows: \Users\(user name)\Pictures\Wireless Transmitter Utility · macOS: /Users/(user name)/Pictures/Wireless Transmitter Utility The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter Utility. For more information, see the utility's online help. D Access Point Mode Computers cannot access the Internet while connected to the camera in access point mode. To access the Internet, terminate the connection to the camera and then reconnect to a network with Internet access.
Selecting Pictures for Upload
Follow the steps below to select pictures for upload.
1 Start playback.
Press the K button on the camera and select full-frame or thumbnail playback.
2 Display or highlight the desired picture and press
the i button.
Network Connections 447
3 Choose [Select to send/
deselect (PC)].
Highlight [Select to send/deselect (PC)] and press J. A white transfer icon will appear on the picture. If the camera is currently connected to a network, upload will begin immediately; otherwise, upload will begin when a connection is established. The transfer icon turns green during upload. Repeat Steps 23 to upload additional images. D Deselecting Pictures
· To remove transfer marking from selected pictures, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
· To remove transfer marking from all pictures, select [Connect to PC] > [Options] > [Deselect all?] in the setup menu.
448 Network Connections
Uploading Photos as They Are Taken
To upload new photos as they are taken, select [On] for [Connect to PC] > [Options] > [Auto send]. Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card; be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera. Movies, as well as any photographs taken during filming, are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete but must instead be uploaded from the playback display.
The Transfer Icon
Upload status is indicated by the transfer icon. · Y (white):Send. The picture has
been selected for upload but upload has not yet begun. · X (green):Sending.Upload in progress. · Y (blue): Sent. Upload complete.
Network Connections 449
The Upload Status Display
The [Connect to PC] display shows the following information: 1 Status 2 Pictures/time remaining 3 Signal strength
· Status: The status of the connection to the host. The host name is displayed in green when a connection is established. While files are being transferred, the status display shows "Now sending" preceded by the name of the file being sent. Any errors that occur during transfer are also displayed here.
· Pictures/time remaining: The estimated time required to send the remaining pictures.
· Signal strength: Wireless signal strength. D Loss of Signal
Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost, but can be resumed by turning the camera off and then on again.
450 Network Connections
Disconnecting and Reconnecting
The camera's link to an existing network can be suspended or resumed as described below.
Disconnecting
You can disconnect by turning the camera off, selecting [Disable] for [Connect to PC] > [Wi-Fi connection] in the setup menu, or selecting [Wi-Fi connection] > [Close Wi-Fi connection] in the still-photography i menu. The connection to the computer will also end if you use Wi-Fi or Bluetooth to connect to a smart device. D Access-Point Mode
An error will occur if the computer's wireless connection is disabled before the camera's. Disable camera Wi-Fi first.
Network Connections 451
Reconnecting
To reconnect to an existing network, either: · select [Enable] for [Connect to PC] > [Wi-Fi connection] in
the setup menu, or · choose [Wi-Fi connection] >
[Establish Wi-Fi connection with PC] in the still-photography i menu.
D Access-Point Mode Enable camera Wi-Fi before connecting. D Multiple Network Profiles If the camera has profiles for more than one network, it will reconnect to the last network used. Other networks can be selected using the [Connect to PC] > [Network settings] item in the setup menu.
452 Network Connections
Connecting to Networks Using the WT-7
The WT-7
When attached to the camera, the optional WT-7 wireless transmitter can be used to connect to computers, ftp servers, or other devices over Ethernet or wireless networks. D Before Using the WT-7
Before using the WT-7, confirm that the firmware for the camera and WT-7 have been updated to the latest versions. For more information, visit the Nikon website for your region.
Network Connections 453
What the WT-7 Can Do for You
Using the WT-7, you can:
Upload existing photos and movies to an ftp server or computer
Not only can you copy pictures to computers (image transfer mode), you can also upload them to ftp servers (ftp upload mode). Pictures can be uploaded as they are taken.
Control the camera and take pictures remotely from a computer
Installing Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately) on a network computer gives you complete control over camera settings and lets you take pictures remotely and save them directly to the computer hard disk (camera control mode).
454 Network Connections
Control the camera and take pictures remotely from a web browser
Using a web browser, you can control the camera from network computers and smart devices for remote control that requires no dedicated app or computer software (http server mode).
Network Connections 455
Connecting Using the WT-7
Connect the WT-7 using the USB cable supplied with the camera.
Turn the transmitter on and select [Wireless transmitter (WT-7)] > [Wireless transmitter] > [Use] in the camera setup menu.
A Menu Items for the WT-7 All menu items for the WT-7 can be found in the setup menu under [Wireless transmitter (WT-7)]. For more information, see the manual provided with the WT-7. See the manual provided with the WT-7 for more information.
456 Network Connections
Troubleshooting Wireless Issues
Solutions to some common issues are listed below. · Troubleshooting information for the SnapBridge app can be
found in the app's online help, which can be viewed at: https://nikonimglib.com/snbr/onlinehelp/en/index.html · For information on the WT-7 wireless transmitter, see the manual provided with the WT-7. · For information on the Wireless Transmitter Utility or Camera Control Pro 2, see the online help for the application in question.
Network Connections 457
Problem
Solution
The camera displays a TCP/IP error.
Check settings for the host computer or wireless router and adjust camera settings appropriately (0 696).
The camera displays a "no memory card" error.
Confirm that the memory card is correctly inserted (0 27).
Upload is interrupted and fails Upload will resume if the camera is
to resume.
turned off and then on again (0 447).
If [Auto] is selected for [Channel],
choose [Manual] and select the channel manually (0 695).
The connection is unreliable.
If the camera is connected to a computer in infrastructure mode, check that the router is set to a channel between 1 and 8 (0 696).
[Connect to smart device] and [Connect to PC] are grayed out and cannot be selected.
These options are not available when the WT-7 is connected. Turn the WT-7 off (0 700).
458 Network Connections
On-Camera Flash Photography
"On-Camera" Versus "Remote"
You can take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe or one or more remote flash units.
Camera-Mounted Flash Units
Take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera (0 460).
Remote Flash Photography
Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless flash control (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL) as described in "Remote Flash Photography" (0 477).
On-Camera Flash Photography 459
Using an On-Camera Flash
Follow the steps below to mount an optional flash unit on the camera and take photographs using the flash.
1 Mount the unit on the accessory
shoe.
See the manual provided with the unit for details.
2 Turn on the camera and flash unit.
The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator (c) will be displayed in the viewfinder when charging is complete.
3 Adjust flash settings.
Choose the flash control mode (0 463) and flash mode (0 465).
460 On-Camera Flash Photography
4 Adjust shutter speed and aperture. 5 Take pictures.
D Shutter Speed Shutter speed can be set as follows when an optional flash unit is used:
Mode
Shutter speed
b, P, A, EFCT (j and m excluded)
Set automatically by camera (1/200 s1/60 s) *
S
Value selected by user (1/200 s30 s)
M
Value selected by user (1/200 s30 s, Bulb, Time)
* Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or slow sync with red-eye reduction is selected for flash mode.
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash.
On-Camera Flash Photography 461
D i-TTL Flash Control When an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System is attached and set to TTL, the camera uses monitor preflashes for balanced or standard i-TTL fill-flash flash control. i-TTL flash control is not available with flash units that do not support the Nikon Creative Lighting System. The camera supports the following types of i-TTL flash control:
Flash control
Description
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
The camera uses i-TTL balanced fill-flash flash control for a natural balance between the main subject and ambient background lighting. After the shutter-release button is pressed and immediately before the main flash, the flash unit emits a series of monitor preflashes which the camera uses to optimize flash output for a balance between the main subject and ambient background lighting.
Standard i-TTL fill-flash
Flash output is adjusted to bring lighting in the frame to standard level; the brightness of the background is not taken into account. Recommended for shots in which the main subject is emphasized at the expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is used.
· Standard i-TTL fill-flash is activated automatically when [Spot metering] is selected.
462 On-Camera Flash Photography
Flash Control Mode
When a flash unit that supports unified flash control (an SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the camera, the flash control mode, flash level, and other flash settings can be adjusted using the [Flash control] > [Flash control mode] item in the photo shooting menu (in the case of the SB-5000, these settings can also be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit). The options available vary with the flash used, while the options displayed under [Flash control mode] vary with the mode selected. Settings for other flash units can only be adjusted using flash unit controls. · [TTL]: i-TTL mode. In the cases of the SB-500, SB-400, and
SB-300, flash compensation can be adjusted holding the c (Y) button and rotating the sub-command dial. · [Auto external flash]: In this mode, output is adjusted automatically according to the amount of light reflected by the subject; flash compensation is also available. Auto external flash supports "auto aperture" (qA) and "non-TTL auto" (A) modes. See the flash unit manual for details.
On-Camera Flash Photography 463
· [Distance-priority manual]: Choose the distance to the subject; flash output will be adjusted automatically. Flash compensation is also available.
· [Manual]: Choose the flash level manually. · [Repeating flash]: The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter
is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the flash level ([Output]), the maximum number of times the unit fires ([Times]), and the number of times the flash fires per second ([Frequency], measured in Hertz). The options available for [Times] vary depending on the options selected for [Output] and [Frequency]; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details. D Unified Flash Control
Unified flash control allows the camera and flash unit to share settings. If a flash unit that supports unified flash control is mounted on the camera, changes to flash settings made with either the camera or flash unit are reflected on both devices, as are changes made using optional Camera Control Pro 2 software.
464 On-Camera Flash Photography
Flash Modes
The options available depend on the mode selected with the mode dial.
Option
[Fill flash] I (front-curtain
sync)
[Red-eye J reduction]
(red-eye reduction)
Description
This mode is recommended for most situations. In modes P and A, shutter speed will automatically be set to values between 1/200 s (or 1/8000 s with Auto FP High-Speed Sync) and 1/60 s.
Use for portraits. The flash fires before the photograph is taken, reducing "red-eye" (a flash unit with red-eye reduction is required). Not recommended with moving subjects or in other situations in which quick shutter response is required. Do not move camera during shooting.
Available in
b, P, S, A, M, EFCT (j and m excluded)
b, P, S, A, M, EFCT (j and m excluded)
On-Camera Flash Photography 465
Option
Description
Available in
As for [Fill flash] except that
L [Slow sync] (slow sync)
shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use when you P, A want to capture both subject and background. Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.
As for [Red-eye reduction]
except that shutter speed slows
automatically to capture
[Slow sync + background lighting at night or
K
red-eye] (redeye reduction
under low light. Use when you want to include background
P, A
with slow sync) lighting in portraits. Use of a
tripod is recommended to
prevent blurring caused by
camera shake.
466 On-Camera Flash Photography
Option
Description
Available in
The flash fires just before the
shutter closes, creating the effect
of a stream of light behind
[Rear-curtain moving light sources. Use of a
M sync] (rear- tripod is recommended to
P, S, A, M
curtain sync) prevent blurring caused by
camera shake. Selecting P or A
after choosing this option sets
the flash mode to slow sync.
s [Flash off] The flash does not fire.
b, P, S, A, M, EFCT
D Studio Strobe Lighting Rear-curtain sync cannot be used with studio flash systems, as the correct synchronization cannot be obtained.
On-Camera Flash Photography 467
Choosing a Flash Mode
Hold the N (Y) button and rotate the main command dial. · The selected option is displayed in the monitor.
468 On-Camera Flash Photography
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to deliberately alter flash output to, for example, change the brightness of the subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter, reduced to prevent glare, or otherwise fine-tuned to produce the desired result.
On-Camera Flash Photography 469
Adjusting Flash Compensation
Hold the N (Y) button and rotate the sub-command dial. The selected option will be displayed in the monitor, control panel, and viewfinder.
· Flash output can set to values of from -3 to +1 EV. · At default settings, changes to flash output are made in
increments of 1/3 EV. The size of the increment can be selected using Custom Setting b1 [EV steps for exposure cntrl]. · In general, choose positive values for brighter lighting, negative values to ensure that the subject is not too brightly lit. · Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
470 On-Camera Flash Photography
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output for CLS-compatible flash units, allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture. FV lock is not available in b and EFCT modes. To use FV lock:
1 Assign [FV lock] to a camera
control.
Assign [FV lock] to a control using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls].
2 Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit.
Mount a CLS-compatible flash unit on the camera accessory shoe.
On-Camera Flash Photography 471
3 Set the flash unit to the appropriate mode.
Turn the flash unit on and select [TTL] or [Auto external flash] for [Flash control] > [Flash control mode] (SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) or set the flash control mode to TTL, monitor pre-flash qA, or monitor pre-flash A (other flash units; see the documentation provided with the flash unit for details).
4 Focus.
Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutterrelease button halfway to focus.
472 On-Camera Flash Photography
5 Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash-ready indicator (c) appears in the viewfinder, press the control selected in Step 1. The flash unit will emit a monitor pre-flash to determine the appropriate flash level. Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock icon (r) will appear in the viewfinder.
6 Recompose the photograph.
7 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock.
8 Release FV lock.
Press the control selected in Step 1 to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock icon (r) is no longer displayed in the viewfinder.
On-Camera Flash Photography 473
Flash Info for On-Camera Units
When a unit that supports unified flash control (the SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300) is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, flash info can be viewed in the camera display. To view flash info during viewfinder photography, press the R button to activate the information display (0 776) and then press the R button again.
Flash Control Mode Displays
TTL
123
4 5
6 7 8
1 Flash-ready indicator (0 460)
2 Bounce icon (displayed if flash head is tilted up, left, or right)
3 Zoom head position warning (displayed if zoom head is not in correct position)
4 Flash control mode (0 463) FP indicator (0 618)
5 Flash compensation (TTL; 0 469)
6 Flash mode (0 465)
7 FV lock indicator (0 471)
8 Flash compensation (0 469)
474 On-Camera Flash Photography
Auto External Flash
1 2
1 Flash control mode (0 463) FP indicator (0 618)
2 Auto external flash compensation (0 469)
Distance-Priority Manual
1
1
2
2
3
3
Flash control mode (0 463) FP indicator (0 618) Flash compensation (distancepriority manual; 0 469) Distance (0 463)
Manual
1 2
1 Flash control mode (0 463) FP indicator (0 618)
2 Flash level (0 469)
On-Camera Flash Photography 475
Repeating Flash
1 2 3
1 Flash control mode (0 463) 2 Flash level (output; 0 463)
3 Number emitted (times; 0 463) Frequency (0 463)
D Flash Info and Camera Settings The flash information display shows selected camera settings, including shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity.
D Changing Flash Settings Flash settings can be changed by pressing the i button in the flash info display. The options available vary with the flash unit and the settings selected. You can also test-fire the flash.
476 On-Camera Flash Photography
Remote Flash Photography
What Is Remote Flash Photography?
The camera can be used with one or more remote flash units (Advanced Wireless Lighting, or AWL). For information on using a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see "OnCamera Flash Photography" (0 459).
Throughout this chapter, operations involving an accessory connected to the camera are indicated by C, operations involving remote flash units by f. For more information on f, see the manual provided with the flash unit.
Remote Flash Photography 477
Using Remote Flash Units
Remote flash units can be controlled via optical signals from a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe (optical AWL) or via radio signals from a WR-R10 (available separately) connected to the camera (radio AWL). These forms of flash control can be combined as follows: · Radio AWL with one or more remote
flash units (0 479)
· Optical AWL with one or more remote flash units (0 494)
· Radio AWL with additional lighting provided by a shoe-mounted flash unit (0 493)
· Radio AWL combined with optical AWL provided by a shoe-mounted flash unit (0 506)
478 Remote Flash Photography
Radio AWL
Radio AWL is available with SB-5000 flash units. Attach a WR-R10 wireless remote controller to the camera and establish a wireless connection between the flash units and the WR-R10.
Establishing a Wireless Connection
Before using radio AWL, establish a wireless connection between the WR-R10 and the remote flash units.
1 C: Connect the WR-R10.
For more information, see the documentation provided with the WR-R10.
2 C: Select [Radio AWL].
Select [Radio AWL] for [Flash control] > [Wireless flash options] in the photo shooting menu.
D The WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller Be sure to update the WR-R10 firmware to version 3.0 or later; for information on firmware updates, see the Nikon website for your area.
Remote Flash Photography 479
3 C: Choose a channel.
Set the WR-R10 channel selector to the desired channel.
480 Remote Flash Photography
4 C: Choose a link mode.
Select [Wireless remote (WR) options] > [Link mode] in the setup menu and choose from the following options:
Option [Pairing]
[PIN]
Description
The camera connects only to devices with which it has previously been paired, preventing signal interference from other devices in the vicinity. Given that each device must be paired separately, [PIN] is recommended when connecting to a large number of devices.
Communication is shared among all devices with the same four-digit PIN, making this a good choice for photography featuring a large number of remote devices. If there are multiple cameras present that share the same PIN, the flash units will be under the sole control of the camera that connects first, preventing all other cameras from connecting (the LEDs on the WR-R10 units connected to the affected cameras will blink).
Remote Flash Photography 481
5 f: Establish a wireless connection.
Set the remote flash units to radio AWL remote mode and set the devices to the channel you selected in Step 3, then pair each of the remote units with the WR-R10 according to the option selected in Step 4: · [Pairing]: Initiate pairing on the remote unit and press the
WR-R10 pairing button. Pairing is complete when the LINK lamps on the WR-R10 and flash unit flash orange and green; once a connection is established, the LINK lamp on the remote flash unit will light green. · [PIN]: Use the controls on the remote flash unit to enter the PIN you selected in Step 4. The LINK lamp on the remote unit will light green once a connection is established.
6 f: Confirm that the flash-ready lights for all flash
units are lit.
In radio AWL, the flash-ready indicator will light in the camera viewfinder or flash information display when all flash units are ready.
482 Remote Flash Photography
D Listing Remote Flash Units To view the flash units currently controlled using radio AWL, select [Flash control] > [Radio remote flash info] in the photo shooting menu. The identifier (remote flash unit name) for each unit can be changed using flash unit controls.
1 Connected flash unit 2 Group 3 Flash-ready indicator
D Reconnecting As long as the channel, link mode, and other settings remain the same, the WR-R10 will automatically connect to previously paired flash units when you select remote mode and Steps 35 can be omitted. The flash unit LINK lamp lights green when a connection is established.
Remote Flash Photography 483
Adjusting Flash Settings
After selecting [Radio AWL] for [Flash control] > [Wireless flash options] in the photo shooting menu, select [Group flash], [Quick wireless control], or [Remote repeating] for [Remote flash control] and adjust settings as described below.
Group Flash
Select this item to adjust settings separately for each group.
1 C: Select [Group flash].
Select [Group flash] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control] in the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select [Group flash
options].
Highlight [Group flash options] in the flash control display and press 2.
484 Remote Flash Photography
3 C: Choose the flash control
mode.
Choose the flash control mode and flash level for the master flash and the flash units in each group:
Option TTL qA M
(off)
Description i-TTL flash control. Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash units). Choose the flash level manually. The units do not fire and the flash level cannot be adjusted.
4 f: Group the remote flash units.
· Choose a group (AF) for each of the remote flash units. · The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any
combination.
Remote Flash Photography 485
5 C/f: Compose the shot.
· Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information.
· After arranging the units, press the i button in the flash info display (0 510) and select [c Test flash] to test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
6 C: Take the photograph.
486 Remote Flash Photography
Quick Wireless Control
Select this item to control overall flash compensation for, and the relative balance between, groups A and B, while setting output for group C manually.
1 C: Select [Quick wireless
control].
Select [Quick wireless control] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control] in the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select [Quick wireless
control options].
Highlight [Quick wireless control options] in the flash control display and press 2.
Remote Flash Photography 487
3 C: Adjust flash settings.
· Choose the balance between groups A and B.
· Adjust flash compensation for groups A and B.
· Choose a flash control mode and flash level for the units in group C: - [M]: Choose the flash level manually. - []: The units in group C do not fire.
4 f: Group the remote flash units.
· Choose a group (A, B, or C). · The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any
combination.
488 Remote Flash Photography
5 C/f: Compose the shot.
· Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information.
· After arranging the units, press the i button in the flash info display (0 510) and select [c Test flash] to test fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
6 C: Take the photograph.
Remote Flash Photography 489
Remote Repeating
When "remote repeating" is enabled, the flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multipleexposure effect.
1 C: Select [Remote repeating].
Select [Remote repeating] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control] in the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select [Remote repeating
options].
Highlight [Remote repeating options] in the flash control display and press 2.
490 Remote Flash Photography
3 C: Adjust flash settings.
· Choose the flash level ([Output]), the maximum number of times the flash units fire ([Times]), and the number of times the flash units fire per second ([Frequency]).
· Enable or disable selected groups. Select [ON] to enable the selected group, [] to disable the selected group.
4 f: Group the remote flash units.
· Choose a group (AF) for each of the remote flash units. · The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any
combination.
Remote Flash Photography 491
5 C/f: Compose the shot.
· Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information.
· After arranging the units, press the i button in the flash info display (0 510) and select [c Test flash] to test-fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally.
6 C: Take the photograph.
492 Remote Flash Photography
Adding a Shoe-Mounted Flash Unit
Radio-controlled flash units (0 479) can be combined with any of the following flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe: · SB-5000: Before attaching the flash unit, set
it to radio-controlled master flash mode (a d icon will appear at the top left corner of the display) and choose group or remote repeating flash control. Once the unit is attached, settings can be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit or the options listed in the camera menus under [Group flash options] > [Master flash] or under "M" in the [Remote repeating options] display. · SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600: Configure the flash for standalone use and use the controls on the flash unit to adjust flash settings. · SB-500, SB-400, SB-300: Mount the unit on the camera and adjust settings using the [Group flash options] > [Master flash] item in the camera menus.
Remote Flash Photography 493
Optical AWL
Remote flash units can be controlled via optical signals from an optional flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe and functioning as a master flash (optical AWL; for information on compatible flash units, see "The Nikon Creative Lighting System", 0 798). If the flash unit in question is an SB-5000 or SB-500, settings can be adjusted from the camera (0 495); otherwise settings must be adjusted using flash unit controls as described in the documentation provided with the unit. For information on flash placement and other topics, see the documentation provided with the flash units.
494 Remote Flash Photography
Using Optical AWL with the SB-5000 or SB-500
Mount the flash unit on the camera accessory shoe and select [Optical AWL] for [Flash control] > [Wireless flash options] in the photo shooting menu. Group flash settings can be adjusted using [Flash control] > [Remote flash control]; the [Remote flash control] item for the SB-5000 also offers [Quick wireless control] and [Remote repeating] settings. D The SB-5000
When an SB-5000 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, [Flash control] settings can also be changed using the controls on the flash unit.
Remote Flash Photography 495
Group Flash
Select this item to adjust settings separately for each group.
1 C: Select [Group flash].
Select [Group flash] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control] in the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select [Group flash
options].
Highlight [Group flash options] in the flash control display and press 2.
496 Remote Flash Photography
3 C: Adjust flash settings.
· Choose the flash control mode and flash level for the master flash and the flash units in each group:
Option TTL qA M
(off)
Description i-TTL flash control. Auto aperture (available only with compatible flash units). Choose the flash level manually. The units do not fire and the flash level cannot be adjusted.
· Choose a channel for the master flash. If the remote flash units include an SB-500, you must choose channel 3, but otherwise you can choose any channel between 1 and 4.
4 f: Set the remote flash units to the same channel
as the master flash.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected in Step 3.
Remote Flash Photography 497
5 f: Group the remote flash units.
· Choose a group (A, B, or C, or if you are using an SB-500 master flash, A or B) for each remote flash unit.
· Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used, the practical maximum is three per group. With more than this number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance.
6 C/f: Compose the shot.
· Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information.
· After arranging the units, press the test button on the master flash to test-fire the flash and confirm that the units are functioning normally. Flash units can also be test-fired by pressing the i button in the flash info display (0 510) and selecting [c Test flash].
7 C/f: Take the photograph.
Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit.
498 Remote Flash Photography
Quick Wireless Control (SB-5000 Only)
Select this item to control overall flash compensation for, and the relative balance between, groups A and B, while setting output for group C manually.
1 C: Select [Quick wireless
control].
Select [Quick wireless control] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control] in the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select [Quick wireless
control options].
Highlight [Quick wireless control options] in the flash control display and press 2.
Remote Flash Photography 499
3 C: Adjust flash settings.
· Choose the balance between groups A and B.
· Adjust flash compensation for groups A and B.
· Choose a flash control mode and flash level for the units in group C: - [M]: Choose the flash level manually. - []: The units in group C do not fire.
· Choose a channel for the master flash. If the remote flash units include an SB-500, you must choose channel 3, but otherwise you can choose any channel between 1 and 4.
500 Remote Flash Photography
4 f: Set the remote flash units to the same channel
as the master flash.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected in Step 3.
5 f: Group the remote flash units.
· Choose a group (A, B, or C). · Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash
units that may be used, the practical maximum is three per group. With more than this number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance.
6 C/f: Compose the shot.
· Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information.
· After arranging the units, press the test button on the master flash to test-fire the flash and confirm that the units are functioning normally. Flash units can also be test-fired by pressing the i button in the flash info display (0 510) and selecting [c Test flash].
7 C/f: Take the photograph.
Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit.
Remote Flash Photography 501
Remote Repeating (SB-5000 Only)
When "remote repeating" is enabled, the flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multipleexposure effect.
1 C: Select [Remote repeating].
Select [Remote repeating] for [Flash control] > [Remote flash control] in the photo shooting menu.
2 C: Select [Remote repeating
options].
Highlight [Remote repeating options] in the flash control display and press 2.
502 Remote Flash Photography
3 C: Adjust flash settings.
· Choose the flash level ([Output]), the maximum number of times the flash units fire ([Times]), and the number of times the flash units fire per second ([Frequency]).
· Enable or disable selected groups. Select [ON] to enable the selected group, [] to disable the selected group.
· Choose a channel for the master flash. If the remote flash units include an SB-500, you must choose channel 3, but otherwise you can choose any channel between 1 and 4.
Remote Flash Photography 503
4 f: Set the remote flash units to the same channel
as the master flash.
Set the remote flash units to the channel selected in Step 3.
5 f: Group the remote flash units.
· Choose a group (A, B, or C) for each remote flash unit. · Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash
units that may be used, the practical maximum is three per group. With more than this number, the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance.
6 C/f: Compose the shot.
· Compose the shot and arrange the flash units. See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information.
· After arranging the units, press the test button on the master flash to test-fire the flash and confirm that the units are functioning normally. Flash units can also be test-fired by pressing the i button in the flash info display (0 510) and selecting [c Test flash].
504 Remote Flash Photography
7 C/f: Take the photograph.
Take the photograph after confirming that the flash-ready lights for all flash units are lit. D Optical AWL
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the light from the master flash (particular care is required if the camera is not mounted on a tripod). Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode) or the photocells on the remote flash units (qA mode), as this may interfere with exposure. To prevent low-intensity timing flashes emitted by the master flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range, choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures (high f-numbers). After positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and view the results in the camera display.
Remote Flash Photography 505
Optical/Radio AWL
Optical and radio AWL can be used together. Radio flash control is provided by a WR-R10 connected to the camera, optical control by an SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander or an SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, or SB-500 flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe. · Before proceeding, establish a wireless connection between
the radio-controlled flash units and the WR-R10 (0 479). · If an SB-500 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe, select
[Optical/radio AWL] for [Flash control] > [Wireless flash options] in the photo shooting menu; with other flash units or the SU-800, this option is selected automatically. · The only option available for [Remote flash control] will be [Group flash]. · Choose a group (AF) for each of the remote flash units. Place opticallycontrolled flash units in groups A through C and radio-controlled units in groups D through F (to display options for groups D through F, press 1 or 3 in the [Group flash options] display).
506 Remote Flash Photography
Flash Info for Remote Units
The camera can display flash info for SB-5000 and SB-500 flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe and configured as a master flash for optical AWL, as well as for remote flash units controlled via radio AWL using a WR-R10. To view flash info during viewfinder photography, press the R button to activate the information display (0 68) and then press the R button again.
Flash Control Mode Displays
Group Flash
12 3 4
1 Flash-ready indicator 1 5 2 Remote flash control (0 566)
6
FP indicator (0 618)
3 Remote flash control mode 2
(0 566) 4 Group flash control mode 3
Group flash mode (0 484,
496)
Flash compensation/flash
level (output; 0 484, 496) 5 Channel 2 (0 479, 496)
6 Link mode 4 (0 689)
Remote Flash Photography 507
Quick Wireless Control
12
7
3
8
4
5
6
1 Flash-ready indicator 1
2 Remote flash control (0 566) FP indicator (0 618)
3 Remote flash control mode 2 (0 566)
4 A : B ratio (0 487, 499)
5 Flash compensation (0 487, 499)
6 Group C flash control mode and flash level (output; 0 487, 499)
7 Channel 2 (0 479, 499)
8 Link mode 4 (0 689)
508 Remote Flash Photography
Remote Repeating
12 3
4 5 6
1 Flash-ready indicator 1 7 2 Remote flash control (0 566)
8 3 Flash level (output; 0 490,
502) 4 Remote flash control mode 2
(0 566) 5 Number emitted (times;
0 490, 502) Frequency (0 490, 502) 6 Group status (enabled/ disabled; 0 490, 502) 7 Channel 2 (0 479, 502)
8 Link mode 4 (0 689)
1 Displayed in radio AWL when all flash units are ready. 2 Optical AWL is indicated by Y, radio AWL by Z, joint optical and
radio AWL by Y and Z. Optical AWL channel for joint optical and radio AWL is displayed only when SB-500 is used as master flash. 3 Icons are displayed for each group when joint optical and radio AWL is used. 4 Displayed only when radio AWL or joint optical and radio AWL is used.
Remote Flash Photography 509
D Flash Info and Camera Settings The flash information display shows selected camera settings, including shooting mode, shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity.
D Changing Flash Settings Flash settings can be changed by pressing the i button in the flash info display. The options available vary with the flash unit and the settings selected. You can also test-fire the flash.
510 Remote Flash Photography
Menu Guide
Defaults
The defaults for the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, and setup menus are listed below.
Playback Menu Defaults
Playback menu option [Delete] [Playback folder] [Playback display options]
[Focus point] [Exposure info] [Highlights] [RGB histogram] [Shooting data] [Overview] [None (image only)] [Copy image(s)] [Image review] [After delete] [Rotate tall] [Slide show] [Image type] [Frame interval] [Rating]
Default -- All
U U U U U U U -- Off Show next On
Still images and movies 2 s --
Menu Guide > Defaults 511
Photo Shooting Menu Defaults
Photo shooting menu option [Reset photo shooting menu] [Storage folder]
[Rename] [Select folder by number] [Select folder from list] [File naming] [Role played by card in Slot 2] [Image area] [Choose image area] [Auto DX crop] [Viewfinder mask display] [Image quality] [Image size] [NEF (RAW) recording] [NEF (RAW) compression] [NEF (RAW) bit depth] [ISO sensitivity settings] [ISO sensitivity]
b, EFCT P, S, A, M [Auto ISO sensitivity control] [Maximum sensitivity] [Maximum sensitivity with c] [Minimum shutter speed]
Default --
ND780 100 -- DSC
Overflow
FX (36×24) On Off
JPEG normal Large
Lossless compressed 14-bit
Auto 100 On 51200 Same as without flash Auto
512 Menu Guide > Defaults
Photo shooting menu option [White balance]
[Fine-tune] [Choose color temperature] [Preset manual] [Set Picture Control] [Manage Picture Control] [Color space] [Active D-Lighting] [Long exposure NR] [High ISO NR] [Vignette control] [Diffraction compensation] [Auto distortion control] [Flicker reduction] [Flicker reduction setting] [Flicker reduction indicator] [Flash control] [Flash control mode] [Wireless flash options] [Remote flash control] [Auto bracketing] [Auto bracketing set] [Number of shots] [Increment]
Default Auto: Keep overall
atmosphere A-B: 0, G-M: 0
5000 K d-1 Auto -- sRGB Off Off
Normal Normal
On Off
Disable On
TTL Off Group flash
AE & flash bracketing 0 1.0
Menu Guide > Defaults 513
Photo shooting menu option [Multiple exposure] *
[Multiple exposure mode] [Number of shots] [Overlay mode] [Save individual images (NEF)] [Overlay shooting] [Select first exposure (NEF)] [HDR (high dynamic range)] [HDR mode] [HDR strength] [Save individual images (NEF)] [Interval timer shooting] [Choose start day/time] [Interval] [Intervals×shots/interval] [Exposure smoothing] [Silent photography] [Interval priority] [Focus before each shot] [Options] [Starting storage folder]
[New folder] [Reset file numbering]
Default
Off 2 Average On On --
Off Auto Off
Now 1 min 0001×1
On On Off Off Off
U U
514 Menu Guide > Defaults
Photo shooting menu option [Time-lapse movie]
[Interval] [Shooting time] [Exposure smoothing] [Silent photography] [Image area]
[Choose image area] [Auto DX crop] [Frame size/frame rate] [Interval priority] [Focus before each shot] [Destination] [Focus shift shooting] [No. of shots] [Focus step width] [Interval until next shot] [First-frame exposure lock] [Silent photography] [Starting storage folder] [New folder] [Reset file numbering] [Silent live view photography]
Default
5 s 25 min.
On On
FX On 1920×1080; 60p Off Off Slot 1
100 5 0 On On
U U Off
* Photo shooting menu reset is not available while a multiple exposure is in progress.
Menu Guide > Defaults 515
Movie Shooting Menu Defaults
Movie shooting menu option [Reset movie shooting menu] [File naming] [Destination] [Image area]
[Choose image area] [Auto DX crop] [Frame size/frame rate] [Movie quality] [Movie file type] [ISO sensitivity settings] [Maximum sensitivity] [Auto ISO control (mode M)] [ISO sensitivity (mode M)] [White balance] [Fine-tune] [Choose color temperature] [Preset manual] [Set Picture Control] [Manage Picture Control] [Active D-Lighting] [High ISO NR]
Default -- DSC
Slot 1
FX On 1920×1080; 60p High quality MOV
51200 On 100
Same as photo settings A-B: 0, G-M: 0 5000 K d-1
Same as photo settings -- Off
Normal
516 Menu Guide > Defaults
Movie shooting menu option [Diffraction compensation] [Flicker reduction] [Electronic VR] [Microphone sensitivity] [Attenuator] [Frequency response] [Wind noise reduction] [Headphone volume] [Timecode]
[Record timecodes] [Count-up method] [Timecode origin] [Drop frame]
Default On Auto Off Auto
Disable Wide range
Off 15
Off Record run
-- On
Menu Guide > Defaults 517
Custom Settings Menu Defaults
Custom Settings menu option [Reset custom settings] a1 [AF-C priority selection] a2 [AF-S priority selection] a3 [Focus tracking with lock-on] a4 [3D-tracking face-detection] a5 [Auto-area AF face/eye detection] a6 [Focus points used] a7 [Store points by orientation] a8 [AF activation] a9 [Focus point wrap-around] a10 [Focus point options]
[Focus point illumination] [Manual focus mode] [Dynamic-area AF assist] a11 [Low-light AF] a12 [Manual focus ring in AF mode] b1 [EV steps for exposure cntrl] b2 [Easy exposure compensation] b3 [Matrix metering] b4 [Center-weighted area] b5 [Fine-tune optimal exposure] [Matrix metering] [Center-weighted metering] [Spot metering] [Highlight-weighted metering]
Default --
Release Focus
3 On Face and eye detection on All points No Shutter/AF-ON No wrap
Auto On On Off Enable 1/3 step Off Face detection on 12 mm
0 0 0 0
518 Menu Guide > Defaults
Custom Settings menu option c1 [Shutter-release button AE-L] c2 [Standby timer] c3 [Self-timer]
[Self-timer delay] [Number of shots] [Interval between shots] c4 [Monitor off delay] [Playback] [Menus] [Information display] [Image review] [Live view] d1 [CL mode shooting speed] d2 [Max. continuous release] d3 [Sync. release mode options] d4 [Exposure delay mode] d5 [Electronic front-curtain shutter] d6 [Extended shutter speeds (M)] d7 [File number sequence] d8 [Save original (EFFECTS)] d9 [Exposure preview (Lv)] d10 [Framing grid display]
Default Off 6 s
10 s 1
0.5 s
10 s 1 min 10 s
4 s 10 min 3 fps
100 Sync Off Disable Off On Off Off Off
Menu Guide > Defaults 519
Custom Settings menu option d11 [Peaking highlights]
[Peaking level] [Peaking highlight color] d12 [LCD illumination] d13 [Live view in continuous mode] d14 [Optical VR] e1 [Flash sync speed] e2 [Flash shutter speed] e3 [Exposure comp. for flash] e4 [Auto c ISO sensitivity control] e5 [Modeling flash] e6 [Bracketing order] f1 [Customize i Menu]
Default
Off Red Off On On 1/200 s 1/60 s Entire frame Subject and background On MTR > under > over Set Picture Control, Image quality, Flash mode, Wi-Fi connection, Autofocus mode, Choose image area, White balance, Image size, Metering, Active D-Lighting, AF-area mode, Custom controls
520 Menu Guide > Defaults
Custom Settings menu option f2 [Customize i Menu (Lv)]
f3 [Custom controls] [Preview button] [Fn button] [AE-L/AF-L button] [AF-ON button] [BKT button] [Movie record button]
f4 [OK button] [Viewfinder photography] [Live view] [Playback mode] [Zoom on/off]
Default Set Picture Control,
Image quality, Flash mode, Wi-Fi connection, Autofocus mode, Negative digitizer, White balance, Image size,
Metering, Active D-Lighting,
AF-area mode, Exposure preview
Preview Choose image area
AE/AF lock AF-ON
Auto bracketing None
Select center focus point Select center focus point
Zoom on/off 1 : 1 (100%)
Menu Guide > Defaults 521
Custom Settings menu option f5 [Customize command dials]
[Reverse rotation]
[Change main/sub]
[Aperture setting] [Menus and playback] [Sub-dial frame advance] f6 [Release button to use dial] f7 [Reverse indicators]
f8 [Dswitch] g1 [Customize i Menu]
Default
Exposure compensation: U, Shutter speed/aperture: U
Exposure setting: Off, Autofocus setting: Off
Sub-command dial Off
10 frames No
LCD backlight (D) Set Picture Control, Frame size and rate/
Image quality, Wind noise reduction,
Wi-Fi connection, Autofocus mode,
Destination, White balance, Microphone sensitivity,
Metering, Active D-Lighting,
AF-area mode, Electronic VR
522 Menu Guide > Defaults
Custom Settings menu option g2 [Custom controls]
[Preview button] [Fn button] [AE-L/AF-L button] [AF-ON button] [Shutter-release button] g3 [AF speed] [When to apply] g4 [AF tracking sensitivity] g5 [Highlight display] [Display pattern] [Highlight display threshold]
Default
None None AE/AF lock AF-ON Take photos
0 Always
4
Off 248
Menu Guide > Defaults 523
Setup Menu Defaults
Setup menu option [Format memory card] [Save user settings] [Reset user settings] [Language]
[Time zone and date] [Time zone]
[Date and time] [Date format]
[Daylight saving time] [Monitor brightness] [Monitor color balance] [Virtual horizon] [Information display]
[Manual] [AF fine-tuning options]
[AF fine-tune on/off] [Fine-tune and save lens] [Default] [List saved values]
Default -- -- --
(Default varies with country of purchase)
(Default varies with country of purchase) --
(Default varies with country of purchase) Off 0 A-B: 0, G-M: 0 -- Auto Dark on light
Off -- -- --
524 Menu Guide > Defaults
Setup menu option [Non-CPU lens data]
[Lens number] [Focal length (mm)] [Maximum aperture] [Clean image sensor] [Clean at startup/shutdown] [Lock mirror up for cleaning] [Image Dust Off ref photo] [Pixel mapping] [Image comment] [Attach comment] [Copyright information] [Attach copyright information] [Beep options] [Beep on/off] [Volume] [Pitch] [Touch controls] [Enable/disable touch controls] [Full-frame playback flicks]
Default
1 -- --
Clean at startup & shutdown -- -- --
U
U
Off 2 Low
Enable Left V Right
Menu Guide > Defaults 525
Setup menu option [HDMI]
[Output resolution] [Advanced]
[Output range] [External recording control] [Output data depth] [N-Log/HDR output options] [View assist] [Location data] [Standby timer] [Position] [Set clock from satellite] [Wireless remote (WR) options] [LED lamp] [Link mode] [Assign remote (WR) Fn button] [Airplane mode] [Connect to smart device] [Pairing (Bluetooth)] [Bluetooth connection] [Select to send (Bluetooth)] [Auto select to send] [Wi-Fi connection] [Send while off]
Default
Auto
Auto Off 8 bit Off Off
Enable -- Yes
On Pairing None Disable
Disable
Off -- On
526 Menu Guide > Defaults
Setup menu option [Connect to PC]
[Wi-Fi connection] [Network settings] [Options]
[Auto send] [Delete after send] [Send file as] [Deselect all?] [MAC address]
Default
Disable --
Off No NEF (RAW) + JPEG -- --
Menu Guide > Defaults 527
Setup menu option [Wireless transmitter (WT-7)]
[Wireless transmitter] [Choose hardware] [Network settings] [Options]
[Auto send] [Delete after send] [Send file as] [Overwrite if same name] [Protect if marked to send] [Send marking] [Send folder] [Deselect all?] [HTTP user settings] [Battery info] [Power saving] [Auto power off delay] [MAC address] [Firmware version] [Conformity marking] [Battery info] [Slot empty release lock] [Save/load menu settings] [Reset all settings] [Firmware version]
Default
Do not use Wired LAN
--
Off No NEF (RAW) + JPEG No No Off -- -- -- -- Prioritize network speed -- -- -- -- -- Enable release -- -- --
528 Menu Guide > Defaults
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
To display the playback menu, select the D (playback menu) tab in the camera menus.
The playback menu contains the following items:
Item
0
Item
0
[Delete]
530 [After delete]
539
[Playback folder]
530 [Rotate tall]
540
[Playback display options] 531 [Slide show]
540
[Copy image(s)]
532 [Rating]
543
[Image review]
538
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 529
Delete
G button U D playback menu
Delete multiple images. For more information, see "The Playback Menu" (0 385).
Option
Description
Q [Selected] Delete selected pictures.
i [Select date] Delete all pictures taken on selected dates.
R [All]
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback folder] in the playback menu. · If two memory cards are inserted, you can select
the card from which pictures will be deleted.
Playback Folder
G button U D playback menu
Choose a folder for playback.
Option (Folder name)
[All] [Current]
Description
Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be visible during playback. Folders can be renamed using the [Storage folder] > [Rename] option in the photo shooting menu.
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback.
530 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
Playback Display Options
G button U D playback menu Choose whether the focus points used when the photograph was taken are displayed during full-frame playback. You can also choose the types of photo information that can be viewed during full-frame playback.
· Highlight options and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U). · To complete the operation, press J.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 531
Copy Image(s)
G button U D playback menu
Copy pictures from one memory card to another when two memory cards are inserted.
Option
Description
[Select source]
Choose the card from which pictures will be copied.
[Select image(s)] Select pictures to be copied.
[Select destination Select the destination folder on the remaining
folder]
card (the card not selected for [Select source]).
[Copy image(s)?] Copy the pictures.
532 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
Copying Pictures
1 Choose [Select source].
Highlight [Select source] and press 2 to display the [Select source] dialog.
2 Select the card containing the
pictures to be copied.
Highlight the slot for the card containing the pictures to be copied and press J to select the highlighted slot and return to the [Copy image(s)] menu.
3 Choose [Select image(s)].
Highlight [Select image(s)] and press 2 to select the highlighted option and return to the [Select image(s)] menu.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 533
4 Select the source folder.
· Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and press 2 to select the highlighted folder and display the [Images selected by default] menu.
· To copy all pictures from the card in the selected slot, highlight [All images in slot], press J, and proceed to Step 10.
5 Make the initial selection.
Choose the pictures that will be selected by default.
Option
Description
None of the pictures in the chosen folder will be
[Deselect all]
selected by default. · Choose this option when you want to select
pictures individually.
[Select all images]
All of the pictures in the chosen folder will be selected by default. · Choose this option if you want to copy all or most
of the pictures in the folder.
[Select protected images]
Only the protected images in the folder will be selected by default.
534 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
6 Select additional images.
· Highlight pictures and press the W (Y) button to select; selected pictures are marked with a L. To deselect the current picture, press the W (Y) button again; the L will no longer be displayed.
· To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X (T) button.
· After confirming that all the pictures you want to copy have L marks, press J to return to the [Copy image(s)] menu.
7 Choose [Select destination
folder].
Highlight [Select destination folder] and press 2 to display the [Select destination folder] menu.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 535
8 Choose a destination folder.
Choose one of the following options and press 2.
Option
[Select Folder by Number]
Description
Enter the number of the destination folder (0 546). If the folder with the selected number does not already exist, a new folder will be created.
[Select Folder from
List]
Choose the destination folder from a list of existing folders.
9 Select the folder.
After entering a folder number or highlighting the folder name, press J to select the folder and return to the [Copy image(s)] menu.
536 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
10 Choose [Copy image(s)?].
Highlight [Copy image(s)?] and press J to display a confirmation dialog.
11 Choose [Yes].
· The camera will display the message "[Copy?]" together with the number of pictures that will be copied.
· Highlight [Yes] and press J to copy the selected pictures.
· Press J again to exit when copying is complete.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 537
D Copying Pictures · Pictures will not be copied if there is
insufficient space on the destination card. · If the destination folder contains a file with
the same name as one of the pictures to be copied, a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Select [Replace existing image] or [Replace all] to replace the existing file or files. Protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced. To continue without replacing existing files, select [Skip]. Select [Cancel] to exit without copying any further pictures. · Ratings and protected status are copied with the pictures. · To prevent loss of power while copying is in progress, be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies.
Image Review
G button U D playback menu
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting. If [Off] is selected, pictures can only be displayed by pressing the K button.
538 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
After Delete
G button U D playback menu
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option
Description
· The following picture is displayed. S [Show next] · If the deleted image was the last picture, the
preceding picture will be displayed.
T [Show previous]
· The preceding picture is displayed. · If the deleted image was the first picture, the next
picture will be displayed.
U [Continue as before]
· If you were scrolling through pictures in the order recorded, the following picture will be displayed as described for [Show next].
· If you were scrolling through pictures in reverse order, the next picture will be displayed as described for [Show previous].
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 539
Rotate Tall
G button U D playback menu
If [On] is selected, "tall" (portrait-orientation) pictures will be automatically rotated for display during playback.
D Rotate Tall Images are not rotated automatically during image review even when [On] is selected for [Rotate tall].
Slide Show
G button U D playback menu
View a slide show; pictures are displayed in the order recorded. The pictures in the folder currently selected for [Playback folder] (0 530) will be displayed one-by-one in the order recorded.
Option
Description
[Start]
Start the slide show.
[Image type]
· Choose the type of picture displayed. · Select [By rating] to view only pictures with
selected ratings. Highlight ratings and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
[Frame interval] Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
540 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
Viewing Slide Shows
To start the slide show, highlight [Start] and press J.
The following operations can be performed while the show is in progress:
To
Description
Skip back/skip Press 4 to return to the previous frame, 2 to skip to
ahead
the next frame.
If more than one page of photo info is selected for View additional [Playback display options] in the playback menu,
photo info you can press 1 or 3 during full-frame playback to
choose the information displayed.
Pause
Press J to pause the slide show. To restart, highlight [Restart] and press J.
Adjust volume
Press X (T) to increase volume, W (Y) to decrease.
Exit to the Press G to end the slide show and return to the playback menu playback menu.
Exit to playback mode
Press K to end the slide show and exit to playback.
Exit to shooting Press the shutter-release button halfway to return to
mode
shooting mode.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 541
A dialog is displayed when the show ends. To restart, highlight [Restart] and press J. To end the show, highlight [Exit] and press J.
542 Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu
Rating
G button U D playback menu
Rate pictures.
· Highlight pictures using the multi selector.
· Hold the W (Y) button and press 1 or 3 to choose a rating of from zero to five stars, or select d to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion.
· To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X (T) button.
· Press J to save changes.
Menu Guide > D The Playback Menu 543
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options
To view the photo shooting menu, select the C tab in the camera menus.
The photo shooting menu contains the following items:
Item
0
Item
0
[Reset photo shooting menu]
545
[Storage folder]
545
[File naming]
545
[Role played by card in Slot 2]
551
[Image area]
551
[Image quality]
551
[Image size]
551
[NEF (RAW) recording]
552
[ISO sensitivity settings] 553
[White balance]
553
[Set Picture Control]
553
[Manage Picture Control] 554
[Color space]
554
[Active D-Lighting]
555
[Long exposure NR]
556
[High ISO NR]
557
[Vignette control]
558
[Diffraction compensation] 559
[Auto distortion control] 560
[Flicker reduction]
561
[Flash control]
563
[Auto bracketing]
567
[Multiple exposure]
569
[HDR (high dynamic range)] 569
[Interval timer shooting] 569
[Time-lapse movie]
570
[Focus shift shooting]
570
[Silent live view photography]
570
544 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Reset Photo Shooting Menu
G button U C photo shooting menu Restore photo shooting menu options to their default values
(0 512).
Storage Folder
G button U C photo shooting menu Choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored.
1 Folder 2 Folder number 3 Folder name
Renaming Folders
The default folder name, which appears after the folder number, is "ND780". To change the name assigned to new folders, select [Rename]. · Existing folders cannot be renamed. · If desired, the default name can be restored for subsequent
folders by pressing and holding the O (Q) button while the keyboard is displayed.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 545
Select Folder by Number
The folder in which subsequent pictures will be stored can be selected by number. If a folder with the specified number does not already exist, a new folder will be created.
1 Choose [Select folder by
number].
· Highlight [Select folder by number] and press 2 to display the [Select folder by number] dialog.
· The card on which the new folder will be created is underlined in the card slot display area at the top right corner of the [Select folder by number] dialog. The card used for new folders depends on the option currently selected for [Role played by card in Slot 2].
2 Choose a folder number.
· Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits. · To change the highlighted digit, press 1 or 3.
546 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
3 Save changes and exit.
· If a folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number. Press J to complete the operation and return to the main menu; if you chose a folder marked W or X, it will be selected as the folder for new pictures.
· If you chose a folder number that does not already exist, a new folder will be created with that number when you press J.
· In either case, subsequent pictures will be stored in the chosen folder.
· To exit without changing the storage folder, press the G button.
D Folder Icons Folders in the [Select folder by number] dialog are shown by W if empty, by Y if full (containing either 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999), or by X if partially full. A Y icon indicates that no further pictures can be stored in the folder.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 547
Select Folder from List
To choose from a list of existing folders:
1 Choose [Select folder from list].
Highlight [Select folder from list] and press 2 to display the [Select folder from list] dialog.
2 Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3 Select the highlighted folder.
· Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the main menu.
· Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder.
548 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
D Folder and File Numbers · Once the folder number has reached 999, the camera will stop creating
new folders automatically and disable the shutter release if: - The number of files in the folder reaches 5000 (or during movie
recording, if camera calculates that the addition of the number of files needed to create a movie of maximum length would bring the total over 5000) - The file number reaches 9999 (or during movie recording, when camera calculates that the number of files needed to create a movie of maximum length would result in a file numbered higher than 9999) · If there is space on the memory card, you will nevertheless be able to continue shooting by: - Creating a folder with a number less than 999 and selecting it as the storage folder - Changing the options selected for [Frame size/frame rate] and [Movie quality] before recording movies D Startup Time Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of files or folders.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 549
File Naming
G button U C photo shooting menu
Pictures are saved using file names consisting of "DSC_" followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter extension. [File naming] is used to select three letters to replace the "DSC" portion of the file name. For information on text entry, see "Text Entry" (0 61).
D File Names · File names take the form "DSC_nnnn.xxx". nnnn is a number from 0001
to 9999. xxx is one of the following extensions, assigned according to the options selected for image quality and file type: - NEF: NEF (RAW) photos - JPG: JPEG (fine, normal, or basic) photos - MOV: MOV movies - MP4: MP4 movies - NDF: Dust off reference data · Images created with [Adobe RGB] selected for [Color space] have file names of the form "_DSCnnnn.xxx". · In each pair of photographs recorded at image-quality settings of NEF (RAW)+JPEG, the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names but different extensions.
550 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Role Played by Card in Slot 2
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose the role played by the card in Slot 2 when two memory cards are inserted in the camera. For more information, see "Using Two Memory Cards" (0 279).
Image Area
G button U C photo shooting menu
Adjust image area settings. For more information, see "Adjusting Image Area Settings" (0 129).
Image Quality
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose a file format for photographs. For more information, see "Adjusting Image Quality" (0 134).
Image Size
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose the size, in pixels, of pictures recorded with the camera. For more information, see "Choosing an Image Size" (0 137).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 551
NEF (RAW) Recording
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose a compression type and bit depth for NEF (RAW) photographs.
NEF (RAW) Compression
Option
Description
N
[Lossless compressed]
NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm. The resulting files are about 60% to 80% the size of uncompressed pictures.
NEF images are compressed using a nonO [Compressed] reversible algorithm. The resulting files are about
45% to 65% the size of uncompressed pictures.
NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
Option q [12-bit]
r [14-bit]
Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits. Files recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits contain more color data than pictures recorded using [12-bit]. Files recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits are also larger than pictures recorded using [12-bit].
552 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button U C photo shooting menu Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for photographs. For more information, see "Adjusting the Camera's Sensitivity to Light
(ISO Sensitivity)" (0 187).
White Balance
G button U C photo shooting menu Adjust white balance to match the color of the light source. For more information, see "Achieving Natural Colors with Different
Light Sources (White Balance)" (0 195).
Set Picture Control
G button U C photo shooting menu Choose image processing ("Picture Control") options for new photos according to the scene or your creative intent. For more
information, see "Image Processing (Picture Controls)" (0 243).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 553
Manage Picture Control
G button U C photo shooting menu
Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls. For more information, see "Creating Custom Picture Controls" (0 250).
Color Space
G button U C photo shooting menu
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction. [sRGB] is recommended for generalpurpose printing and display. With a broader gamut of colors than [sRGB], [Adobe RGB] is a better choice for professional publication and commercial printing.
D Color Space Capture NX-D and ViewNX-i automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with this camera. Results cannot be guaranteed with third-party software.
D Adobe RGB For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require applications, displays, and printers that support color management.
554 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Active D-Lighting
G button U C photo shooting menu Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating pictures with natural contrast. For more information, see "Active
D-Lighting" (0 254).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 555
Long Exposure NR
G button U C photo shooting menu
Reduce "noise" (bright spots or fog) in photographs taken at slow shutter speeds.
Option
Description
[On]
Reduce noise in photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 1 s.
[Off] Long-exposure noise reduction disabled.
· Long-exposure noise reduction is performed after the photo is taken. During processing, "l m" will flash in the control panel and viewfinder. Pictures cannot be taken until the display stops flashing. The time required to process photos after shooting roughly doubles.
D Long-Exposure Noise Reduction If the camera is turned off before processing is complete, the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be performed.
556 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
High ISO NR
G button U C photo shooting menu
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce "noise" (randomly-spaced bright pixels).
Option
Description
[High] Reduce noise in photographs taken at all ISO sensitivities.
[Normal] The higher the sensitivity, the greater the effect. Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from [High], [Normal],
[Low] and [Low].
Noise reduction is performed only as required. The amount [Off] of noise reduction performed is always lower than when
[Low] is selected.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 557
Vignette Control
G button U C photo shooting menu
Vignette control reduces "vignetting"--a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph--by an amount that varies from lens to lens. Its effects are most noticeable at maximum aperture. Vignette control applies only to photographs taken with type G, E, and D lenses (PC lenses excluded).
Option e [High] g [Normal] f [Low] [Off]
Description
Choose the amount of vignette control performed from (in order from high to low) [High], [Normal], and [Low].
Vignette control disabled.
D Vignette Control · Vignette control does not apply to:
- Pictures taken using the [Multiple exposure] item in the photo shooting menu
- Movies · Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, JPEG
images may exhibit "noise" (fog) or over-processing at the edge of the frame that introduces variations in peripheral brightness. In addition, custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor.
558 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Diffraction Compensation
G button U C photo shooting menu Select [On] to reduce diffraction at small apertures (high f/numbers). · To apply diffraction compensation to pictures taken with non-
CPU lenses, enter the lens data using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 559
Auto Distortion Control
G button U C photo shooting menu Select [On] to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide-angle lenses and to reduce pin-cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses. · [Auto distortion control] is available only with type G, E, and
D lenses. Some lenses of these types, including PC and fisheyes lenses, are, however, not supported. Results are not guaranteed with lenses that are not supported. D Auto Distortion Control
· When [On] is selected, the time needed to process photographs before recording begins may increase.
· The greater the amount of distortion control, the greater the area cropped from the edges of the frame.
· Before using auto distortion control with DX lenses, choose [On] for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop] or select [DX (24×16)] for [Choose image area]. Selecting other options may result in heavily cropped photographs or in photographs with severe peripheral distortion.
· Auto distortion control does not apply to movies.
560 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Flicker Reduction
G button U C photo shooting menu
Reduce the effects of flicker from such light sources as fluorescent or mercury-vapor lamps. Flicker can cause uneven exposure or (in photographs taken in continuous release modes) inconsistent exposure or coloration.
Option [Flicker reduction
setting]
[Flicker reduction indicator]
Description
When [Enable] is selected, the camera will time photographs to reduce the effects of flicker. · Note that the frame rate for burst shooting
may drop or become erratic when [Enable] is selected.
Choose whether a FLICKER icon is displayed in the monitor or viewfinder when [Enable] is selected for [Flicker reduction setting]. When [On] is selected, the FLICKER icon will be displayed at different times during viewfinder and live view photography. The differences are as follows: · During viewfinder
photography, the FLICKER icon is displayed if flicker is detected when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. · During live view photography, the FLICKER icon will be displayed at all times whether or not flicker has been detected.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 561
D Flicker Reduction: Restrictions The [Flicker reduction] item in the photo shooting menu does not take effect under some conditions, including when: · MUP is selected for release mode · CH is selected for release mode during live view photography · [On] is selected for [Silent live view photography] in the photo
shooting menu during live view photography · [On] is selected for [Silent photography] in the respective sub-menu
during interval-timer photography, time-lapse movie recording, or focus shift · HDR is enabled · Exposure delay mode is on · Shutter speed is set to A (bulb) or % (time)
D Flicker Reduction · Take a test shot and view the results before taking additional
photographs. · Depending on the light source, flicker reduction may slightly delay
shutter response. During burst shooting, the frame rate may slow or become erratic. · Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz (associated respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz). The desired results may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes during burst photography. · Flicker may not be detected or the desired results may not be achieved depending on the light source and shooting conditions, for example with scenes that are brightly lit or feature dark backgrounds. · The desired results may also not be achieved with decorative lighting displays and other non-standard lighting.
562 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Flash Control
G button U C photo shooting menu
Choose a flash control mode and flash level and adjust other settings for wireless remote flash units or optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
· For information on adjusting settings for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe, see "On-Camera Flash Photography" (0 459).
· For information on adjusting settings for wireless remote flash units, see "Remote Flash Photography" (0 477).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 563
Flash Control Mode
Choose a flash control mode and adjust other settings for SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, or SB-300 flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe.
· The options available in the flash control display vary with the option selected for [Flash control mode].
· Settings for flash units other than the SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300 can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
· Settings for an SB-5000 mounted on the accessory shoe can also be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit.
Option
Description
r [TTL]
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting conditions.
g [Auto external flash]
Flash output is adjusted automatically according to the amount of light reflected by the subject.
m [Distance-priority Choose the distance to the subject; flash
manual]
output will be adjusted automatically.
s [Manual]
Choose the flash level manually.
u [Repeating flash]
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open, producing a multiple-exposure effect.
564 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Wireless Flash Options
Adjust settings for simultaneous wireless control of multiple remote flash units. This item is available only when an SB-5000 or SB-500 flash unit or a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is mounted on the camera.
Option
Description
The remote flash units are controlled using Y [Optical AWL] low-intensity flashes emitted by the master
flash (0 494).
Y/Z
[Optical/ radio AWL]
Choose this option when using both opticallyand radio-controlled flash units (0 506).
The remote flash units are controlled by radio Z [Radio AWL] signals from a WR-R10 attached to the camera
(0 479).
[Off]
Remote flash photography disabled.
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 565
Remote Flash Control
Choose the remote flash control mode. Flash options can be adjusted in the flash control display; the options available vary with the option selected for [Remote flash control].
Option
Description
m [Group flash]
Choose a separate flash control mode for each group of remote flash units (0 484, 496).
x [Quick wireless control]
Choose the balance between groups A and B and set the output for group C manually (0 487, 499).
The flash units fire repeatedly while the u [Remote repeating] shutter is open, producing a multiple-
exposure effect (0 490, 502).
Radio Remote Flash Info
View the flash units currently controlled via radio AWL.
566 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Auto Bracketing
G button U C photo shooting menu Vary exposure, flash level, Active D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot, "bracketing" the current value. Bracketing can be used in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to experiment with different settings for the same subject. For more information, see "Varying Exposure or White Balance over a Series of
Photographs (Bracketing)" (0 224).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 567
Option
[Auto bracketing set]
[Number of shots] [Increment] [Amount]
Description
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect. · [AE & flash bracketing]: Perform both exposure
and flash-level bracketing. · [AE bracketing]: Bracket only exposure. · [Flash bracketing]: Perform only flash-level
bracketing. · [WB bracketing]: Perform white-balance
bracketing. · [ADL bracketing]: Perform bracketing using Active
D-Lighting.
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence.
Choose the amount the selected settings vary with each shot when an option other than [ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing set].
Choose how Active D-Lighting varies with each shot when [ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing set].
568 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
Multiple Exposure
G button U C photo shooting menu Record two to ten NEF (RAW) exposures as a single photograph. For more information, see "Combining Multiple Exposures in a
Single Photo (Multiple Exposure)" (0 287).
HDR (High Dynamic Range)
G button U C photo shooting menu Used with high contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR) preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures. For more information, see
"High Dynamic Range (HDR)" (0 256).
Interval Timer Shooting
G button U C photo shooting menu Take photographs at the selected interval until the specified number of shots has been recorded. For more information, see "Taking Photos at a Set Interval (Interval Timer Shooting)"
(0 298).
Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu 569
Time-Lapse Movie
G button U C photo shooting menu The camera automatically takes photos at selected intervals to create a time-lapse movie. For more information, see "Creating
a Movie from Photos (Time-Lapse Movie)" (0 315).
Focus Shift Shooting
G button U C photo shooting menu Focus shift automatically varies focus over a series of shots. Use it to take photos that will later be combined using focus stacking to create a single image with increased depth of field. For more information, see "Varying Focus over a Series of
Photos (Focus Shift Shooting)" (0 328).
Silent Live View Photography
G button U C photo shooting menu Enable the electronic shutter during live view photography to mute shutter sounds and eliminate the vibrations produced by the mechanical shutter. For more information, see "The
Electronic Shutter (Silent Live View Photography)" (0 340).
570 Menu Guide > C The Photo Shooting Menu
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting Options
To view the movie shooting menu, select the 1 tab in the camera menus.
The movie shooting menu contains the following items:
Item
0
Item
0
[Reset movie shooting menu] [File naming] [Destination] [Image area] [Frame size/frame rate] [Movie quality] [Movie file type] [ISO sensitivity settings] [White balance] [Set Picture Control] [Manage Picture Control]
572 [Active D-Lighting]
577
[High ISO NR]
578
572 [Diffraction compensation] 578
572 [Flicker reduction]
579
573 [Electronic VR]
580
573 [Microphone sensitivity] 581
574 [Attenuator]
582
574 [Frequency response]
582
575 [Wind noise reduction]
583
576 [Headphone volume]
583
577 [Timecode]
584
577
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 571
Reset Movie Shooting Menu
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Restore movie shooting menu options to their default values (0 516).
File Naming
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Choose the three-letter prefix used in naming the image files in which movies are stored; the default prefix is "DSC" (0 550).
Destination
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Choose the slot to which movies are recorded when two memory cards are inserted. · The menu shows the time available on each card. · Recording ends automatically when no time remains on the
current card.
572 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Image Area
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Choose the image area for movies.
Auto DX Crop
Choose whether the camera automatically uses the [DX] image area for movies recorded with a DX lens.
Frame Size/Frame Rate
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate. For more information, see "Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality" (0 264).
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 573
Movie Quality
G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose from [High quality] and [Normal]. For more information, see "Frame Size/Frame Rate and Movie Quality"
(0 264).
Movie File Type
G button U 1 movie shooting menu Record movies in MOV or MP4 format.
574 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
ISO Sensitivity Settings
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Adjust the following ISO sensitivity settings for use during filming.
Option
[Maximum sensitivity]
[Auto ISO control (mode M)]
[ISO sensitivity (mode M)]
Description
· Choose the upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control from values between ISO 200 and Hi 2.
· The selected value serves as the upper limit for ISO sensitivity in modes P, S, and A and when [On] is selected for [Auto ISO control (mode M)] in mode M.
· [On]: Enable auto ISO sensitivity control in mode M. · [Off]: Use the value selected for [ISO sensitivity (mode
M)]. · Regardless of the option selected, auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in modes other than M.
Choose the ISO sensitivity for mode M from values between ISO 100 and Hi 2.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 575
D Auto ISO Sensitivity Control · At high ISO sensitivities, "noise" (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or
lines) may increase. · At high ISO sensitivities, the camera may have difficulty focusing. · The foregoing can be prevented by choosing a lower value for [ISO
sensitivity settings] > [Maximum sensitivity].
White Balance
G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose the white balance for movies. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently selected for photos
(0 553).
576 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Set Picture Control
G button U 1 movie shooting menu Choose a Picture Control for movies. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently selected for photos
(0 553).
Manage Picture Control
G button U 1 movie shooting menu Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls
(0 554).
Active D-Lighting
G button U 1 movie shooting menu Preserve details in highlights and shadows, creating movies with natural contrast. Select [Same as photo settings] to use the option currently
selected for photos (0 254).
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 577
High ISO NR
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Reduce "noise" (randomly-spaced bright pixels) in movies recorded at high ISO sensitivities (0 557).
Diffraction Compensation
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Reduce diffraction in movies (0 559).
578 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Flicker Reduction
G button U 1 movie shooting menu Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting during live view or movie recording. Choose [Auto] to allow the camera to automatically choose the correct frequency. If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results, select [50 Hz] or [60 Hz] according to the frequency of the local power supply. Choose [50 Hz] for areas with a 50 Hz power supply, [60 Hz] for areas with a 60 Hz power supply. D Flicker Reduction · If [Auto] fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the
frequency of the local power supply, test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best results. · Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright. If this is the case, try choosing a smaller aperture (higher fnumber). · Flicker reduction may fail to produce the desired results in modes other than M. If this is the case, select mode M and choose a shutter speed adapted to the frequency of the local power supply: - 50 Hz: 1/100 s, 1/50 s, 1/25 s - 60 Hz: 1/125 s, 1/60 s, 1/30 s
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 579
Electronic VR
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Choose whether to enable electronic vibration reduction during movie recording.
Option [On] [Off]
Description
· Enable electronic vibration reduction during movie recording.
· Electronic vibration reduction is not available in EFCT modes or at frame sizes of 1920 × 1080; 120p, 1920 × 1080; 100p, or 1920 × 1080 (slow-motion).
· Note that when electronic vibration reduction is [On], the angle of view will be reduced, slightly increasing the apparent focal length.
· The maximum sensitivity for movie recording is fixed at ISO 51200.
Electronic vibration reduction is disabled.
580 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Microphone Sensitivity
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Turn built-in or external microphones on or off or adjust microphone sensitivity.
Option
Description
[Auto] Adjust microphone sensitivity automatically.
[Manual]
Select microphone sensitivity manually. Choose from values of from 1 to 20. The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity; the lower the value, the lower the sensitivity.
[Microphone off]
Turn sound recording off.
D Movies Without Sound Movies that were recorded with [Microphone off] selected for [Microphone sensitivity] are indicated by a 2 icon.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 581
Attenuator
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Select [Enable] to reduce microphone gain and prevent audio distortion when recording movies in loud environments.
Frequency Response
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Choose the range of frequencies to which built-in and external microphones respond.
Option S [Wide
range] T [Vocal
range]
Description Record a wide range of frequencies. Choose for everything from music to the bustling hum of a city street.
Choose for human voices.
582 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Wind Noise Reduction
G button U 1 movie shooting menu Select [On] to enable the low-cut filter, reducing noise produced by wind blowing over the built-in microphone. Note that other sounds may also be affected. Selecting [On] for [Wind noise reduction] has no effect on optional stereo microphones. Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using microphone controls.
Headphone Volume
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Press 1 or 3 to adjust headphone volume.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 583
Timecode
G button U 1 movie shooting menu
Choose whether to record time codes giving the hour, minute, second, and frame number for each frame when shooting movies. Time codes are available only with movies recorded in MOV format.
Option
[Record timecodes]
[Count-up method]
Description
· [On]: Record time codes. The time code appears in the monitor.
· [On (with HDMI output)]: Time codes will be included with footage saved to external recorders connected to the camera via an HDMI cable. The camera supports Atomos SHOGUN, NINJA, and SUMO-series Monitor recorders.
· [Off]: Time codes are not recorded.
· [Record run]: Time codes are incremented only while recording is in progress.
· [Free run]: Time codes are incremented continuously. Time codes continue to be incremented while the camera is off.
584 Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu
Option
Description
[Timecode origin]
· [Reset]: Reset the time code to 00:00:00.00. · [Enter manually]: Enter the hour, minute, second, and
frame number manually. · [Current time]: Set the time code to the current time
as reported by the camera clock. Before using this option, select [Time zone and date] in the setup menu and confirm that the camera clock is set to the correct date and time.
Select [On] to compensate for discrepancies between [Drop frame] the frame count and the actual recording time at frame
rates of 30 and 60 fps.
D HDMI Devices Selecting [On (with HDMI output)] for [Record timecodes] may disrupt footage output to HDMI devices.
Menu Guide > 1 The Movie Shooting Menu 585
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
To view Custom Settings, select the A tab in the camera menus. Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences. The Custom Settings menu is divided into levels.
586 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
The following Custom Settings are available: 1
Item
0
Item
0
[Reset custom settings] 590 b [Metering/exposure]
a [Autofocus]
a1
[AF-C priority selection]
a2
[AF-S priority selection]
b1
[EV steps for exposure cntrl]
601
590
b2
[Easy exposure compensation]
602
591 b3 [Matrix metering] 603
a3
[Focus tracking with lock-on]
592
b4
[Center-weighted area]
603
a4
[3D-tracking facedetection]
592
b5
[Fine-tune optimal exposure]
604
a5 a6
[Auto-area AF face/ eye detection]
[Focus points used]
593 594
c [Timers/AE lock]
c1
[Shutter-release button AE-L]
605
a7
[Store points by orientation]
595
a8 [AF activation]
597
a9
[Focus point wraparound]
597
c2 [Standby timer]
605
c3 [Self-timer]
606
c4 [Monitor off delay] 606
a10
[Focus point options]
598
a11 [Low-light AF]
599
a12
[Manual focus ring in AF mode] 2
600
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 587
Item
0
d [Shooting/display]
d1
[CL mode shooting speed]
607
d2
[Max. continuous release]
607
d3
[Sync. release mode options]
608
d4
[Exposure delay mode]
608
d5
[Electronic frontcurtain shutter]
609
d6
[Extended shutter speeds (M)]
610
d7
[File number sequence]
611
d8
[Save original (EFFECTS)]
613
d9
[Exposure preview (Lv)]
614
d10
[Framing grid display]
615
d11 [Peaking highlights] 615
d12 [LCD illumination] 616
d13
[Live view in continuous mode]
616
d14 [Optical VR] 3
617
Item
0
e [Bracketing/flash]
e1 [Flash sync speed] 618
e2 [Flash shutter speed] 620
e3
[Exposure comp. for flash]
620
e4
[Auto c ISO sensitivity control]
621
e5 [Modeling flash]
621
e6 [Bracketing order] 622
f [Controls]
f1 [Customize i menu] 623
f2
[Customize i menu (Lv)]
626
f3 [Custom controls] 628
f4 [OK button]
635
f5
[Customize command dials]
637
f6
[Release button to use dial]
641
f7 [Reverse indicators] 642
f8 [D switch]
642
588 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Item
0
g [Movie]
g1 [Customize i menu] 643
g2 [Custom controls] 645
g3 [AF speed]
650
g4
[AF tracking sensitivity]
652
g5 [Highlight display] 653
1 Items modified from default values are indicated by asterisks ("U"). 2 This item is available with compatible lenses only. 3 This item is available only with compatible AF-P lenses not equipped
with a vibration reduction switch.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 589
Reset Custom Settings
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Restore Custom Settings to their default values (0 518).
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when AF-C is selected.
Option
Description
G
[Release]
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority).
F [Focus]
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
590 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether photos can be taken before the camera focuses when AF-S is selected.
Option
Description
G
[Release]
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release button is pressed (release priority).
F [Focus]
Photos can be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus priority).
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 591
a3: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose how quickly focus responds if something passes between the subject and the camera during viewfinder photography in autofocus mode AF-C or when AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C. · Choose [5 (Delayed)] to help maintain focus on your original
subject. · Choose [1 (Quick)] to make it easier to shift focus to objects
crossing your field of view. · Note that [2] and [1 (Quick)] are equivalent to [3] when
[3D-tracking] or [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
a4: 3D-Tracking Face-Detection
G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces when [3D-tracking] is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder photography.
592 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a5: Auto-Area AF Face/Eye Detection
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces or on faces and eyes when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
Option
[Face and eye detection on]
[Face detection on]
[Off]
Description
If the camera detects a portrait subject during live view photography, it will automatically focus on one or the other of the subject's eyes. During viewfinder photography or movie recording or if the eyes are not detected, the camera will instead focus on the subject's face.
When the camera detects a portrait subject, it automatically focuses on the subject's face.
Face and eye detection disabled.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 593
a6: Focus Points Used
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection when an option other than [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode.
Option R [All
points]
[Every I other
point]
Description
Every focus point available in the current AF-area mode can be selected. The number of points available varies with the AF-area mode.
The number of available focus points is reduced to one quarter of the number available when [All points] is selected. Use for quick focus-point selection. · This has no effect on the number of focus points
available for live view photography in [Pinpoint AF] and [Wide-area AF (L)] modes.
594 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a7: Store Points by Orientation
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether separate focus points can be selected for "wide" (landscape) orientation, for "tall" (portrait) orientation with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, and for "tall" orientation with the camera rotated 90° counterclockwise. Separate options are available for the viewfinder (shown in the illustrations) and for live view. · Select [No] to use the same focus point regardless of camera
orientation.
Camera rotated Landscape (wide)
90°counter-clockwise
orientation
Camera rotated 90°clockwise
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 595
· Select [Yes] to enable separate focus-point selection.
Camera rotated
Landscape (wide)
90°counter-clockwise
orientation
Camera rotated 90°clockwise
596 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
a8: AF Activation
G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether the shutter-release button can be used to focus. If [AF-ON only] is selected, the camera will not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus can only be adjusted using the AF-ON button or other controls to which AF-ON has been assigned using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls].
a9: Focus Point Wrap-Around
G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether focus-point selection "wraps around" from one edge of the display to another. If [Wrap] is selected, focus-point selection will "wrap around" from top to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left to right,
so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 597
a10: Focus Point Options
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose from the following focus point display options:
Focus Point Illumination
Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in the viewfinder.
Option [Auto]
[On] [Off]
Description
The selected focus point is automatically highlighted in red as needed to establish contrast with the background.
The selected focus point is always highlighted in red, regardless of the brightness of the background. Depending on the brightness of the background, the selected focus point may be difficult to see.
The selected focus point is not highlighted.
Manual Focus Mode
Option [On] [Off]
Description
The focus point is displayed at all times in manual focus mode.
The focus point is displayed only during focus point selection.
598 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Dynamic-Area AF Assist
Choose whether both the selected focus point and the surrounding focus points are displayed in dynamic-area AF mode.
Option
Description
[On]
Display both the selected focus point and surrounding focus points.
[Off] Display only the selected focus point.
a11: Low-Light AF
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose [On] for more accurate focus under low-light conditions during live view when AF-S is selected for autofocus mode or when AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-S. · Low-light AF applies only during still photography. · Low-light AF is not available in b and EFCT modes. · Low-light AF is not available during interval-timer
photography or time-lapse movie recording. · The camera may require more time to focus when [On] is
selected. · While low-light AF is in effect, "Low-light" will appear in the
monitor. In addition, the display refresh rate may drop.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 599
a12: Manual Focus Ring in AF Mode
G button U A Custom Settings menu
This item is available with compatible lenses only. Choose whether the lens focus ring can be used for manual focus in autofocus mode.
Option
Description
Autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens focus ring (autofocus with manual override). The focus ring can be used [Enable] for manual focus while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To refocus using autofocus, lift your finger from the shutter-release button and then press it halfway again.
[Disable]
The lens focus ring cannot be used for manual focus while autofocus mode is selected.
600 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl
G button U A Custom Settings menu Select the increments used for adjustments to shutter speed, aperture, ISO sensitivity, bracketing, and exposure and flash compensation.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 601
b2: Easy Exposure Compensation
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the E button is needed for exposure compensation.
Option [On
(Auto reset)]
[On] [Off]
Description
Exposure compensation can be adjusted rotating the command dial not currently used for shutter speed or aperture. The setting selected with the command dial is reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires.
Exposure compensation can be adjusted rotating the command dial not currently used for shutter speed or aperture. Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera turns off or the standby timer expires. Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E button and rotating the main command dial.
· This setting takes effect in modes P, S, and A. Easy exposure compensation is not available in other modes.
· The command dial used varies with the shooting mode.
602 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
b3: Matrix Metering
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether [Matrix metering] assigns priority to faces detected by the camera. This setting applies only during viewfinder photography.
Option
U
[Face detection on]
V
[Face detection off]
Description
Matrix metering assigns priority to faces detected by the camera.
Matrix metering does not assign priority to faces detected by the camera.
b4: Center-Weighted Area
G button U A Custom Settings menu
When [Center-weighted metering] is selected, the camera assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center of the viewfinder when setting exposure. Custom Setting b4 [Centerweighted area] is used to choose the size of the area given the greatest weight when [Center-weighted metering] is selected. · If a non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 815mm f/3.54.5E ED
lens is attached, the size of the area is fixed at 12 mm.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 603
b5: Fine-Tune Optimal Exposure
G button U A Custom Settings menu Use this item to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the camera; exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each metering method. Exposure can be adjusted up for brighter exposures or down for darker exposures in the range +1 to -1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV. The default is 0. D Fine-Tuning Exposure · Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b5 [Fine-tune
optimal exposure], the exposure compensation icon (E) will not be displayed. The only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning menu for Custom Setting b5. · The values selected are not affected by two-button resets.
604 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether exposure locks when the shutter-release button is pressed.
Option
Description
O
[On (half press)]
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway locks exposure.
P [On (burst mode)]
Exposure only locks while the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down.
[Off]
Pressing the shutter-release button does not lock exposure.
c2: Standby Timer
G button U A Custom Settings menu
The camera continues to meter exposure for a set time after the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Choose how long the camera continues to meter exposure when no operations are performed. · The shutter-speed and aperture displays in the control panel
and viewfinder turn off automatically when the standby timer expires.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 605
c3: Self-Timer
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the length of the shutter release delay, the number of shots taken, and the interval between shots in self-timer mode.
Option [Self-timer
delay]
[Number of shots]
[Interval between
shots]
Description
Choose the length of the shutter-release delay.
Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed; choose from values of from 1 to 9.
Choose the interval between shots when [Number of shots] is more than 1.
c4: Monitor Off Delay
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations are performed. · Separate monitor off delays can be selected for [Playback],
[Image review], [Menus], [Information display], and [Live view]. · The default delays are: for [Playback] and [Information display], 10 s; for [Menus], 1 minute; for [Image review], 4 s; and for [Live view], 10 minutes. · Choose shorter monitor-off delays for greater battery endurance.
606 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d: Shooting/Display
d1: CL Mode Shooting Speed
G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose the frame advance rate for low-speed continuous release mode; options range from [6 fps] to [1 fps].
d2: Max. Continuous Release
G button U A Custom Settings menu The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst in continuous release modes can be set to any value between 1 and 100. · Note that regardless of the option selected, there is no limit to
the number of photos that can be taken in a single burst when a shutter speed of 4 s or slower is selected in mode S or M. D The Memory Buffer
Custom Setting d2 [Max. continuous release] is used to select the number of shots that can be taken in a single burst. The number of shots that can be taken before the memory buffer fills and shooting slows varies with image quality and other settings. When the buffer is full, the camera will display r00 and the frame advance rate will drop.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 607
d3: Sync. Release Mode Options
G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether the shutters on the remote cameras are synchronized with the shutter on the master camera when using an optional wireless remote controller.
d4: Exposure Delay Mode
G button U A Custom Settings menu In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur pictures, shutter release can be delayed by from about 0.2 to 3 seconds after the mirror is raised.
608 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d5: Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Enable or disable the electronic front-curtain shutter. Enabling the electronic front-curtain helps reduce blur caused by camera shake. The electronic front-curtain shutter is available in Q, QC, and MUP modes.
Option [Enable] [Disable]
Description Enable the electronic front-curtain shutter. Use a mechanical shutter.
D The Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter · Pictures taken with lenses of types other than G, E, or D may contain
"noise" such as lines or fog. Select [Disable] should you notice this to be the case. · Regardless of the option selected, the camera uses the mechanical shutter in modes other than Q, QC, and MUP. · The fastest shutter speed and maximum ISO sensitivity available with the electronic front-curtain shutter are 1/2000 s and ISO 51200, respectively.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 609
d6: Extended Shutter Speeds (M)
G button U A Custom Settings menu Extend the range of shutter speeds available in mode M; the slowest shutter speed available when [On] is selected is 900 s (15 minutes). Extended shutter speeds can be used for pictures of the night sky and in other situations that require that the shutter remain open for long periods. · To use extended shutter speeds, choose [On] and select a
shutter speed of 60 s or slower.
610 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d7: File Number Sequence
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose a file numbering option.
Option [On] [Off]
[Reset]
Description
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted in the camera, file numbering will continue from the last number used. This simplifies file management by minimizing the occurrence of duplicate file names when multiple cards are used.
When a new folder is created or a new memory card is inserted, file numbering restarts from 0001. If the current folder already contains images, file numbering will instead continue from the highest file number in the current folder. If you select [Off] after selecting [On], the camera will store the current file number. File numbering will resume from the previously-stored value the next time [On] is selected.
Reset the file numbering for [On]. If the current folder is empty, file numbering will restart from 0001 with the next picture taken. If the current folder contains images, the next picture taken will be assigned a file number by adding one to the highest file number in the current folder.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 611
D File Number Sequence · If a picture is taken when the current folder contains a picture
numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and file numbering will restart from 0001. · When the current folder number reaches 999, the camera will no longer be able to create new folders and the shutter release will be disabled if: - The current folder contains 5000 pictures (in addition, movie
recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed to record a movie of the maximum length would result in the folder containing over 5000 files) - The current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 (in addition, movie recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed to record a movie of the maximum length would result in a file numbered over 9999) To resume shooting, choose [Reset] for Custom Setting d7 [File number sequence] and then either format the current memory card or insert a new memory card. D Folder Numbering · If a picture is taken when the current folder contains 5000 pictures or a picture numbered 9999, a new folder will be created and selected as the current folder. · The new folder is assigned a number one higher than current folder number. If a folder with that number already exists, the new folder will be assigned the lowest available folder number.
612 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d8: Save Original (EFFECTS)
G button U A Custom Settings menu
In f, d, e, k, l, and m modes, you can choose whether in addition to saving pictures in JPEG format, the camera saves NEF (RAW) copies without the effects applied.
Option [On] [Off]
Description
The camera saves an NEF (RAW) copy in addition to a JPEG copy to which the effect has been applied.
The camera saves only a JPEG copy to which the effect has been applied.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 613
d9: Exposure Preview (Lv)
G button U A Custom Settings menu Select [On] to preview how the options currently selected for shutter speed, aperture, and ISO sensitivity affect exposure while taking photographs in modes P, S, A, and M. A Exposure Preview · Exposure preview is not available when A (Bulb) or % (Time) is
selected for shutter speed. Note that the preview may not accurately reflect the final results when: - [On] is selected for Custom Setting d6 [Extended shutter speeds
(M)] and shutter speed is 60 s or slower - Flash lighting is used - [Active D-Lighting] or [HDR (high dynamic range)] is in effect - s is selected for shutter speed - Bracketing is in effect · If the subject is very bright or very dark, the exposure indicators will flash to warn that the preview may not accurately reflect exposure. · Exposure can be adjusted by ±5 EV, although only values between -3 and +3 EV are reflected in the preview display.
614 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d10: Framing Grid Display
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether to display a grid for reference when framing shots.
d11: Peaking Highlights
G button U A Custom Settings menu
When focus peaking is enabled during live view photography in manual focus mode, objects that are in focus are indicated by colored outlines in the display. You can choose the color.
Option
Description
Choose from [3 (high sensitivity)], [2 (standard)], [1 (low sensitivity)], and [Off]. The higher the value, [Peaking level] the greater the depth that will be shown as being in focus. Focus peaking is not performed in special effects modes.
[Peaking highlight
color]
Choose a peaking highlight color from [Red], [Yellow], [Blue], and [White].
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 615
d12: LCD Illumination
G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose when the control panel backlight lights. · If [Off] is selected, the backlight will light when the power
switch is rotated to D. The backlight turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway or all the way down. · If [On] is selected, the backlight will light while the standby timer is active. Note that this increases the drain on the battery. The backlight will turn off while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway or all the way down, but will turn on again when the button is released.
d13: Live View in Continuous Mode
G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose whether the monitor remains on in live view while burst photography is in progress. If [Off] is selected, not only the monitor but also the monitor backlight will turn off during exposures.
616 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
d14: Optical VR
G button U A Custom Settings menu This item is available only with compatible AF-P lenses not equipped with a vibration reduction switch. Selecting [On] enables vibration reduction, which takes effect whenever the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Select [Off] to disable vibration reduction.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 617
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the flash sync speed.
Option
[1/200 s (Auto FP)]
[1/200 s] [1/160 s] [1/125 s] [1/100 s] [1/80 s] [1/60 s]
Description Auto FP high-speed sync is enabled with compatible flash units and the maximum sync speed for other flash units is set to 1/200 s. · When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1/200 s in
mode P or A, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1/200 s. If the flash supports auto FP high-speed sync, the camera can select shutter speeds as fast as 1/8000 s. · In modes S and M, the user can select shutter speeds as fast as 1/8000 s when using flash units that support auto FP high-speed sync.
Flash sync speed set to selected value, which can be from 1/200 to 1/60 s.
618 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
D Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit In modes S and M, shutter speed can be fixed at the value selected for Custom Setting e1 [Flash sync speed] by selecting the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or %). An X (flash sync indicator) will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel together with the flash sync speed. D Auto FP High-Speed Sync · Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at the highest
shutter speed supported by the camera. When [1/200 s (Auto FP)] is selected, the camera automatically enables auto FP high-speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed. This makes it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight. · The flash information display shows "FP" when auto [1/200 s (Auto FP)] is selected.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 619
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the slowest shutter speed available with a flash in mode P or A. Regardless of the setting chosen for e2 [Flash shutter speed], shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in modes S and M or at flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye reduction with slow sync.
e3: Exposure Comp. for Flash
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used.
Option
Description
YE
[Entire frame]
The camera adjusts both the flash level and exposure. This changes the exposure for the entire frame.
E [Background Exposure compensation is adjusted for the
only]
background only.
620 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
e4: Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled.
Option e [Subject and
background] f [Subject only]
Description
The camera takes both the main subject and background lighting into account when adjusting ISO sensitivity.
ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main subject is correctly exposed.
e5: Modeling Flash
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Select [On] to enable the modeling flash emitted if the Pv button is pressed when the camera is used with an optional flash unit that supports the Nikon Creative Lighting system.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 621
e6: Bracketing Order
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the order in which the shots in the bracketing program are taken.
Option
Description
The unmodified shot is taken first,
H
[MTR > under > over]
followed by the shot with the lowest value, followed by the shot with the
highest value.
I
[Under > MTR > over]
Shooting proceeds in order from the lowest to the highest value.
· Custom Setting e6 [Bracketing order], has no effect on the order of the shots taken when [ADL bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu.
622 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f: Controls
f1: Customize i Menu
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i
button is pressed during viewfinder photography. For information on customizing the i menu, see "Customizing the i Menu: Customize i Menu" (0 347).
Item
0
J [Choose image area]
129
8 [Image quality]
134
o [Image size]
137
N
[View memory card info]
624
E [Exposure compensation]
175
9
[ISO sensitivity settings]
187
m [White balance]
195
h [Set Picture Control]
243
p [Color space]
554
Item
0
y [Active D-Lighting] 254
q [Long exposure NR] 556
r [High ISO NR]
557
w [Metering]
166
c [Flash mode]
465
Y
[Flash compensation]
469
g [Autofocus mode] 140
t [AF-area mode]
145
t [Auto bracketing] 224
$ [Multiple exposure] 287
2 [HDR (high dynamic range)]
256
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 623
Item
0
7 [Interval timer shooting]
298
8 [Time-lapse movie] 315
9 [Focus shift shooting]
328
v
[View release mode]
624
Item
0
w [Custom controls] 628
z [Exposure delay mode]
608
Z
[Bluetooth connection]
625
U [Wi-Fi connection] 625
View Memory Card Info
View the slot currently selected as the destination for new pictures and the role played by the card in Slot 2 when two memory cards are inserted. This item can be used to view but not to change the option selected. · The role played by the card in Slot 2 can be selected using
[Role played by card in Slot 2] in the photo shooting menu (0 279).
View Release Mode
View the current release mode. This item can be used to view but not change the option selected.
624 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Bluetooth Connection
Turn the Bluetooth connection on or off.
Wi-Fi Connection
Enable or disable Wi-Fi. · Enable Wi-Fi to establish wireless connections to computers or
between the camera and smartphones or tablets (smart devices) running the SnapBridge app. · To turn Wi-Fi off, highlight [Wi-Fi connection] in the i menu and press J; if Wi-Fi is currently enabled, a [Close Wi-Fi connection] prompt will be displayed. Press J to end the connection.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 625
f2: Customize i Menu (Lv)
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is pressed during live view. For information on customizing the i menu, see "Customizing the i Menu: Customize i Menu" (0 347).
Item
0
J
[Choose image area]
129
8 [Image quality]
134
o [Image size]
137
N
[View memory card info]
624
E [Exposure compensation]
175
9 [ISO sensitivity settings]
187
m [White balance]
195
h [Set Picture Control]
243
p [Color space]
554
Item
0
y [Active D-Lighting] 254
q [Long exposure NR] 556
r [High ISO NR]
557
w [Metering]
166
c [Flash mode]
465
Y
[Flash compensation]
469
g [Autofocus mode] 140
t [AF-area mode]
145
t [Auto bracketing] 224
$ [Multiple exposure] 287
2
[HDR (high dynamic range)]
256
626 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Item
0
7 [Interval timer shooting]
298
8 [Time-lapse movie] 315
9 [Focus shift shooting]
328
L
[Silent live view photography]
570
v
[View release mode]
624
w [Custom controls] 628
Item
0
z [Exposure delay mode]
608
$ [Exposure preview] 614
W [Peaking highlights]
615
3
[Monitor brightness]
658
Z
[Bluetooth connection]
625
U [Wi-Fi connection] 625
% [Negative digitizer] 343
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 627
f3: Custom Controls
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the functions performed either by pressing camera controls or by pressing controls and rotating command dials during still photography.
· Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the desired control and press J.
Option 0 [Preview button] 3 [Fn button] ! [AE-L/AF-L button] V [AF-ON button] n [BKT button] z [Movie record button]
· The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option A [AF-ON] F [AF lock only] E [AE lock (Hold)] D [AE lock (Reset on release)] C [AE lock only] B [AE/AF lock] r [FV lock]
03!Vnz 4 4 4 4 ---- 4 4 4 4 ---- 4 4 4 4 ---- 4 4 4 4 ---- 4 4 4 4 ---- 4 4 4 4 ---- 4 4 4 ------
628 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option h [cDisable/enable] q [Preview] % [Preview (Lv max. aperture)] L [Matrix metering] M [Center-weighted metering] N [Spot metering] t [Highlight-weighted metering] 1 [Bracketing burst] 4 [+ NEF (RAW)] b [Framing grid display] ! [Viewfinder virtual horizon] O [MY MENU] 3 [Access top item in MY MENU] K [Playback] J [Choose image area] y [Active D-Lighting] w [Metering] t [Auto bracketing] $ [Multiple exposure] 2 [HDR (high dynamic range)] z [Exposure delay mode] v [1 step spd/aperture] w [Choose non-CPU lens number] [None]
03! Vnz 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 ------ 4 4 4 -------- ---------- 4 -------- 4 -- -------- 4 -- -------- 4 -- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 4 4 -------- 444444
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 629
· The following options are available:
Option
Description
A [AF-ON]
Pressing the control initiates autofocus, duplicating the function of the AF-ON button.
F [AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
E
[AE lock (Hold)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. Exposure lock does not end when the shutter is released. Exposure remains locked until the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
[AE lock D (Reset on
release)]
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. Exposure remains locked until the control is pressed a second time, the shutter is released, or the standby timer expires.
C [AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B
[AE/AF lock]
Focus and exposure lock while the control is pressed.
r [FV lock]
Press the control to lock flash value for optional flash units; press again to cancel FV lock.
630 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
h [c Disable/ enable]
q [Preview]
[Preview (Lv % max.
aperture)] L [Matrix
metering] [CenterM weighted metering] N [Spot metering] [Highlightt weighted metering]
Description If the flash is currently enabled, it will be disabled while the control is pressed. If the flash is currently off, front-curtain sync will be selected while the control is pressed. Hold the control to stop aperture down and preview depth of field during viewfinder photography. During live view, pressing the control stops aperture down to the selected value. Press the control to temporarily select maximum aperture for an improved focus preview during live view. [Matrix metering] is activated while the control is pressed.
[Center-weighted metering] is activated while the control is pressed.
[Spot metering] is activated while the control is pressed.
[Highlight-weighted metering] is activated while the control is pressed.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 631
Option
Description
1
[Bracketing burst]
· If the control is pressed when an option other than [WB bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set] in the photo shooting menu in release mode CH, CL, or QC, the camera will take all the shots in the current bracketing program and repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter-release button is pressed. In release modes S and Q, shooting will end after the first bracketing burst.
· If [WB bracketing] is selected for [Auto bracketing] > [Auto bracketing set], the camera will take pictures while the shutter release button is pressed and apply white balance bracketing to each shot.
· If a JPEG option is currently selected for image quality, an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the control is pressed (until the picture is taken, "RAW" will appear in the monitor image quality display). The original image
4 [+ NEF (RAW)] quality setting will be restored when you remove your finger from the shutter-release button or press the control again, canceling [+ NEF (RAW)].
· NEF (RAW) copies are recorded at the settings currently selected for [NEF (RAW) recording] in the photo shooting menu.
632 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
Description
b
[Framing grid display]
Press the control to display a framing grid in the viewfinder or monitor. Press the control again to turn the display off.
[Viewfinder ! virtual
horizon]
Press the control to view a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder. Press the control again to turn the display off.
O [MY MENU] Press the control to display "MY MENU".
[Access top 3 item in MY
MENU]
Press the control to jump to the top item in "MY MENU." Select this option for quick access to a frequently-used menu item.
K [Playback] Press the control to start playback.
J
[Choose image area]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the image area.
y
[Active D-Lighting]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust Active D-Lighting.
w [Metering]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose a metering option.
t
[Auto bracketing]
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots and the sub-command dial to select the bracketing increment or Active D-Lighting amount.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 633
Option
Description
$ [Multiple exposure]
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose the mode and the sub-command dial to choose the number of shots.
[HDR (high 2 dynamic
range)]
Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose the mode and the sub-command dial to choose HDR strength.
z [Exposure Press the control and rotate a command dial to delay mode] choose the shutter-release delay.
v
[1 step spd/ aperture]
Make adjustments to shutter speed and aperture in increments of 1 EV, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b1 [EV steps for exposure cntrl]. · In modes S and M, shutter speed can be
adjusted in increments of 1 EV by holding the control and rotating the main command dial. · In modes A and M, aperture can be adjusted in increments of 1 EV by holding the control and rotating the sub-command dial.
[Choose
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
w non-CPU lens choose a lens number saved using the [Non-
number]
CPU lens data] item in the setup menu.
[None]
The control has no effect.
634 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f4: OK Button
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the role assigned to the J button during still photography and playback.
Viewfinder Photography
Option
Description
K
[Select center focus point]
Pressing J selects the center focus point.
K [Highlight active focus point]
Pressing J highlights the active focus point.
[None]
Pressing J during shooting has no effect.
Live View
Option
Description
K
[Select center focus point]
Pressing J selects the center focus point.
p [Zoom on/off]
Press J to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point. Press J again to return to the previous display. To choose the zoom ratio, highlight [Zoom on/off] and press 2.
[None]
Pressing J during shooting has no effect.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 635
Playback Mode
Regardless of the option selected, pressing J when a movie is displayed full frame starts movie playback.
Option
Description
n
[Thumbnail on/off]
Press J to toggle between full-frame and 4-, 9-, or 72-frame thumbnail playback.
A histogram is displayed while the J button
o [View histograms] is pressed. The histogram display is available
in both full-frame and thumbnail playback.
Press J to zoom the display in on the area around the active focus point. Press J again
to return to the previous display.
p [Zoom on/off]
· To choose the zoom ratio, highlight [Zoom on/off] and press 2.
· Zoom is available in both full-frame and
thumbnail playback.
u [Choose slot and folder]
Press J to display the [Choose slot and folder] dialog, where you can then choose a slot and folder for playback.
636 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f5: Customize Command Dials
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Customize the operation of the main and sub-command dials.
Reverse Rotation
Reverse the direction of rotation of the command dials for selected operations.
· Highlight [Exposure compensation] or [Shutter speed/ aperture] and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U).
· Press J to save changes and exit.
Change Main/Sub
Reverse the roles of the main- and sub-command dials.
Option
Description
[Exposure setting]
If [On] is selected, the main command dial will control aperture and the sub-command dial shutter speed. If [On (Mode A)] is selected, the main command dial will be used to set aperture in mode A only.
[Autofocus setting]
If [On] is selected, AF-area mode can be selected by keeping the AF-mode button pressed and rotating the main command dial, autofocus mode by keeping the AF-mode button pressed and rotating the subcommand dial.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 637
Aperture Setting
Choose whether aperture can be adjusted using the aperture ring on CPU lenses in modes A and M.
Option
Description
[Sub-command dial]
Aperture can only be adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the main command dial if [On] is selected for [Change main/sub] > [Exposure setting]).
Aperture can be adjusted with the lens aperture ring.
[Aperture ring]
The camera aperture display shows aperture in increments of 1 EV, although fractions of 1 EV can still
be selected using the aperture ring.
· Regardless of the option selected for [Aperture setting], aperture for lenses not equipped with an aperture ring (type G and E lenses) must be adjusted using the sub-command dial.
· When using non-CPU lenses, supply lens data using the [NonCPU lens data] item in the setup menu (0 349) and adjust aperture using the lens aperture ring.
638 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Menus and Playback
Choose the roles played by the multi selector and command dials during playback and menu navigation.
Option
[On]
[On (image 2 review
excluded)] [Off]
Description
Playback: · The main command dial can be used to choose
the picture displayed during full-frame playback. The sub-command dial can be used to skip forward or back according to the option selected for [Sub-dial frame advance]. · During thumbnail playback, the main command dial can be used to highlight thumbnails and the sub-command dial to page up or down. Menus *: Use the main command dial to highlight menu items. Rotating the sub-command dial clockwise displays the sub-menu for the highlighted option. Rotating it counter-clockwise displays the previous menu.
As for [On] except that the command dials cannot be used for playback during image review.
Use the multi selector to choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback or to highlight pictures or menu items.
* The sub-command dial cannot be used to select highlighted items. To select highlighted items, press J or 2.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 639
Sub-Dial Frame Advance
Choose the number of frames that can be skipped by rotating the sub-command dial during full-frame playback. This option only takes effect when [On] or [On (image review excluded)] is selected for [Menus and playback].
Option [10 frames] [50 frames]
Description Skip forward or back 10 frames at a time. Skip forward or back 50 frames at a time.
c [Rating]
Skip to the next or previous pictures with the selected rating. To choose the rating, highlight [Rating] and press 2.
P [Protect] Skip to the next or previous protected picture.
C
[Still images only]
Skip to the next or previous photo.
1
[Movies only]
Skip to the next or previous movie.
u [Folder] Rotate the sub-command dial to select a folder.
640 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
f6: Release Button to Use Dial
G button U A Custom Settings menu Selecting [Yes] allows adjustments that are normally made by holding a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released. This ends when the button is pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, or the standby timer expires.
· [Release button to use dial] applies to the E, S (Q), BKT, c (Y), Q/g (U), X (T), W (Y), and AF mode buttons.
· [Release button to use dial] also applies to controls to which the following roles have been assigned using Custom Settings f3 or g2 [Custom controls]: [Choose image area], [Active D-Lighting], [Metering], [Auto bracketing], [Multiple exposure], [HDR (high dynamic range)], [Exposure delay mode], [1 step spd/aperture], and [Choose non-CPU lens number].
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 641
f7: Reverse Indicators
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether the exposure indicators in the viewfinder, control panel, and information display are displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right, or with positive values on the left and negative values on the right.
Option V
W
Description
The indicator is displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right.
The indicator is displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right.
f8: D Switch
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether rotating the power switch to D activates only the control panel backlight or also turns on the information display.
642 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
g: Movie
g1: Customize i Menu
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the items listed in the i menu displayed when the i button is pressed during movie recording. For information on customizing the i menu, see "Customizing the i Menu: Customize i Menu" (0 347).
Item
0
J [Choose image area]
129
G [Frame size and rate/Image quality]
264
N [Destination]
572
E [Exposure compensation]
175
9 [ISO sensitivity settings]
187
m [White balance]
195
h
[Set Picture Control]
243
y [Active D-Lighting] 254
w [Metering]
166
Item
0
g [Autofocus mode] 140
t [AF-area mode]
145
4 [Electronic VR]
580
H
[Microphone sensitivity]
581
5 [Attenuator]
582
6
[Frequency response]
582
7
[Wind noise reduction]
583
8
[Headphone volume]
583
w [Custom controls] 628
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 643
Item
0
W [Peaking highlights]
615
9 [Highlight display] 653
3
[Monitor brightness]
658
Z
[Bluetooth connection]
625
Item
0
U [Wi-Fi connection] 625
$
[Multi-selector power aperture]
644
%
[Multi selector exposure comp.]
644
Multi-Selector Power Aperture
Choose whether the multi selector can be used for power aperture. Select [Enable] to enable power aperture. Press 1 to widen the aperture, 3 to narrow the aperture.
Multi Selector Exposure Comp.
Choose whether the multi selector can be used to adjust exposure compensation. Selecting [Enable] allows exposure compensation to be set by pressing 1 or 3.
644 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
g2: Custom Controls
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the functions performed either by pressing camera controls or by pressing controls and rotating command dials during filming.
· Choose the roles played by the controls below. Highlight the desired control and press J.
Option 0 [Preview button] 2 [Fn button] ! [AE-L/AF-L button] V [AF-ON button] G [Shutter-release button]
· The roles that can be assigned to these controls are as follows:
Option t [Power aperture (open)] q [Power aperture (close)] i [Exposure compensation +] h [Exposure compensation -] b [Framing grid display]
02!VG 4 -------- -- 4 ------ 4 -------- -- 4 ------ 4 4 ------
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 645
Option J [Choose image area] y [Active D-Lighting] A [AF-ON] F [AF lock only] E [AE lock (Hold)] C [AE lock only] B [AE/AF lock] C [Take photos] 1 [Record movies] [None]
02!VG 4 4 ------ 4 4 ------ ----4 4 -- ----4 4 -- ----4 4 -- ----4 4 -- ----4 4 -- -------- 4 -------- 4 4 4 4 4--
· The following options are available:
Option
Description
[Power t aperture
(open)]
Aperture widens while the Pv button is pressed. Use in combination with Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Fn button] > [Power aperture (close)] for button-controlled aperture adjustment.
[Power q aperture
(close)]
Aperture narrows while the Fn button is pressed. Use in combination with Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Preview button] > [Power aperture (open)] for buttoncontrolled aperture adjustment.
646 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
Description
Exposure compensation increases while the Pv
[Exposure
button is pressed. Use in combination with
i compensation Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Fn
+]
button] > [Exposure compensation -] for
button-controlled exposure compensation.
Exposure compensation decreases while the Fn
h
[Exposure compensation -]
button is pressed. Use in combination with Custom Setting g2 [Custom controls] > [Preview button] > [Exposure compensation +] for button-controlled exposure
compensation.
b [Framing grid display]
Press the control to display a framing grid in the monitor. Press the control again to turn the display off.
Press the control and rotate a command dial to
J
[Choose image area]
choose the image area for movies. Note that the image area cannot be changed while recording
is in progress.
y [Active D-Lighting]
Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust Active D-Lighting for movies.
A [AF-ON]
Pressing the control initiates autofocus, duplicating the function of the AF-ON button.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 647
Option
Description
F [AF lock only] Focus locks while the control is pressed.
Exposure locks when the control is pressed. Exposure lock does not end when the shutter is E [AE lock (Hold)] released. Exposure remains locked until the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires.
C [AE lock only] Exposure locks while the control is pressed.
B [AE/AF lock]
Focus and exposure lock while the control is pressed.
Press the shutter-release button all the way C [Take photos] down to take a photograph with an aspect ratio
of 16:9.
648 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
Option
1
[Record movies]
[None]
Description
Press the shutter-release button halfway to start live view. If the focus mode selector is in the AF position, you can then press the shutter-release button halfway again to focus. To start movie recording, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. Press the shutter-release button again to end recording. · When [Record movies] is selected, the
shutter-release button cannot be used for any purpose other than recording movies. · To end live view, press the a button. · The shutter-release buttons on optional wireless remote controllers or remote cords function in the same way as the camera shutter-release button.
The control has no effect.
D Power Aperture · Power aperture is available only in modes A and M. · A 6 icon displayed in the monitor indicates that power aperture cannot
be used. · The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted.
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 649
g3: AF Speed
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose the focus speed for movie recording when using lenses compatible with this option.
Use [When to apply] to choose when the selected option applies.
Option D [Always]
E
[Only while recording]
Description
The selected option applies whenever the live view selector is rotated to 1.
The selected option applies only when recording is in progress. At other times, the focus speed is "+5", or in other words as fast possible.
650 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
D Compatible Lenses The value selected for [AF speed] applies only to AF-P lenses and the lenses listed below. All other lenses focus at maximum speed. · AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 815mm f/3.54.5E ED · AF-S DX NIKKOR 1680mm f/2.84E ED VR · AF-S DX NIKKOR 1855mm f/3.55.6G VR II · AF-S DX NIKKOR 18140mm f/3.55.6G ED VR · AF-S DX NIKKOR 18300mm f/3.56.3G ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 20mm f/1.8G ED · AF-S NIKKOR 24mm f/1.8G ED · AF-S NIKKOR 2470mm f/2.8E ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 28mm f/1.4E ED · AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.8G ED · AF-S DX NIKKOR 55200mm f/45.6G ED VR II · AF-S NIKKOR 58mm f/1.4G · AF-S NIKKOR 70200mm f/2.8E FL ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 105mm f/1.4E ED · AF-S NIKKOR 120300mm f/2.8E FL ED SR VR · AF-S NIKKOR 180400mm f/4E TC1.4 FL ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 200500mm f/5.6E ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 300mm f/4E PF ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8E FL ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4E FL ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/5.6E PF ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4E FL ED VR
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 651
g4: AF Tracking Sensitivity
G button U A Custom Settings menu Choose how quickly focus responds when your subject leaves the focus point or something passes between the subject and the camera during filming; the options available range from 1 to 7. · Choose [7 (Low)] to help maintain
focus on your original subject. · If the subject leaves the selected focus area when [1 (High)] is
selected, the camera will respond by quickly shifting focus to a new subject in the same area.
652 Menu Guide > A Custom Settings
g5: Highlight Display
G button U A Custom Settings menu
Choose whether shading is used to indicate highlights (bright areas of the frame) during movie recording.
Display Pattern
To enable the highlight display for movie recording, select [Pattern 1] or [Pattern 2].
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Highlight Display Threshold
Choose the brightness needed to trigger the movie highlight display. The lower the value, the greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as highlights. If [255] is selected, the highlight display will show only areas that are potentially overexposed.
D Highlight Display If both the highlight display and peaking highlights are enabled, only peaking highlights will be displayed in manual focus mode. To view the highlight display in manual focus mode, select [Off] for Custom Setting d11 [Peaking highlights] > [Peaking level].
Menu Guide > A Custom Settings 653
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
To view the setup menu, select the B tab in the camera menus.
The setup menu contains the following items:
Item
0
Item
0
[Format memory card]
656 [Clean image sensor]
673
[Save user settings] [Reset user settings] [Language] [Time zone and date] [Monitor brightness] [Monitor color balance] [Virtual horizon] [Information display] [AF fine-tuning options] [Non-CPU lens data]
657 [Lock mirror up for 657 cleaning] *
674
657 [Image Dust Off ref photo] 675
658 [Pixel mapping]
679
658 [Image comment]
681
659 [Copyright information] 682
661 [Beep options]
684
662 [Touch controls]
686
663 [HDMI]
686
672 [Location data]
687
654 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Item
0
Item
0
[Wireless remote (WR) options] [Assign remote (WR) Fn button] [Airplane mode] [Connect to smart device] [Connect to PC]
688 [Conformity marking]
700
[Battery info]
701
691 [Slot empty release lock] 702
[Save/load menu settings] 703
691 [Reset all settings]
708
692 [Firmware version]
708
696
[Wireless transmitter (WT-7)]
700
* Not available at battery levels of J or below.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 655
Format Memory Card
G button U B setup menu Format memory cards. To begin formatting, choose a memory card slot and select [Yes]. Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card. Before formatting, be sure to make backup copies as required. D During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards until the message [Formatting memory card.] clears from the display.
A Two-Button Format · Press and hold the O (Q) and S (Q) buttons simultaneously for over
two seconds until C starts to flash in the control panel and viewfinder and a flashing memory card indicator appears in the control panel; you can then press the two buttons (O/Q and S/Q) again to format the current memory card. · If two memory cards are inserted, the flashing indicator will show the card selected for formatting. To select a different card, rotate the main command dial while the C indicator is flashing. · Do not turn the camera off or remove the battery or memory card during formatting.
656 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Save User Settings
G button U B setup menu
Frequently-used combinations of settings can be assigned to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial (0 115).
Reset User Settings
G button U B setup menu
Reset settings for U1 and U2 to default values (0 118).
Language
G button U B setup menu
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The languages available vary with the country or region in which the camera was originally purchased.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 657
Time Zone and Date
G button U B setup menu
Change time zones and set the camera clock. We recommend that the camera clock be adjusted regularly.
Option
Description
[Time zone]
Choose a time zone. [Date and time] is automatically set to the time in the new time zone.
[Date and Set the camera clock to the time in the selected [Time time] zone].
[Date format]
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are displayed.
[Daylight saving time]
Select [On] to turn daylight saving time on, [Off] to turn it off. Selecting [On] automatically advances the clock one hour. The default setting is [Off].
If the clock is reset, a B icon will flash in the control panel and a flashing t indicator will appear in the information display.
Monitor Brightness
G button U B setup menu
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness. Choose higher values for increased brightness, lower values for reduced brightness.
658 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Monitor Color Balance
G button U B setup menu Adjust monitor color balance to your taste. · Color balance is adjusted using the
multi selector. Press 1, 3, 4, or 2 to adjust color balance as shown below. Press J to save changes.
1 Increase green 2 Increase amber 3 Increase magenta 4 Increase blue
· Monitor color balance applies only to menus, playback, and the view through the lens displayed during live view; pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
· The reference image is either the last picture taken or, in playback mode, the picture last displayed. If the memory card contains no pictures, an empty frame will be displayed instead.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 659
· To choose a different image, press the W (Y) button. Highlight the desired picture and press J to select it as the reference image.
· To view the highlighted image full frame, press and hold X (T).
660 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Virtual Horizon
G button U B setup menu
Display roll and pitch information based on information from the camera tilt sensor. · If the camera is tilted neither left nor right, the roll reference
line will turn green. If the camera is tilted neither forward nor back, the dot (I) in the center of the display will turn green. · Each division is equivalent to 5°.
Camera level
Camera tilted left or Camera tilted forward
right
or back
D Tilting the Camera The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure tilt, the amount of tilt will not be displayed.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 661
Information Display
G button U B setup menu
Adjust the appearance of the information display according to lighting conditions.
Dark on light
Light on dark
Option [Auto]
[Manual]
Description
The camera adjusts the color of the lettering in the information display to make it easier to read. Black is used in bright locations, a dim white in dark locations.
Manually choose the color of the lettering. w [Dark on light]: To make the display easier to read in bright locations, the monitor lights and the lettering is displayed in black. x [Light on dark]: To make the display easier to read in dark locations, the monitor dims and the lettering is displayed in white.
662 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
AF Fine-Tuning Options
G button U B setup menu
Fine-tune focus for the current lens. · Use only as required. · We recommend that you perform fine-
tuning at a focus distance you use frequently. If you perform fine-tuning at a short focus distance, for example, you may find it less effective at longer distances.
Option
Description
[AF fine- · [On]: Turn AF fine-tuning on. tune on/off] · [Off]: Turn AF fine-tuning off.
[Fine-tune and save
lens]
Fine-tune focus for the current CPU lens; separate focus positions can be selected for viewfinder and live view photography (0 665). · The camera can store values for up to 20 lens types. · The camera will not save fine-tuning values for non-CPU
lenses. · New values overwrite existing values. Separate values
can be saved for lenses with teleconverters attached, even if values already exist for the same lenses without teleconverters.
[Default]
Choose the AF tuning values used for viewfinder and live view photography with lenses for which no values have been saved using [Fine-tune and save lens] (0 667).
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 663
Option
[List saved values]
Description
List values saved using [Finetune and save lens]. Highlighting a lens in the list and pressing 2 displays a [Choose lens number] dialog. · The [Choose lens number]
dialog is used to choose the lens identifier. Press 1 or 3 to choose an identifier and press J to save changes and exit. While [Fine-tune and save lens] stores only one set of values for each lens type, choosing different identifiers lets you save separate fine-tuning values for two or more lenses of the same type, for example by choosing an identifier that is the same as the lens serial number.
D Deleting Saved Values To delete values saved using [Fine-tune and save lens], highlight the desired lens in the [List saved values] list and press O (Q).
664 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Creating and Saving Fine-Tuning Values
1 Attach the lens to the camera.
2 Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu,
then highlight [Fine-tune and save lens] and press 2.
3 Highlight [For viewfinder photography] or [For
live view photography] and press 2.
An AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed. The options displayed vary with whether the attached lens is a zoom lens or has a fixed focal-length.
Zoom lens
Fixed focal-length lens
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 665
4 Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus.
· Choose from values between +20 and -20. · The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected
value by j. · If a zoom lens is attached, you can choose separate fine-
tuning values for maximum angle (WIDE) and maximum zoom (TELE). Use 1 and 3 to choose between the two. · The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point from the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point.
5 Press J to save the new value.
A Auto AF Fine-Tuning Use auto AF fine-tuning to fine-tune autofocus automatically while viewing the results in the live view display. Pressing the W (Y) button in the [For viewfinder photography] display in Step 3 takes you Step 2 of "Auto AF Fine-Tuning" (0 668).
666 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Choosing a Default Fine-Tuning Value
1 Select [AF fine-tuning options] in the setup menu,
then highlight [Default] and press 2.
2 Highlight [For viewfinder photography] or [For
live view photography] and press 2.
An AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.
3 Press 4 or 2 to fine-tune autofocus.
· Choose from values between +20 and -20. · The current value is shown by g, the previously-selected
value by j. · The larger the fine-tuning value, the farther the focal point
from the lens; the smaller the value, the closer the focal point.
4 Press J to save the new value.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 667
Auto AF Fine-Tuning
Auto AF fine-tuning is performed as described below.
1 Rotate the live view selector to
C and press the a button.
2 Press the AF-mode and movie-record buttons
simultaneously and keep them pressed for over two seconds.
668 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Zoom Lenses · The camera will display options for
fine-tuning autofocus separately at maximum angle and maximum zoom.
· Highlight [WIDE] (maximum angle) or [TELE] (maximum zoom) and press J; the camera will select the center focus point and the auto AF fine-tuning dialog will be displayed.
Fixed Focal-Length Lenses The camera will select the center focus point and the auto AF finetuning dialog will be displayed.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 669
3 Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
· If you are using a zoom lens, rotate the zoom ring all the way to select either the maximum angle or maximum zoom before focusing.
· Before focusing, mount the camera on a tripod and aim the camera at a flat, high-contrast subject parallel to the camera focal plane.
· Note that auto AF fine-tuning works best at maximum aperture.
· Zoom in on the view through the lens to confirm that the subject is in focus. Focus can be adjusted manually if necessary.
· Note that live view autofocus and auto AF fine-tuning may not function in dark surroundings.
670 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
4 Press J.
· The AF fine-tuning value for the current lens will be added to the [List saved values] list (CPU lenses only).
· If auto fine-tuning is successful, AF fine-tuning will be enabled and the [AF fine-tune on/off] item will change to [On].
· If you are using a zoom lens, after completing AF finetuning for either the maximum angle or maximum zoom, you will need to repeat the process for the remaining item. Press the X (T) button and repeat Steps 2 to 4.
· New values overwrite existing values.
5 Press J to save changes and exit.
D If Auto Fine-Tuning Fails If auto fine-tuning fails, a message will be displayed. Press X (T) to attempt auto fine-tuning again, or press J to exit without performing AF fine-tuning. Pressing X (T) returns you to Step 2.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 671
Non-CPU Lens Data
G button U B setup menu
Record data for non-CPU lenses. Recording the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses allows them to be used with some functions normally reserved for CPU lenses.
Option
Description
[Lens number] Choose a number to identify the lens.
[Focal length (mm)]
Enter the focal length.
[Maximum aperture]
Enter the maximum aperture.
672 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Clean Image Sensor
G button U B setup menu
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body cap is removed may adhere to the low-pass filter and affect your photographs. The "clean image sensor" option vibrates the sensor to remove dust.
Option [Clean now]
[Clean at startup/ shutdown]
Description
Perform image sensor cleaning immediately.
· [Clean at startup]: The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned on.
· [Clean at shutdown]: The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each time the camera is turned off.
· [Clean at startup & shutdown]: The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at shutdown.
· [Cleaning off]: Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 673
Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning
G button U B setup menu Use [Lock mirror up for cleaning] to lock the mirror up so that dust that cannot be removed using the "clean image sensor" option can be removed manually. Note, however, that because the low-pass filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged, we recommend that manual cleaning be performed only by a Nikon-authorized service representative. For information on
cleaning the low-pass filter, see "Manual Cleaning" (0 827).
674 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Image Dust Off Ref Photo
G button U B setup menu Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D. Image Dust Off processes NEF (RAW) images to mitigate effects caused by dust adhering to the low-pass filter in front of the camera image sensor. For more information, refer to Capture NX-D online help.
Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data
1 Choose a start option.
· Highlight [Start] and press J to immediately display the [Image Dust Off ref photo] dialog.
· Highlight [Clean sensor and then start] and press J to clean the image sensor before starting. The [Image Dust Off ref photo] dialog will be displayed when image sensor cleaning is complete.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 675
· "F" will appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays.
· To exit without acquiring Image Dust Off reference data, press G.
2 With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches)
from a well-lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the display and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
· In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity.
· In manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
676 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
3 Press the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data.
· The monitor turns off when the shutter-release button is pressed.
· If the reference object is too bright or too dark, the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data and a message will be displayed and the camera will return to the display shown in Step 1. Choose another reference object and press the shutterrelease button again.
D Image Sensor Cleaning Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed cannot be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select [Clean sensor and then start] only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not be used with existing photographs.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 677
D Acquiring Image Dust Off Reference Data · [Image Dust Off ref photo] is not available when a non-CPU lens is
mounted on the camera. · An FX-format CPU lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is
recommended. · When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in. · The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with
different lenses or at different apertures. · Reference images cannot be viewed using computer imaging software. · A grid pattern is displayed when reference
images are viewed on the camera.
678 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Pixel Mapping
G button U B setup menu
Pixel mapping checks and optimizes camera image sensor. If you notice unexpected bright spots appearing in pictures taken with the camera, perform pixel mapping as described below. · Use a fully-charged battery to prevent unexpected loss of
power. · Pixel mapping is performed with the lens cap (front cap)
attached and the camera viewfinder eyepiece covered by the supplied eyepiece cap.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 679
1 Select [Pixel mapping] in the setup menu.
Turn the camera on, press the G button, and select [Pixel mapping] in the setup menu.
2 Select [Start].
Pixel mapping will start. 1 appears in the control panel while the operation is in progress.
3 Turn the camera off when pixel mapping is
complete.
D Pixel Mapping · Do not attempt to operate the camera while pixel mapping is in
progress. Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source. · Pixel mapping may not be available if the camera's internal temperature is elevated.
680 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Image Comment
G button U B setup menu
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken. Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D.
Input Comment
Input a comment of up to 36 characters. Highlight [Input comment] and press 2 to display a text-entry dialog. For information on text entry, see "Text Entry" (0 61).
Attach Comment
To attach the comment to subsequent photographs, highlight [Attach comment], press 2, and confirm that a check (M) appears in the adjacent check box. Press J to save changes and exit; the comment will be attached to all subsequent photographs.
D Photo Info Comments can be viewed on the shooting data page in the photo information display.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 681
Copyright Information
G button U B setup menu Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken. Copyright information can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D.
Entering the Names of the Photographer and Copyright Holder
Enter the names of the photographer (maximum 36 characters) and copyright holder (maximum 54 characters). Highlight [Artist] or [Copyright] and press 2 to display a text-entry dialog. For information on text entry, see "Text Entry" (0 61).
682 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Attach Copyright Information
To attach copyright information to subsequent photographs, highlight [Attach copyright information], press 2, and confirm that a check (M) appears in the adjacent check box. Press J to save changes and exit; copyright information will be attached to all subsequent photographs.
D Copyright Information · To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that [Attach copyright information] is not selected before lending or transferring the camera to another person. You will also need to make sure that the artist and copyright fields are blank. · Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the [Copyright information] option. D Photo Info Copyright information is included in the shooting data shown in the photo information display.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 683
Beep Options
G button U B setup menu
Beep On/Off
Turn the beep speaker on or off. · If [On] is selected for [Beep on/off], beeps sound when:
- The self-timer is in operation - The shutter-release button is pressed for a second time during mirror-up photography - Interval-timer photography, time-lapse movie recording, or focus shift ends - The camera focuses--note that a beep will not sound when the camera focuses if [Release] is selected for Custom Setting a2 [AF-S priority selection], if AF-C is selected for autofocus mode, or if AF-A is selected and the camera focuses using AF-C - The touch screen is used - The shutter-release button is pressed with a write-protected memory card inserted in the camera
684 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
· Select [Off (touch controls only)] to disable the beep during keyboard entry while enabling it for other purposes.
· Note that regardless of the option selected, a beep will not sound when the camera focuses during movie recording or in quiet-shutter release modes (modes Q and QC) or when [On] is selected for [Silent live view photography].
Volume
Adjust beep volume.
Pitch
Choose the pitch of the beep from [High] and [Low].
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 685
Touch Controls
G button U B setup menu
Adjust settings for monitor touch controls.
Enable/Disable Touch Controls
Enable or disable touch-screen controls. Select [Playback only] to enable touch-screen controls in playback mode only.
Full-Frame Playback Flicks
Choose whether the next image in full-frame playback is displayed by flicking left or by flicking right.
Option S [LeftURight] T [LeftVRight]
Description Flick left to display the next picture. Flick right to display the next picture.
HDMI
G button U B setup menu
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI devices (0 396).
686 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Location Data
G button U B setup menu
Adjust settings for use when the camera is connected to a device that provides location data, namely a GPS receiver or a smart device running the SnapBridge app. For more information on SnapBridge, see the app's online help.
Option
[Standby timer]
[Position] [Set clock
from satellite]
Description If [Enable] is selected when a GPS receiver is connected, the exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the period specified using Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer]. The drain on the battery is reduced. View the location data supplied by the GPS receiver or smart device. The items displayed vary with the source.
Select [Yes] to synchronize the camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 687
Wireless Remote (WR) Options
G button U B setup menu Adjust status LED and link mode settings for optional WR-R10 wireless remote controllers. You can also choose a link mode for connection to optional radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting. D The WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller Be sure the firmware for the WR-R10 has been updated to the latest version (version 3.0 or later). For information on firmware updates, see the Nikon website for your area.
LED Lamp
Enable or disable the status LEDs on a WR-R10 wireless remote controller mounted on the camera. For more information, see the documentation supplied with the wireless remote controller.
688 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Link Mode
Choose a link mode for WR-R10 wireless remote controllers mounted on other cameras or radio-controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting. Be sure that the same mode is selected for the other devices.
Option
Description
[Pairing]
The camera connects only to devices with which it has previously been paired. Press the pairing button on the WR-R10 wireless remote controller connected to the camera to pair it with other devices. · As camera will not communicate with devices with
which it has not been paired, this option can be used to prevent signal interference from other devices in the vicinity. · Given that each device must be paired separately, however, PIN is recommended when connecting to a large number of devices.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 689
Option [PIN]
Description
Communication is shared among all devices with the same four-digit PIN. You can enter any four-digit PIN of your choice. · Press 4 or 2 to highlight
digits and press 1 or 3 to change. Press J to enter and display the selected PIN. · This option is a good choice for photography featuring a large number of remote devices. · If there are multiple cameras present that share the same PIN, the flash units will be under the sole control of the camera that connects first (the LEDs on the WR-R10 units connected to the affected cameras will blink).
· Regardless of the option selected for [Link mode], signals from paired wireless remote controllers will always be received by the WR-R10. Users of the WR-1 wireless remote controller will need to select pairing as the WR-1 link mode.
690 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Assign Remote (WR) Fn Button
G button U B setup menu
Choose the role played by the Fn button on optional wireless remote controllers equipped with an Fn button. See Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls] for more information.
Option A [AF-ON]
Option h [c Disable/enable]
F [AF lock only]
q [Preview]
D [AE lock (Reset on release)]
% [Preview (Lv max. aperture)]
C [AE lock only] B [AE/AF lock]
4 [+ NEF (RAW)] a [Live view] *
r [FV lock]
[None]
* Performs the same function as the camera a button.
Airplane Mode
G button U B setup menu
Select [Enable] to disable the camera's built-in Bluetooth and Wi-Fi functions. · The wireless functions of optional peripheral devices
connected to the camera can only be disabled by disconnecting the devices.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 691
Connect to Smart Device
G button U B setup menu
Adjust settings for connection to a smart device.
Pairing (Bluetooth)
Pair with or connect to smart devices using Bluetooth.
Option
Description
[Start pairing] Pair the camera with a smart device (0 415).
[Paired devices]
List paired smart devices or switch from one device to another.
[Bluetooth connection]
Select [Enable] to enable Bluetooth.
692 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Select to Send (Bluetooth)
Select pictures for upload to a smart device or choose whether to mark pictures for upload as they are taken. Upload begins immediately when a connection is established.
Option
Description
If [On] is selected, photos will be marked for upload to
a smart device as they are taken. Regardless of the
[Auto select to send]
option selected with the camera, photos are uploaded in JPEG format at size of 2 megapixels. Photos taken during filming will not be uploaded automatically.
Photos taken during filming must be selected for
upload manually.
[Manual select to send]
Mark selected pictures for upload to a smart device.
[Deselect all] Remove transfer marking from all images.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 693
Wi-Fi Connection
Connect to smart devices via Wi-Fi.
Establish Wi-Fi Connection
Initiate a Wi-Fi connection. · The camera SSID and password will be displayed. To connect,
select the camera SSID and enter the password on the smart device (0 406). · Once a connection is established, this option will change to [Close Wi-Fi connection]. · Select [Close Wi-Fi connection] to end the connection when desired.
694 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Wi-Fi Connection Settings
Access the following Wi-Fi settings:
Option
Description
[SSID]
Set the camera SSID.
[Authentication/ encryption]
Choose [OPEN] or [WPA2-PSK-AES].
[Password] Change the camera password.
[Channel]
Choose a channel. · Select [Auto] to have the camera choose the
channel automatically. · Select [Manual] to choose the channel manually.
[Current settings]
View current Wi-Fi settings.
[Reset connection
settings]
Select [Yes] to reset Wi-Fi settings to default values.
Send While Off
If [On] is selected, upload of images to smart devices connected via Bluetooth will continue even when the camera is off.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 695
Connect to PC
G button U B setup menu
Adjust settings for connection to computers using the camera's built-in Wi-Fi.
Wi-Fi Connection
Select [Enable] to connect using the settings currently selected for [Network settings].
Network Settings
Select [Create profile] to create a new network profile (0 433, 439). · If more than one profile already exists, you can press J to
select a profile from a list. · To edit an existing profile, highlight it and press 2. The
following options will be displayed:
Option [General]
Description
· [Profile name]: Rename the profile. By default, the profile name is the same as the network SSID.
· [Password protection]: Select [On] to require that a password be entered before the profile can be changed. To change the password, highlight [On] and press 2.
696 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Option [Wireless] [TCP/IP]
Description
Infrastructure connections: Adjust settings to match those used on the network. · [SSID]: Enter the network SSID. · [Channel]: The channel is selected automatically. · [Authentication/encryption]: Choose from [OPEN]
and [WPA2-PSK-AES]. · [Password]: Enter the network password. Ad-hoc connections: Choose the settings used for connection to the camera. · [SSID]: Enter the camera SSID. · [Channel]: Select [Auto] for automatic channel
selection or [Manual] to choose the channel manually. · [Authentication/encryption]: Choose from [OPEN]
and [WPA2-PSK-AES]. · [Password]: Choose the password used for connection
to the camera when [WPA2-PSK-AES] is selected for [Authentication/encryption].
Enter TCP/IP information for infrastructure connections. An IP address is required. · If [Enable] is selected for [Obtain automatically], the
IP address and sub-net mask will be acquired via a DHCP server or automatic IP addressing. · Select [Disable] manually to enter the IP address ([Address]) and sub-net mask ([Mask]).
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 697
Options
Adjust upload settings.
Auto Send
Select [On] to upload new photos as they are taken. · Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the
memory card; be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera. · Movies, together with any photos taken during filming, are
not uploaded automatically when recording is complete but must instead be uploaded from the playback display (0 447).
Delete After Send
Select [Yes] to delete photographs from the camera memory card automatically once upload is complete. · Files marked for transfer before [Yes] is selected are not
deleted. · Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations.
698 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Send File As
When uploading NEF+JPEG images, choose whether to upload both the NEF (RAW) and JPEG files or only the JPEG copy.
Deselect All?
Select [Yes] to remove transfer marking from all images. Upload of images with a "sending" icon will immediately be terminated.
MAC Address
Display the MAC address.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 699
Wireless Transmitter (WT-7)
G button U B setup menu Adjust settings for connection to computers or ftp servers via wireless or Ethernet networks using an optional WT-7 wireless transmitter. This item is available only when an optional WT-7 wireless transmitter is connected. · These settings take effect when the WT-7 is connected and
turned on, in which case the options selected for [Connect to smart device] and [Connect to PC] are automatically disabled. · Information on [Wireless transmitter] can be found below; for information on [Choose hardware], [Network settings], and [Options], see the manual provided with the WT-7.
Wireless Transmitter
Select [Use] to enable WT-7 when it is connected to the camera.
Conformity Marking
G button U B setup menu View some of the standards with which the camera complies.
700 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Battery Info
View information on the battery currently inserted in the camera.
G button U B setup menu
Option [Charge] [No. of
shots]
[Battery age]
Description
The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
The number of times the battery has been used to release the shutter since it was last charged.
A five-level display showing battery age. · A value of "0" (k) indicates that battery performance is
unimpaired. · A value of "4" (l) indicates that the battery has reached
the end of its charging life. Replace the battery.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 701
D Number of Shots [No. of shots] shows the number of times the shutter has been released. Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph, for example when measuring preset white balance.
D Charging Batteries at Low Temperatures Batteries in general exhibit a drop in capacity at low ambient temperatures. Even fresh batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary increase from "0" to "1" in the value shown for [Battery age], but the display will return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
Slot Empty Release Lock
G button U B setup menu
Choose whether the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted in the camera.
Option
a
[Release locked]
b
[Enable release]
Description
The shutter cannot be released when no memory card is inserted.
The shutter can be released with no memory card inserted. No pictures will be recorded; during playback, the camera displays "Demo".
702 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Save/Load Menu Settings
G button U B setup menu Save current camera menu settings to a memory card. You can also load saved settings, allowing menu settings to be shared among cameras of the same model. · If two memory cards are inserted, the settings will be saved to
the card in Slot 1. · The following settings are saved:
Settings that can be saved and loaded [Playback display options] [Image review]
PLAYBACK MENU [After delete] [Rotate tall]
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 703
Settings that can be saved and loaded
[File naming]
[Role played by card in Slot 2]
[Image area]
[Image quality]
[Image size]
[NEF (RAW) recording]
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are
saved as [Auto])
PHOTO
[Color space]
SHOOTING MENU [Active D-Lighting]
[Long exposure NR]
[High ISO NR]
[Vignette control]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Auto distortion control]
[Flicker reduction]
[Flash control]
[Auto bracketing]
[Silent live view photography]
704 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Settings that can be saved and loaded
[File naming]
[Destination]
[Image area]
[Frame size/frame rate]
[Movie quality]
[Movie file type]
[ISO sensitivity settings]
[White balance]
[Set Picture Control] (Custom Picture Controls are
saved as [Auto])
MOVIE SHOOTING [Active D-Lighting]
MENU
[High ISO NR]
[Diffraction compensation]
[Flicker reduction]
[Electronic VR]
[Microphone sensitivity]
[Attenuator]
[Frequency response]
[Wind noise reduction]
[Headphone volume]
[Timecode] (excepting [Timecode origin])
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
All Custom Settings
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 705
Settings that can be saved and loaded [Save user settings] [Language] [Time zone and date] (excepting [Date and time]) [Information display] [Non-CPU lens data] [Clean image sensor] [Image comment]
SETUP MENU [Copyright information] [Beep options] [Touch controls] [HDMI] [Location data] (excepting [Position]) [Wireless remote (WR) options] [Assign remote (WR) Fn button] [Slot empty release lock]
706 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
Save Menu Settings
Save settings to the memory card. If the card is full, an error will be displayed and settings will not be saved. Saved settings can only be used with other cameras of the same model.
Load Menu Settings
Load saved settings from the memory card. Note that [Load Menu Settings] is available only when a memory card containing saved settings is inserted. D Saved Settings
Settings are saved to files named "NCSET***". "***" is an identifier that varies from camera to camera. The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed.
Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu 707
Reset All Settings
G button U B setup menu
Reset all settings except [Language] and [Time zone and date] to their default values. Copyright information and other usergenerated entries are also reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
We recommend that you save settings using the [Save/load menu settings] item in the setup menu before performing a reset.
Firmware Version
G button U B setup menu
View the current camera firmware version.
708 Menu Guide > B The Setup Menu
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies
To view the retouch menu, select the N tab in the camera menus.
The items in the retouch menu are used to trim or retouch existing pictures.
· The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera.
· Retouched copies are saved to new files, separate from the original pictures.
· The retouch menu contains the following items:
Item
0
Item
0
7
[NEF (RAW) processing]
713
k [Trim]
719
8 [Resize]
720
i [D-Lighting]
726
% [Quick retouch]
727
j [Red-eye correction] 728
Z [Straighten]
729
a [Distortion control] 730
e [Perspective control] 732
l [Monochrome]
733
o [Image overlay] *
734
9 [Trim movie]
743
* Not displayed when [Retouch] is selected in the playback i menu.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 709
Creating Retouched Copies
1 Select an item in the retouch
menu. Press 1 or 3 to highlight an item, 2
to select.
2 Select a picture.
· Highlight a picture using the multi selector.
· To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X (T) button.
· Press J to select the highlighted picture.
3 Select retouch options.
· For more information, see the section for the selected item. · To exit without creating a retouched copy, press G. The
retouch menu will be displayed.
710 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
4 Create a retouched copy.
· Press J to create a retouched copy. · Retouched copies are indicated by a
p icon.
D Retouching the Current Image To create a retouched copy of the current image, press i and select [Retouch]. D Retouch · The camera may not be able to display or retouch images that were
taken or retouched using other cameras or that have been retouched on a computer. · If no actions are performed for a brief period, the display will turn off and any unsaved changes will be lost. To increase the time the display remains on, choose a longer menu display time using Custom Setting c4 [Monitor off delay] > [Menus]. D Retouching Copies · Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch options, although multiple edits may result in reduced image quality or faded colors. · With the exception of [Trim movie], each option can be applied only once. · Some options may be unavailable depending on the options used to create the copy. · Options that cannot be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 711
D Image Quality · Copies created from NEF (RAW) images are saved at an [Image quality]
of [JPEG finem]. · Copies created from JPEG images are the same quality as the original. · In the case of images recorded to the same memory card at image
quality settings of NEF + JPEG, only the NEF (RAW) image will be retouched. D Image Size Except in the case of copies created with [NEF (RAW) processing], [Trim], and [Resize], copies are the same size as the original.
712 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
NEF (RAW) Processing: Creating JPEG Copies of NEF (RAW) Images Without a Computer
G button U N retouch menu "NEF (RAW) processing" is used to save NEF (RAW) photos in other formats, such as JPEG. JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photos can be created on the camera as described below.
1 Select [NEF (RAW) processing]
in the retouch menu.
Highlight [NEF (RAW) processing] and press 2.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 713
2 Choose a destination.
· If two memory cards are inserted, you can choose a destination for the retouched copies by highlighting [Choose destination] and pressing 2.
· [Choose destination] is not available when only one memory card is inserted. Proceed to Step 3.
· Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot and press J.
714 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
3 Choose how images are
selected.
Option
[Select image(s)]
[Select date]
[Select folder]
Description
Create JPEG copies of selected NEF (RAW) images. Multiple NEF (RAW) images can be selected.
Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images taken on selected dates.
Create JPEG copies of all the NEF (RAW) images in a selected folder.
If you chose [Select image(s)], proceed to Step 5.
4 Select the source slot.
· Highlight the slot with the card containing the NEF (RAW) images and press 2.
· You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 715
5 Select photographs.
If you chose [Select image(s)]: · Highlight images using the multi
selector. · To view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X (T) button. · To select the highlighted image, press the W (Y) button. Selected images are indicated by a L icon. To deselect the current picture, press the W (Y) button again; the L will no longer be displayed. All images will be processed using the same settings. · Press J to save changes.
If you chose [Select date]: · Highlight dates using the multi
selector and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U). · All images taken on dates marked with a check (M) will be processed using the same settings. · Press J to save changes.
If you chose [Select folder]: Highlight a folder and press J to select; all images in the selected folder will be processed using the same settings.
716 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
6 Choose settings for the JPEG copies.
· The settings in effect when the photograph was taken appear below a preview.
· To use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken, if applicable, select [Original].
6
1
7
2
8
3
9
4
10
5
1 Image quality (0 134) 2 Image size (0 137) 3 White balance (0 195)
4 Exposure compensation (0 175)
5 Set Picture Control (0 243)
6 High ISO NR (0 557) 7 Color space (0 554) 8 Vignette control (0 558) 9 Active D-Lighting (0 254) 10 Diffraction compensation
(0 559)
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 717
7 Copy the photographs.
· Highlight [EXE] and press J to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph.
· If multiple photos are selected, a confirmation dialog will be displayed after you highlight [EXE] and press J; highlight [Yes] and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos.
· To exit without copying the photographs, press the G button.
D NEF (RAW) Processing · NEF (RAW) processing is available only with NEF (RAW) images created
with this camera. Images in other formats and NEF (RAW) images taken with other cameras or Camera Control Pro 2 cannot be selected. · [Exposure compensation] can only be set to values between -2 and +2 EV.
718 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Trim
G button U N retouch menu
Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph. The photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown in yellow; create a cropped copy as described below.
To
Description
Size the crop Press X (T) or W (Y) to choose the crop size.
To change the crop aspect ratio
Rotate the main command dial.
To position the crop
Use the multi selector.
To create a cropped copy
Press J to save the current crop as a separate file.
D Cropped Images · Depending on the size of the cropped copy, playback zoom may not be
available when cropped copies are displayed. · The crop size appears at upper left in the crop
display. The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 719
Resize
G button U N retouch menu
Create small copies of selected photographs. If two memory cards are inserted, you can choose the card used to store the resized copies.
Resizing Multiple Images
If you accessed the retouch menu via the G button, you can resize multiple selected images.
1 Select [Resize] in the retouch
menu.
Highlight [Resize] and press 2.
720 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
2 Choose a destination.
· If two memory cards are inserted, you can choose a destination for the retouched copies by highlighting [Choose destination] and pressing 2.
· [Choose destination] is not available when only one memory card is inserted. Proceed to Step 3.
· Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot and press J.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 721
3 Choose a size.
· Highlight [Choose size] and press 2.
· Highlight the desired size (length in pixels) using 1 and 3 and press J.
722 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
4 Choose how images are
selected.
Option
[Select image(s)]
[Select date] [Select folder]
Description
Resize selected images. Multiple images can be selected.
Resize all the images taken on selected dates.
Resize all the images in a selected folder.
If you chose [Select image(s)], proceed to Step 6.
5 Select the source slot.
· Highlight the slot with the card containing the images and press 2.
· You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 723
6 Choose pictures.
If you chose [Select image(s)]: · Highlight pictures using the multi
selector. · To view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X (T) button. · To select the highlighted image, press the W (Y) button. Selected pictures are marked by a 8 icon. To deselect the highlighted picture, press the W (Y) button again; the 8 icon will no longer be displayed. The selected pictures will all be copied at the size selected in Step 3. · Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
724 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
If you chose [Select date]: · Highlight dates using the multi
selector and press 2 to select (M) or deselect (U). · All images taken on dates marked with a check (M) will be copied at the size selected in Step 3. · Press J to proceed after selecting the desired dates. If you chose [Select folder]: · Highlight a folder and press J to select; all images in the selected folder will be copied at the size selected in Step 3.
7 Save the resized copies.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press J to save the resized copies.
D Resize Depending on the size of the resized copy, playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 725
D-Lighting
G button U N retouch menu
D-Lighting brightens shadows. It is ideal for dark or backlit photographs.
Before
After
The edit display shows before and after images. · Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. · Press J to save the retouched copy.
726 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Quick Retouch
G button U N retouch menu
Create a copy with enhanced colors and contrast.
The camera uses D-Lighting to brighten shadows and enhance contrast and color saturation (vividness). · Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be previewed in the edit display. · Press J to save the retouched copy.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 727
Red-Eye Correction
G button U N retouch menu Correct "red-eye" caused by light from the flash reflecting from the retinas of portrait subjects. · Red-eye correction is available only with photographs taken
using a flash. · Red-eye that cannot be detected by the camera will not be
corrected. · Press J to save the retouched copy. D Red-Eye Correction
· Note the following: - Red-eye correction may not always produce the expected results. - In very rare circumstances, red-eye correction may be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red-eye.
· Check the preview thoroughly before proceeding.
728 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Straighten
G button U N retouch menu
Rotate pictures by up to ±5° in increments of approximately 0.25°. · The effect can be previewed in the edit
display. · The greater the rotation, the more will
be trimmed from the edges. · Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of straightening
performed. · Press J to save the retouched copy.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 729
Distortion Control
G button U N retouch menu Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion; this can reduce barrel distortion in pictures taken with wideangle lenses or pin-cushion distortion in pictures taken with telephoto lenses. Select [Auto] to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector. Select [Manual] to reduce distortion manually. · The effect can be previewed in the edit display. · [Auto] is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D
lenses. Note, however, that some lenses of these types, including PC and fisheyes lenses, cannot be used. Results are not guaranteed with other lenses.
730 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
· Note that [Manual] must be used with copies created using the [Auto] option and with photos taken using the [Auto distortion control] option in the photo shooting menu. Manual distortion control cannot be further applied to copies created using [Manual].
· Press 4 to reduce pincushion distortion, 2 to reduce barrel distortion.
· Press J to save the retouched copy. D Distortion Control
· Note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out.
· Distortion control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at image areas other than [DX (24×16)].
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 731
Perspective Control
G button U N retouch menu
Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective in photos taken looking up from the base of a tall object. · The effect can be previewed in the edit
display. · Note that greater amounts of
perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out. · Use the multi selector (1, 3, 4, or 2) to adjust perspective. · Press J to save the retouched copy.
Before
After
732 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Monochrome
G button U N retouch menu
Copy photographs in monochrome. [Monochrome] gives you a choice of the following monochrome tints:
Option
Description
[Black-andwhite]
Copy photographs in black-and-white.
[Sepia] Copy photographs in sepia.
[Cyanotype] Copy photographs in blue-and-white monochrome.
· The effect can be previewed in the edit display.
· In the case of [Sepia] or [Cyanotype], color saturation can be adjusted using the multi selector. Press 1 to increase, 3 to decrease. The changes are reflected in the preview.
· Press J to save the retouched copy.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 733
Image Overlay
G button U N retouch menu
Image overlay combines existing photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals. One NEF (RAW) image can be overlaid on another using additive blending ([Add]), or multiple images can be combined using [Lighten] or [Darken] blending.
Add
Overlay two NEF (RAW) images to create a single new JPEG copy.
1 Select [Image overlay] in the
retouch menu.
Highlight [Image overlay] and press 2.
2 Select [Add].
Highlight [Add] and press 2 to display image overlay options with [Image 1] highlighted.
734 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
3 Highlight the first image.
· Press J to display a picture selection dialog listing only NEF (RAW) images, where you can use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph in the overlay.
· To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X (T) button.
4 Select the first image.
Press J to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display; the selected image will appear as [Image 1].
5 Select the second image.
Press 2 and select [Image 2], then select the second photo as described in Steps 3 and 4.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 735
6 Adjust gain.
· The overlay of [Image 1] and [Image 2] can be previewed in the "Preview" column. Highlight [Image 1] or [Image 2] and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to adjust gain.
· Choose from values between 0.1 and 2.0 in increments of 0.1.
· The effects are relative to the default value of 1.0 (no gain). For example, selecting 0.5 halves gain.
7 Select the "Preview" column.
· Press 4 or 2 to place the cursor in the "Preview" column.
· To proceed without previewing the overlay, highlight [Save] and press J.
8 Preview the overlay.
· To preview the overlay, highlight [Overlay] and press J.
· To select new photos or adjust gain, press W (Y). You will be returned to Step 6.
736 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
9 Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is displayed to save the overlay and display the resulting image.
D [Add] · Colors and brightness in the preview may differ from the final image. · Image overlay is available only with NEF (RAW) images created with this
camera. Images created with other cameras or in other formats cannot be selected. · The overlay is saved at an [Image quality] of [JPEG finem]. · NEF (RAW) images can be combined only if they were created with the same options selected for: - [Image area] > [Choose image area] - [NEF (RAW) recording] > [NEF (RAW) bit depth] · The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording, metering, shutter speed, aperture, shooting mode, exposure compensation, focal length, and image orientation) and values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for [Image 1]. Copyright information, however, is not copied to the new image. The comment is similarly not copied; instead, the comment currently active on the camera, if any, is appended.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 737
Lighten and Darken
The camera compares multiple selected pictures and selects only the brightest or darkest pixels at each point in the image to create a single new JPEG copy.
1 Select [Lighten] or [Darken].
After selecting [Image overlay] in the retouch menu, highlight either [Lighten] or [Darken] and press 2. · Lighten: The camera compares the pixels in each picture
and uses only the brightest.
· Darken: The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses only the darkest.
738 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
2 Choose how images are selected.
Option
Description
[Select individual images]
Select pictures for the overlay one-by-one.
[Select consecutive
images]
Select two pictures; the overlay will include the two pictures and all images between them.
[Select folder]
The overlay will include all pictures in the selected folder.
3 Select the source slot.
· Highlight the slot with the card containing the pictures and press 2.
· You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 739
4 Select pictures.
If you chose [Select individual images]: · Highlight pictures using the multi selector. · To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold
the X (T) button. · To select the highlighted image, press the W (Y) button.
Selected pictures are marked by a $ icon. To deselect the highlighted picture, press the W (Y) button again; the $ icon will no longer be displayed. The selected pictures will be combined using the option selected in Step 1. · Press J to proceed once selection is complete.
740 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
If you chose [Select consecutive images]: · All pictures in a range chosen using the multi selector will
be combined using the option selected in Step 1. - Use the W (Y) button to select the first and last pictures in the desired range. - The first and last pictures are indicated by % icons and the pictures between them by $ icons. - You can alter your selection by using the multi selector to highlight different pictures to serve as the first or last frame. Press the Q/gU) button to choose the current picture as the new start or end point. · To view the highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X (T) button. · Press J to proceed once selection is complete. If you chose [Select folder]: Highlight the desired folder and press J to overlay all pictures in the folder using the option selected in Step 1.
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 741
5 Save the overlay.
· A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight [Yes] and press J to save the overlay and display the resulting picture.
· To interrupt the process before the overlay is complete, press G.
D [Lighten]/[Darken] · The overlay will include only pictures created with this camera. Pictures
created with other cameras cannot be selected. · The overlay will include only pictures created with the same options
selected for: - [Image area] > [Choose image area] - [Image size] · Overlays that include pictures taken at different image quality settings will be saved at the same setting as the image with the highest image quality. · Overlays that include NEF (RAW) pictures will be saved at an image quality of [JPEG finem]. · Overlays that include both NEF (RAW) and JPEG pictures will be the same size as the JPEG pictures.
742 Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu
Trim Movie
G button U N retouch menu
Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed (0 271).
Menu Guide > N The Retouch Menu 743
OMY MENU/mRECENT SETTINGS
To view [MY MENU], select the O tab in the camera menus.
744 Menu Guide > O MY MENU/m RECENT SETTINGS
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu
My Menu can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20 items from the playback, photo shooting, movie shooting, Custom Settings, setup, and retouch menus. Items can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.
Adding Items to My Menu
1 Select [Add items] in [O MY
MENU]. Highlight [Add items] and press 2.
2 Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the menu containing the item you wish to add and press 2.
3 Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu item and press J.
Menu Guide > O MY MENU/m RECENT SETTINGS 745
4 Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to position the new item and press J to add it to My Menu.
5 Add more items.
· The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check mark (L).
· Items indicated by a V icon cannot be selected.
· Repeat Steps 14 to select additional items.
746 Menu Guide > O MY MENU/m RECENT SETTINGS
Removing Items from My Menu
1 Select [Remove items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Remove items] and press 2.
2 Select items.
· Highlight items and press 2 to select (M) or deselect.
· Continue until all the items you wish to remove are selected (L).
3 Remove the selected items.
Press J; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press J again to remove the selected items.
D Removing Items While in My Menu Items can also be removed by highlighting them in [O MY MENU] and pressing the O (Q) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O (Q) again to remove the selected item.
Menu Guide > O MY MENU/m RECENT SETTINGS 747
Reordering Items in My Menu
1 Select [Rank items] in [O MY MENU].
Highlight [Rank items] and press 2.
2 Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to move and press J.
3 Position the item.
· Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My Menu and press J.
· Repeat Steps 23 to reposition additional items.
4 Exit to [O MY MENU].
Press the G button to return to [O MY MENU].
748 Menu Guide > O MY MENU/m RECENT SETTINGS
Displaying Recent Settings
1 Select [Choose tab] in [O MY
MENU]. Highlight [Choose tab] and press 2.
2 Select [m RECENT SETTINGS].
· Highlight [m RECENT SETTINGS] in the [Choose tab] menu and press J.
· The name of the menu will change from [MY MENU] to [RECENT SETTINGS].
Menu Guide > O MY MENU/m RECENT SETTINGS 749
m Recent Settings: Accessing Recently-Used Settings How Items Are Added to Recent Settings
Menu items are added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used. The twenty most recently settings are listed.
D Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu To remove an item from the [RECENT SETTINGS] menu, highlight it and press the O (Q) button; a confirmation dialog will be displayed. Press O (Q) again to remove the selected item. D Displaying My Menu Selecting [Choose tab] in the recent settings menu displays the items shown in Step 2 of "Displaying Recent Settings" (0 749). Highlight [O MY MENU] and press J to view My Menu.
750 Menu Guide > O MY MENU/m RECENT SETTINGS
Troubleshooting
Before Contacting Customer Support
You may be able to resolve any issues with the camera by following the steps below. Check this list before consulting your retailer or Nikon-authorized service representative.
1 STEP
Check the common problems listed in the following sections: · "Problems and Solutions" (0 753) · "Alerts and Error Messages" (0 765)
2 STEP
Turn the camera off and remove the battery, then wait about a minute, re-insert the battery and turn the camera on. D The camera may continue to write data to the memory
card after shooting. Wait at least a minute before removing the battery.
3 STEP
Search Nikon websites. · For support information and answers to frequently asked
questions, visit the website for your country or region (0 xlvi). · To download the latest firmware for your camera, visit: https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
4 STEP Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative.
Troubleshooting 751
D Restoring Default Settings · Depending on current settings, some menu items and other features
may be unavailable. To access menu items that are grayed out or features that are otherwise unavailable, try restoring default settings using the [Reset all settings] item in the setup menu. · Note, however, that wireless network profiles, copyright information, and other user-generated entries will also be reset. Once reset, settings cannot be restored.
752 Troubleshooting
Problems and Solutions
Solutions to some common issues are listed below.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond: · Wait for recording and other operations to end. · If the problem persists, turn the camera off. · If the camera does not turn off, remove and reinsert the battery. · If you are using an AC adapter, disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. - Any data currently being recorded will be lost. - Data that have already been recorded are not affected by removing or disconnecting the power source.
The viewfinder is out of focus: · Rotate the diopter adjustment control to adjust viewfinder focus. · If adjusting viewfinder focus does not correct the problem, set the autofocus mode to AF-S and the AF-area mode to [Single-point AF]. Next, select the center focus point, choose a high-contrast subject, and focus using autofocus. With the camera in focus, use the diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder. · If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional corrective lenses.
The viewfinder is dark: Is the battery charged? The viewfinder may dim if the battery is exhausted or not inserted.
Troubleshooting 753
The display in the viewfinder, control panel, or monitor turns off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 [Standby timer] or c4 [Monitor off delay].
The display in control panel or viewfinder is dim and unresponsive: The response times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature.
Patterns appear in the viewfinder: The viewfinder display may turn red when a focus point is highlighted, but this is normal for this type of viewfinder and does not indicate a malfunction.
Shooting
The camera takes time to turn on: More time will be needed to find files if the memory card contains large numbers of files or folders.
754 Troubleshooting
The shutter cannot be released: · Is a memory card inserted, and if so, does it have space available? · Is the memory card write-protected? · Is the in-focus indicator (I) displayed? · When a CPU lens of a type other than G or E is attached, the shutter cannot be released unless the aperture ring is locked at minimum aperture (the highest f-number). If B is displayed in the control panel, select [Aperture ring] for Custom Setting f5 [Customize command dials] > [Aperture setting] and adjust aperture using the lens aperture ring. · If you selected mode S after selecting a shutter speed of A (Bulb) or % (Time) in mode M, choose a different shutter speed. · Is [Release locked] selected for [Slot empty release lock] in the setup menu?
The camera is slow to respond to the shutter-release button: Select [Off] for Custom Setting d4 [Exposure delay mode].
Burst shooting is unavailable: Burst shooting cannot be used in conjunction with HDR.
Troubleshooting 755
Photos are out of focus: · Is the camera in manual focus mode? To enable autofocus, rotate the focus-mode selector to AF. · Autofocus does not perform well under the following conditions. In these cases, use manual focus or focus lock. Autofocus does not perform well if: there is little or no contrast between the subject and the background, the focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera, the subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns, the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness, background objects appear larger than the subject, or the subject contains many fine details.
The beep does not sound: · A beep does not sound when AF-C is selected for autofocus mode or AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C. · Select an option other than [Off] for [Beep options] > [Beep on/off] in the setup menu.
The full range of shutter speeds is not available: Using a flash restricts the range of shutter speeds available. Flash sync speed can be set to values of 1/2001/60 s using Custom Setting e1 [Flash sync speed]. When using flash units that support auto FP highspeed sync, choose [1/200 s (Auto FP)] for a full range of shutter speeds.
Focus does not lock when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway: If AF-C is selected for autofocus mode or AF-A is selected and the camera is shooting using AF-C, focus can be locked using the A button.
756 Troubleshooting
Focus-point selection is not available: · Is the focus selector lock in the L (lock) position? · Focus-point selection is not available when [Auto-area AF] is selected for AF-area mode. · Focus point selection is not available in playback mode or when menus are in use. · Has the standby timer expired? To enable focus-point selection, press the shutter-release button halfway.
Image size cannot be changed: [Image quality] set to [NEF (RAW)].
The camera is slow to record photos: Is [On] selected for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu?
Troubleshooting 757
"Noise" (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appears in photos: · To reduce noise, adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity, shutter speed, or Active D-Lighting. · At high ISO sensitivities, noise may become more noticeable in long exposures or in pictures recorded when the camera temperature is elevated.
758 Troubleshooting
Photographs and movies do not appear to have the same exposure as the preview shown in the monitor during live view: Changes to monitor brightness during live view have no effect on images recorded with the camera.
Flicker or banding appears in the display during movie recording: Select [Flicker reduction] in the movie shooting menu and choose an option that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply.
Bright regions or bands appear in live view: Bright regions or bands may occur if a flashing sign, flash, or other light source with brief duration is used during live view.
Smudges appear in photographs: · Are there smudges on the front or rear (mount-side) lens elements? · Is there foreign matter on the low-pass filter? Perform image sensor cleaning.
Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start: · Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera's internal circuits, for example if: - The ambient temperature is high - The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies - The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended periods · If the camera is running hot and live view does not start, wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again. Note that the camera may feel warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
Troubleshooting 759
"Noise" (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appears during live view: · Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or bright spots may arise as a result of increases in the temperature of the camera's internal circuits during live view. Exit live view when the camera is not in use. · Randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, lines or unexpected colors may appear if you press the X (T) button to zoom in on the view through the lens during live view. · In movies, the amount and distribution of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, and bright spots are affected by the option selected for [Frame size/frame rate] in the movie shooting menu. · Note that the distribution of noise in the monitor may differ from that in the final picture.
The camera cannot measure a value for preset manual white balance: The subject is too dark or too bright.
Certain pictures cannot be selected as sources for preset white balance: Pictures created with cameras of other types cannot serve as sources for preset manual white balance.
760 Troubleshooting
White balance (WB) bracketing is unavailable: · White balance bracketing is not available when an NEF (RAW) or NEF + JPEG option is selected for image quality. · White balance bracketing cannot be used in multiple exposure and HDR modes.
The effects of [Set Picture Control] differ from image to image: [Auto] is selected for [Set Picture Control] or as the basis for a custom Picture Control created using [Manage Picture Control], or [A] (auto) is selected for [Quick sharp], [Contrast], or [Saturation]. For consistent results over a series of photographs, choose a setting other than [A] (auto).
The option selected for metering cannot be changed: The option selected for metering cannot be changed during exposure lock.
Exposure compensation is not available: Changes to exposure compensation in mode M apply only to the exposure indicator and have no effect on shutter speed or aperture.
Uneven shading may appear in long exposures: Uneven shading may appear in long exposures shot at shutter speeds of A (Bulb) or % (Time). The effect can be mitigated by selecting [On] for [Long exposure NR] in the photo shooting menu.
Sound is not recorded with movies: Is [Microphone off] selected for [Microphone sensitivity] in the movie shooting menu?
Troubleshooting 761
Playback
NEF (RAW) pictures are not visible during playback: The camera displays only the JPEG copies of pictures taken with [NEF(RAW) + JPEG finem], [NEF(RAW) + JPEG fine], [NEF(RAW) + JPEG normalm], [NEF(RAW) + JPEG normal], [NEF(RAW) + JPEG basicm], or [NEF(RAW) + JPEG basic] selected for [Image quality].
Pictures taken with other cameras are not displayed: Pictures recorded with other types of camera may not display correctly.
Not all photos are visible during playback: Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
"Tall" (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in "wide" (landscape) orientation: · Is [Off] selected for [Rotate tall] in the playback menu? · Auto image rotation is not available during image review. · Camera orientation may not be correctly recorded in photos taken with the camera pointing up or down.
Pictures cannot be deleted: Are the pictures protected?
Pictures cannot be retouched: · The pictures cannot be further edited with this camera. · There is insufficient space on the memory card to record the retouched copy.
762 Troubleshooting
The camera displays the message, [Folder contains no images]: Select [All] for [Playback folder] in the playback menu.
Pictures are not displayed on HDMI devices: Confirm that an HDMI cable is correctly connected.
The Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect: Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low-pass filter and will not have the desired effect if: · Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed are used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed · Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed are used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed
The effects of [Set Picture Control], [Active D-Lighting], or [Vignette control] are not visible: In the case of NEF (RAW) images, the effect can only be viewed using Nikon software. View NEF (RAW) images using Capture NX-D or ViewNX-i.
Pictures cannot be copied to a computer: Depending on the operating system, you may be unable to upload pictures when the camera is connected to a computer. Copy pictures from the memory card to a computer using a card reader or other device.
Troubleshooting 763
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name): · Navigate to the setup menu and confirm both that [Disable] is selected for [Airplane mode] and that [Enable] is selected for [Connect to smart device] > [Pairing (Bluetooth)] > [Bluetooth connection]. · Try disabling and re-enabling wireless network features on the smart device.
The camera cannot connect to printers and other wireless devices: The camera cannot establish wireless connections to devices other than smartphones, tablets, and computers.
Miscellaneous
The date of recording is not correct: Is the camera clock set correctly? The clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks; check it regularly against more accurate timepieces and reset as necessary.
Menu items cannot be selected: · Some items are not available at certain combinations of settings. · The [Battery info] item in the setup menu is not available when camera is powered by an optional power connector and AC adapter.
764 Troubleshooting
Alerts and Error Messages
This section lists the alerts and error messages that appear in the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor.
Alerts
The following alerts appear in the control panel and viewfinder:
Alert
Control panel
Viewfinder
Problem/solution
B (flashes)
B (flashes)
Lens aperture ring is not set to minimum aperture. Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture (highest f-number).
H
d
Low battery. Ready spare battery.
Battery exhausted. · Replace with spare battery. · Charge battery.
H (flashes)
d (flashes)
Battery info not available. · Battery cannot be used. Contact Nikon-
authorized service representative. · Battery level is extremely low; charge battery.
Battery cannot supply data to camera. Replace third-party batteries with genuine Nikon batteries.
High battery temperature. Remove battery and wait for it to cool.
Troubleshooting 765
Alert
Control panel
Viewfinder
Problem/solution
Aperture shown in stops from maximum
aperture. No lens attached, or non-CPU lens
F
F
attached without specifying maximum aperture.
Aperture value will be displayed if maximum
aperture is specified.
--
F H Camera unable to focus using autofocus. (flashes) Change composition or focus manually.
A (flashes)
A (flashes)
A (Bulb) selected in mode S. · Change shutter speed. · Select mode M.
% (flashes)
% (flashes)
% (Time) selected in mode S. · Change shutter speed. · Select mode M.
1
k Processing in progress.
(flashes) (flashes) Wait for processing to complete.
Flash has fired at full power.
--
c
Photo may be underexposed. Check distance to
(flashes) subject and settings such as aperture, flash
range, and ISO sensitivity.
766 Troubleshooting
Alert
Control panel
Viewfinder
Problem/solution
Subject too bright; limits of camera exposure metering system exceeded. · Lower ISO sensitivity. · Mode P: Use third-party ND (neutral density)
filter (filter can also be used if alert is still displayed after following settings are adjusted in mode S or A). · Mode S: Choose faster shutter speed. (Exposure indicators · Mode A: Choose smaller aperture (higher fand shutter speed or number). aperture display flash) Subject too dark; limits of camera exposure metering system exceeded. · Increase ISO sensitivity. · Mode P: Use optional flash unit (flash can also be used if alert is still displayed after following settings are adjusted in mode S or A). · Mode S: Choose slower shutter speed. · Mode A: Choose wider aperture (lower fnumber).
Troubleshooting 767
Alert
Control panel
Viewfinder
Problem/solution
Flash unit that does not support red-eye
reduction attached and flash mode set to red-
Y (flashes)
--
eye reduction or red-eye reduction with slow sync.
· Use flash unit that supports red-eye reduction.
· Change flash mode.
n (flashes)
j (flashes)
Memory insufficient to record further photos. · Delete pictures from memory card until there
is room for additional pictures to be recorded. Copy pictures you wish to keep to computer or other device before proceeding. · Insert new memory card.
Camera has run out of file numbers. · Delete pictures from memory card until there
is room for additional pictures to be recorded. Copy pictures you wish to keep to computer or other device before proceeding. · Insert new memory card.
O (flashes)
O (flashes)
Camera malfunction. Press shutter-release button again. If error persists or appears frequently, consult Nikonauthorized service representative.
768 Troubleshooting
Error Messages
The following alerts may appear in the monitor and control panel:
Alert
Monitor
Control panel
Problem/solution
No memory card.
Memory card not inserted or inserted S incorrectly.
Check that card is inserted correctly.
Cannot access this memory
card. Insert another
card.
Error accessing memory card. · Check that camera supports memory card. · If error persists after card has been
repeatedly ejected and reinserted, card may be damaged. Contact retailer or W, Nikon-authorized service representative. R Unable to create new folder. (flashes) · Delete pictures from memory card until there is room for additional pictures to be recorded. Copy pictures you wish to keep to computer or other device before proceeding. · Insert new memory card.
Troubleshooting 769
Alert
Monitor
Control panel
Problem/solution
Memory card is locked. Slide lock to "write" position.
W, Memory card is locked (write protected). X Slide card write-protect switch to "write" (flashes) position.
This card is not formatted. Format the card.
Memory card is not correctly formatted. T · Format memory card. (flashes) · Replace with correctly-formatted memory
card.
Unable to start
live view. Please
wait.
The camera is too hot. It
cannot be used
Camera's internal temperature is -- elevated.
Suspend shooting until camera has cooled.
until it cools.
Please wait.
770 Troubleshooting
Alert
Monitor
Control panel
Problem/solution
Folder contains no pictures. Insert memory card that contains pictures.
Folder contains no images.
--
No pictures in folder selected for playback.
Use [Playback folder] item in playback
menu to select folder that contains pictures.
Cannot display this file.
File has been modified using computer application or does not conform to DCF file standard. Do not overwrite images using computer -- applications.
File is corrupt. Do not overwrite images using computer applications.
Cannot select this file.
Selected picture cannot be retouched.
--
Retouch options are available only with pictures taken with or previously retouched
on camera.
Troubleshooting 771
Alert
Monitor
Control panel
Problem/solution
This movie cannot be
edited.
Selected movie cannot be edited.
· Movies created with other devices cannot
--
be edited.
· Movies under two seconds long cannot be
edited.
This file cannot be saved to the
destination memory card.
See the camera's user's
manual for details.
Files 4 GB or larger can only be saved to
memory cards formatted for FAT32 or
--
exFAT. Use a memory card with a capacity over 32
GB formatted in the camera or keep file size
to under 4 GB.
772 Troubleshooting
Technical Notes
Camera Displays
For illustrative purposes, the displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Viewfinder
1
2
3
10 9
8 4
7
5
6
11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20
21 22
23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
Technical Notes 773
1 Framing grid 1 (0 615)
2 Focus points (0 36, 145)
3 Image area (0 129)
4 Pitch indicator 2, 3 (0 628)
5 Roll indicator 2, 4 (0 628)
6 Flicker detection (0 561)
7 "No memory card" indicator (0 28)
8 AF area brackets (0 36)
9 Monochrome indicator 5 (0 119, 243)
10 Special effects mode indicator (0 119)
11 Focus indicator (0 36)
12 Metering (0 166)
13 Autoexposure (AE) lock (0 173)
14 Flexible program indicator (0 109)
15 Shutter speed (0 110, 113) Autofocus mode (0 140)
16 Aperture (f-number; 0 111, 113) Aperture (number of stops; 0 112, 795)
17 HDR indicator (0 256)
18 Exposure/flash bracketing indicator (0 226) WB bracketing indicator (0 232) ADL bracketing indicator (0 238)
19 Low battery warning (0 33)
20 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 187)
21 "k" (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures; 0 34)
22 Flash-ready indicator 6 (0 460)
23 FV lock indicator (0 471)
24 Flash sync indicator (0 619)
25 Aperture stop indicator (0 112, 795)
26 Exposure indicator Exposure (0 114) Exposure compensation (0 175) Exposure/flash bracketing (0 226) WB bracketing (0 232) ADL bracketing (0 238)
27 Flash compensation indicator (0 469)
774 Technical Notes
28 Exposure compensation indicator (0 175)
29 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 190)
30 ISO sensitivity (0 187) Preset white balance recording indicator (0 210) Active D-Lighting amount (0 254)
31 Number of exposures remaining (0 34, 861) Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills (0 181, 861) Exposure compensation value (0 175) Flash compensation value (0 469) PC mode indicator (0 819)
1 Displayed when [On] is selected for Custom Setting d10 [Framing grid display].
2 Can be displayed by pressing a button to which [Viewfinder virtual horizon] has been assigned using Custom Setting f3 [Custom controls].
3 Functions as a roll indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures in "tall" (portrait) orientation.
4 Functions as a pitch indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures in "tall" (portrait) orientation.
5 Displayed in j mode or when the [Monochrome] Picture Control or a Picture Control based on [Monochrome] is selected.
6 Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached. The flash-ready indicator lights when the flash is charged.
Technical Notes 775
The Information Display
123 4 5
67
17
16
8
15
9
14
10
13
11
12
1 Shooting mode (0 107)
2 Flexible program indicator (0 109)
3 User setting mode (0 115)
4 Flash sync indicator (0 619)
5 Shutter speed (0 110, 113)
6 Aperture stop indicator (0 112, 795)
7 Aperture (f-number; 0 111, 113) Aperture (number of stops; 0 112, 795)
8 Exposure/flash bracketing indicator (0 226) WB bracketing indicator (0 232) ADL bracketing indicator (0 238) HDR indicator (0 256) Multiple exposure indicator (0 287)
9 "k" (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures; 0 34)
10 Number of exposures remaining (0 34, 861) PC mode indicator (0 819)
776 Technical Notes
11 Exposure indicator Exposure (0 114) Exposure compensation (0 175) Exposure/flash bracketing (0 226) WB bracketing (0 232) ADL bracketing (0 238)
12 ISO sensitivity (0 187)
13 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 187) Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 190)
14 FV lock indicator (0 471)
15 Autoexposure (AE) lock (0 173)
16 Flash compensation indicator (0 469)
17 Exposure compensation indicator (0 175) Exposure compensation value (0 175)
Technical Notes 777
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 Bluetooth connection indicator (0 692) Airplane mode (0 691)
2 Wi-Fi connection indicator (0 696)
3 Long exposure noise reduction indicator (0 556)
4 Vignette control indicator (0 558)
5 Electronic front-curtain shutter (0 609)
11
12
6 Exposure delay mode (0 608) 7 Interval timer indicator
(0 298) t ("clock not set") indicator (0 779) 8 Flash control mode (0 463) 9 "Beep" indicator (0 684) 10 Battery indicator (0 33) 11 i menu display area (0 63) 12 Guide
778 Technical Notes
D The t Icon A flashing t icon indicates that the camera clock has been reset. The date and time recorded with new photographs will not be correct; use the [Time zone and date] > [Date and time] option in the setup menu to set the clock to the correct time and date. A Using the i Menu To access the i menu, press the i button or tap the guide in the information display. Press the i button again or press the R button to return to the information display when settings are complete.
Technical Notes 779
Live View (Still Photography/Movies)
Still Photography
2 46
12 14
1 3 5 7 8 9 10 11 13 15
46 45 44 43
16
17
18 19 20
42
41 40
21
39
38
22
37 35 33 31 29 27 25 23 36 34 32 30 28 26 24
1 Shooting mode (0 107)
7 Subject tracking AF (0 158)
2 Flexible program indicator (0 109)
3 User setting mode (0 115)
4 AF-area brackets (0 40)
5 Flash mode (0 101, 465)
6 Interval timer indicator (0 298) t("clock not set") indicator (0 779)
8 Autofocus mode (0 142) 9 AF-area mode (0 150) 10 Active D-Lighting (0 254) 11 Picture Control (0 243)
12 Location data indicator (0 687)
13 White balance (0 195) 14 Image quality (0 134)
"No memory card" indicator (0 28)
780 Technical Notes
15 Image area (0 129)
16 Image size (0 137)
17 Negative film digitizer exposure adjustment (0 343)
18 i icon (0 63)
19 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator (0 226) WB bracketing indicator (0 232) ADL bracketing indicator (0 238) HDR indicator (0 256) Multiple exposure indicator (0 287)
20 Position of current frame in exposure/flash bracketing sequence (0 226) Position of current frame in white balance bracketing sequence (0 232) Position of current frame in ADL bracketing sequence (0 238) Number of exposures (multiple exposure; 0 287)
21 Exposure indicator Exposure (0 114) Exposure compensation (0 175) Auto bracketing (0 224)
22 Bluetooth connection indicator (0 692) Airplane mode (0 691)
23 Flash-ready indicator * (0 460)
24 "k" (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures; 0 34)
25 Number of exposures remaining (0 34, 861)
26 Wi-Fi connection indicator (0 696)
27 ISO sensitivity (0 187)
28 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 187) Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 190)
29 Exposure compensation indicator (0 175)
30 Flash compensation indicator (0 469)
Technical Notes 781
31 Aperture (f-number; 0 111, 113) Aperture (number of stops; 0 112, 795)
32 Aperture stop indicator (0 112, 795)
33 Shutter speed (0 110, 113)
34 Flash sync indicator (0 619)
35 Focus indicator (0 164)
36 FV lock indicator (0 471)
37 Metering (0 166)
38 Autoexposure (AE) lock (0 173)
39 Battery indicator (0 33)
40 Maximum aperture indicator (0 628)
41 Flicker detection (0 561)
42 Silent photography (0 340) Electronic front-curtain shutter (0 609)
43 Exposure delay mode (0 608)
44 Touch shooting (0 14)
45 Highlight display indicator (0 653)
46 Temperature warning (0 44) Live view time remaining (0 44)
* Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached. The flash-ready indicator lights when the flash is charged.
D Temperature Warnings · If the camera temperature becomes elevated, a temperature warning
and count-down timer will be displayed. When the timer reaches zero, the monitor will turn off. · The timer turns red when the thirty second mark is reached. In some cases, the timer may be displayed immediately after the camera is turned on.
782 Technical Notes
Filming
12
3
4 5
6 13
12
7
11
8
10
1 Recording indicator (0 45) "No movie" indicator (0 268)
2 External recording control (0 397) N-Log indicator (0 397)
3 Frame size and rate/image quality (0 264)
4 Time remaining (0 45)
5 Time code (0 584)
6 File name (0 550)
9
7 Wind noise reduction (0 583) 8 Headphone volume (0 583)
9 Release mode (still photography; 0 50)
10 Sound level (0 45)
11 Microphone sensitivity (0 581)
12 Frequency response (0 582)
13 Electronic VR indicator (0 580)
Technical Notes 783
The Control Panel
1
23
11 10
4 5
9
8
76
1 Shutter speed (0 110, 113)
2 Aperture stop indicator (0 112, 795)
3 Aperture (0 111, 113)
4 Memory card icon (Slot 1; 0 34)
5 Memory card icon (Slot 2; 0 34)
6 "k" (appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures; 0 34)
7 Number of exposures remaining (0 34, 861) PC mode indicator (0 819)
8 ISO sensitivity (0 187) Autofocus mode (0 140)
9 Battery indicator (0 33)
10 Metering (0 166)
11 ISO sensitivity indicator (0 187) Auto ISO sensitivity indicator (0 190)
784 Technical Notes
12
34
10
5
9
6 7
8
1 Bluetooth connection indicator (0 692)
2 Wi-Fi connection indicator (0 696)
3 Color temperature (0 204)
4 Multiple exposure indicator (0 287)
5 Flash compensation indicator (0 469)
6 Exposure compensation indicator (0 175)
7 B ("clock not set") indicator (0 32)
8 Bracketing indicator (0 224)
9 Exposure indicator Exposure (0 114) Exposure compensation (0 175) Exposure/flash bracketing (0 226) WB bracketing (0 232) ADL bracketing (0 238)
10 Flash sync indicator (0 619)
Technical Notes 785
Compatible F Mount Lenses
CPU lenses are recommended (but note that IX-NIKKOR lenses cannot be used). Types G, E, and D, which grant access to a full range of camera features, are particularly recommended.
CPU Lenses
Lens 1/accessory
Type G, E, or D 3; AF-S, AF-P, AF-I PC NIKKOR 19mm f/4E ED 6 PC-E NIKKOR series 6
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 6, 7 AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter 9 Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF) AI-P NIKKOR
Shooting mode
Metering
Autofocus 2 P S
L
A M
3DRGB
RGB
M N
t
4
4 4 4 -- 44 4
--
45 45 45
--
4 4, 4 5
5
--
45 45 45
--
4 4, 4 5
5
--
--
48 45
--
4 4, 4 5
5
4
4 4 4 -- 44 4
4 10
4 4 -- 4 44 --
--
4 4 -- 4 44 --
786 Technical Notes
1 IX-NIKKOR lenses cannot be used. 2 M (manual focus) is available with all lenses. 3 Vibration reduction (VR) is supported with VR lenses. 4 [Spot metering] meters the selected focus point. 5 Cannot be used with shifting or tilting. 6 Fog, lines, and other image artifacts ("noise") may appear in photos
taken with the electronic front-curtain shutter. This can be prevented by selecting [Disable] for Custom Setting d5 [Electronic front-curtain shutter]. 7 The camera's exposure metering and flash control systems will not function as expected when the lens is shifted and/or tilted, or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used. 8 Mode M (manual) only. 9 For information on the focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see "AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters" (0 790). 10 When an AF 80200mm f/2.8, AF 3570mm f/2.8, AF 2885mm f/3.54.5 <New>, or AF 2885mm f/3.54.5 lens is focused at the minimum distance at maximum zoom, the in-focus indicator may be displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until the image in the viewfinder is in focus. · "Noise" in the form of lines may appear during autofocus at high ISO sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock. Lines may also appear at high ISO sensitivities when aperture is adjusted during movie recording or live view photography.
Technical Notes 787
D Lens f-Number The f-number is a measure of lens "speed", its maximum (widest) aperture. It appears at the end of the lens name, for example as "f/2.8" or "f/3.55.6". D VR Lenses The lenses listed below are not recommended for long exposures or photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities, as due to the design of the vibration reduction (VR) control system the resulting photos may be marred by fog. · AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24120mm f/3.55.6G IF-ED · AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70200mm f/2.8G IF-ED · AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70300mm f/4.55.6G IF-ED · AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED · AF-S VR Nikkor 300mm f/2.8G IF-ED · AF-S NIKKOR 1635mm f/4G ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 28300mm f/3.55.6G ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR · AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR · AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18200mm f/3.55.6G IF-ED · AF-S DX NIKKOR 1685mm f/3.55.6G ED VR · AF-S DX NIKKOR 18200mm f/3.55.6G ED VR II · AF-S DX Micro NIKKOR 85mm f/3.5G ED VR · AF-S DX NIKKOR 55300mm f/4.55.6G ED VR We recommend turning vibration reduction off when using other VR lenses.
788 Technical Notes
D Calculating Angle of View The camera can be used with Nikon lenses for 35 mm format cameras. If a 35 mm format lens or a lens that supports the FX format is attached, the angle of view will be the same as a frame of 35 mm film. · You can also take pictures at angles of view that differ from that of the
current lens by selecting different options for [Image area] > [Choose image area] in the photo shooting menu. For example, if a 35 mm format lens or a lens that supports the FX format is attached, you can reduce the angle of view by selecting [DX (24×16)].
2
1 Lens
3
2 [FX (36×24)] picture size (35.9
× 23.9 mm, equivalent to
35 mm format camera)
1
3 [DX (24×16)] picture size (23.5
4
× 15.7 mm)
4 Picture diagonal
5
5 [FX (36×24)] angle of view
6
(35 mm format)
6 [DX (24×16)] angle of view
· The picture diagonal for 35 mm format is about 1.5 times that of the [DX (24×16)] crop. Selecting [DX (24×16)] therefore multiplies the apparent focal length of 35 mm format lenses attached to the camera by about 1.5×. For example, selecting [DX (24×16)] when a lens with a focal length of 50 mm is attached increases the apparent focal length to about 75 mm.
Technical Notes 789
D AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters · The table below shows the focus points available for autofocus and
electronic rangefinding in viewfinder photography when an AF-S/AF-I teleconverter is attached. Note that the camera may be unable to focus on dark or low-contrast subjects if the combined aperture is slower than f/5.6.
Teleconverter Max. lens aperture
Focus points
f/4 or faster
TC-14E, TC-14E II,
TC-14E III
1
f/5.6
f/2.8 or faster
TC-17E II f/4
f/5.6
TC-20E, TC-20E II, TC-20E III
f/2.8 or faster f/4
f/5.6
TC-800-1.25E ED f/5.6
1
-- 2
3
-- 2
1
790 Technical Notes
1 Single-point AF is used when 3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected forAF-area mode.
2 Autofocus not available. 3 Focus data for focus points other than the center focus point are
obtained from line sensors. · Autofocus is not available when teleconverters are used with the AF-S
VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED.
A Recognizing CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts (q). Type G lenses are marked with a "G", type E lenses with an "E", and type D lenses with a "D". Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring (w).
CPU lens
Type G or E lens
Type D lens
Technical Notes 791
Non-CPU Lenses and Other Accessories
Shooting mode
Metering
Lens 1/accessory
L
P S
A M
3DRGB
RGB
M N
t
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses 2
--
4 3
--
4 4
4 5
--
Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4
-- 46 -- -- -- --
Reflex-NIKKOR
-- 43 -- -- 45 --
PC-NIKKOR
-- 47 -- -- 4 --
AI-type Teleconverter 8
-- 43 -- 44 45 --
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 9
-- 4 10 -- -- 4 --
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)
-- 43 -- --
4
--
1 Some lenses cannot be used (0 794). 2 The range of rotation for the AI 80200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is
limited by the camera body. Filters cannot be exchanged while an AI 200400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera. 3 If the maximum aperture is specified using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu, the aperture value will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel.
792 Technical Notes
4 Can be used only if the lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu. Some lenses may, however, fail to produce the desired results even if the focal length and maximum aperture are supplied. Use [Spot metering] or [Center-weighted metering] if the desired results are not achieved.
5 For improved precision, specify the lens focal length and maximum aperture using the [Non-CPU lens data] item in the setup menu.
6 Can be used in mode M at shutter speeds one step or more slower than the flash sync speed.
7 Use stop-down metering. In mode A, stop aperture down using the controls on the lens and lock exposure before shifting the lens. In mode M, stop aperture down using the controls on the lens and meter exposure before shifting the lens.
8 Exposure compensation required with AI 2885mm f/3.54.5, AI 35105mm f/3.54.5, AI 35135mm f/3.54.5, or AF-S 80200mm f/2.8D lenses.
9 Requires a PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. A PB-6D may be required depending on camera orientation.
10 Can be used with stop-down metering; in mode A, stop aperture down using the controls on the bellows attachment and meter exposure before taking photographs.
· Lines may appear at high ISO sensitivities when aperture is adjusted during movie recording or live view photography.
Technical Notes 793
D Incompatible Lenses and Accessories The following non-CPU lenses and accessories cannot be used. Attempting to mount them on the camera could damage the camera or lens. · TC-16A AF teleconverters · Non-AI lenses (lenses with pre-AI exposure couplings) · Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6,
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11) · Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6) · 2.1cm f/4 · K2 extension rings · 180600mm f/8 ED lenses (serial numbers 174041174180) · 3601200mm f/11 ED lenses (serial numbers 174031174127) · 200600mm f/9.5 lenses (serial numbers 280001300490) · AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED, TC-16 AF
teleconverters) · PC 28mm f/4 lenses (serial numbers 180900 or earlier) · PC 35mm f/2.8 lenses (serial numbers 851001906200) · PC 35mm f/3.5 lenses (old type) · Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 lenses (old type) · Reflex 1000mm f/11 lenses (serial numbers 142361143000) · Reflex 2000mm f/11 lenses (serial numbers 200111200310)
794 Technical Notes
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses · Specifying the lens focal length and maximum aperture using the [Non-
CPU lens data] item in the setup menu allows many of the features available with CPU lenses, including aperture value display and color matrix metering, to be used with non-CPU lenses. If the focal length and maximum aperture are not provided and [Matrix metering] is selected for metering, [Center-weighted metering] will be used instead. · Aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum aperture is not provided using [Non-CPU lens data], the aperture displays in the camera control panel and viewfinder will show the number of stops from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring.
Technical Notes 795
The Electronic Rangefinder
The conditions under which the electronic rangefinder can be used vary with the lens.
CPU lenses
Lens/accessory
Type G, E, or D; AF-S, AF-P, AF-I PC NIKKOR 19mm f/4E ED PC-E NIKKOR series PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses for F3AF) AI-P NIKKOR
Viewfinder photography
4 4 1 4 1 4 1 4
4 2
4 3
Live view
4 -- -- -- 4
4
4
1 Cannot be used with shifting or tilting. 2 When an AF 80200mm f/2.8, AF 3570mm f/2.8, AF 2885mm f/3.5
4.5 <New>, or AF 2885mm f/3.54.5 lens is focused at the minimum distance at maximum zoom, the in-focus indicator may be displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until the image in the viewfinder is in focus. 3 With a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
796 Technical Notes
Non-CPU Lenses and Other Accessories
Lens/accessory
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses Medical-NIKKOR 120mm f/4 Reflex-NIKKOR PC-NIKKOR AI-type Teleconverter PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)
Viewfinder photography
4 1
4 -- 4 2 4 3 4 3
4 3
Live view
--
-- -- -- -- --
--
1 With a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. 2 Cannot be used with shifting or tilting. 3 With a maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
Technical Notes 797
Compatible Flash Units
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon's advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) supports a variety of features thanks to improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units.
Features Available with CLS-Compatible Flash Units
Flash unit
Supported features
SB-300 SB-400 SB-R200 SU-800 SB-500 SB-600 SB-700 SB-910/ SB-900/ SB-800 SB-5000
Single flash
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for 4 4 digital SLR 1 i-TTL Standard i-TTL fill-flash for 4 2 4 2 digital SLR
4 4 4 ---- 4 4 4 42 4 -- -- 4 4
qA Auto aperture 4 4 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
A Non-TTL auto -- 4 3 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
DistanceGN priority
manual
4 4 4 ------------
M Manual
4 4 4 4 44 -- -- 44 44
RPT
Repeating flash
4 4 --------------
798 Technical Notes
SB-300 SB-400 SB-R200 SU-800 SB-500 SB-600 SB-700 SB-910/ SB-900/ SB-800 SB-5000
Master
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Supported features
Flash unit
Remote flash control 4 4 4 -- 4 4 4 -- -- --
i-TTL i-TTL
4 4 4 -- 44 -- -- -- --
[A : B]
Quick wireless flash control
4
--
4 -- -- 45 -- -- --
qA Auto aperture 4 4 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
A Non-TTL auto -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
M Manual
4 4 4 -- 44 -- -- -- --
RPT
Repeating flash
4 4 --------------
i-TTL i-TTL
4 4 4 4 4 -- 4 ----
[A : B]
Quick wireless flash control
4
4
4 4 4 -- 4 ----
Auto qA/A aperture/non- 4 6 4 6 -- -- -- -- -- -- --
TTL auto
M Manual
4 4 4 4 4 -- 4 ----
RPT
Repeating flash
4 4 4 4 4 --------
Remote
Technical Notes 799
SB-300 SB-400 SB-R200 SU-800 SB-500 SB-600 SB-700 SB-910/ SB-900/ SB-800 SB-5000
Supported features
Flash unit
Radio-controlled Advanced 4 7 Wireless Lighting
--
--------------
Color Information Communication (flash)
4 4 4 4 4 ---- 4 4
Color Information Communication (LED light)
--
--
---- 4 --------
Auto FP high-speed sync 8 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 -- --
FV lock 9
4 4 4444444
Red-eye reduction
4 4 4 4 4 ---- 4 --
Camera modeling illumination
4 4 4 4 4 4 4----
Unified flash control
4 -- ---- 4 ---- 4 4
Camera flash unit firmware 4 update
4 10
4 -- 4 ------ 4
800 Technical Notes
1 Not available with spot metering. 2 Can also be selected via the flash unit. 3 qA/A mode selection is performed on the flash unit using custom
settings. 4 Can be selected using the [Flash control] item in the camera menus. 5 Available during close-up photography only. 6 Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master
flash. 7 Supports the same features as remote flash units with optical AWL. 8 Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes. 9 Available only in i-TTL flash control mode or when the flash is
configured to emit monitor preflashes in qA or A flash control mode. 10 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.
Technical Notes 801
The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, or SB-R200 flash units. Group flash control is supported for up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
D Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto (A) and manual modes. The options available do not vary with the lens used.
Flash unit
Supported features
SB-80DX SB-28DX
SB-50DX
SB-28 SB-26 SB-25 SB-24
SB-30 SB-27 1 SB-22S SB-22 SB-20 SB-16B SB-15
SB-23 SB-29 SB-21B SB-29S
A Non-TTL auto
4
--
4
4
--
M Manual
4
4
4
4
4
G Repeating flash
4
--
4
--
--
REAR 2 Rear-curtain sync
4
4
4
4
4
1 Mounting an SB-27 on the camera automatically sets the flash mode to TTL, but setting the flash mode to TTL disables the shutter release. Set the SB-27 to A.
2 Available when the camera is used to select the flash mode.
802 Technical Notes
D Metering Areas for FV Lock The areas metered when FV lock is used with optional flash units are as follows:
Picture taken with
Stand-alone flash unit
Remote flash units controlled via
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Flash control mode i-TTL
Auto aperture (qA) i-TTL
Auto aperture (qA) Non-TTL auto (A)
Metered area 6-mm circle in center
of frame Area metered by flash
exposure meter Entire frame
Area metered by flash exposure meter
D Notes on Optional Flash Units · Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. · If the unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital
SLR cameras. This camera is not included in the "digital SLR" category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals. · If the flash-ready indicator (c) flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash units only). · i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 12800. · At ISO sensitivities over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings.
Technical Notes 803
· In mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture (f-number) at ISO equivalent of:
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800
4
5
5.6 7.1
8
10
11
13
* If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
· The SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction in red-eye reduction and slow-sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.
· "Noise" in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken with an SD-9 or SD-8A high-performance battery pack attached directly to the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance between the camera and the battery pack.
· During viewfinder photography, the SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination as required.
· The SB-5000 supports AF-assist illumination with 24135 mm AF lenses. During viewfinder photography, AF-assist is available with the focus points highlighted in the illustration.
Focus points for which AF-assist illumination is available
Focal length 2430 mm
Focal length 3148 mm
Focal length 49135 mm
804 Technical Notes
· The SB-910 and SB-900 support AF-assist illumination with 17135 mm AF lenses. During viewfinder photography, AF-assist illumination is available with the focus points highlighted in the illustration.
Focus points for which AF-assist illumination is available
· The SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800 support AF-assist illumination with 24105 mm AF lenses. During viewfinder photography, AF-assist illumination is available with the focus points highlighted in the illustration.
Focus points for which AF-assist illumination is available
Focal length 2431 mm
Focal length 32105 mm
Technical Notes 805
· The SB-700 supports AF-assist illumination with 24135 mm AF lenses. During viewfinder photography, AF-assist illumination is available with the focus points highlighted in the illustration. Focus points for which AF-assist illumination is available
· Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled.
· When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.
· In i-TTL, do not use any form of flash panel (diffusion panel) other than the flash unit's built-in flash panel or bounce adapters provided with the flash unit. Using other panels may produce incorrect exposure.
D Flash Compensation for Optional Flash Units In i-TTL and auto aperture (qA) flash control modes, the flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit or the [Flash control] item in the photo shooting menu is added to the flash compensation selected with the c (Y) button.
806 Technical Notes
A Modeling Illumination · Optional CLS-compatible flash units emit a modeling flash when the
camera Pv button is pressed. · This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to preview
the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units. · Modeling illumination can be turned off by selecting [Off] for Custom
Setting e5 [Modeling flash].
Technical Notes 807
Other Compatible Accessories
A variety of accessories are available for your Nikon camera.
Power Sources · EN-EL15b Rechargeable Li-ion Battery: EN-EL15b batteries can be
used with Nikon D780 digital cameras. - EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries can also be used. Note, however, that
fewer pictures may sometimes be taken on a single charge with an EN-EL15 than with an EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a (0 867). · MH-25a Battery Charger: The MH-25a can be used to recharge EN-EL15b batteries. - MH-25 battery chargers can also be used. · EH-7P Charging AC Adapter: The EH-7P can be used to charge EN-EL15b batteries inserted in the camera. - The battery only charges when the camera is off. - The EH-7P cannot be used to charge EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries. · EP-5B Power Connector, EH-5d, EH-5c, and EH-5b AC Adapters: Use AC adapters to power the camera for extended periods. - The EP-5B is required to connect the camera to the AC adapter. See "Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter" (0 816) for details.
808 Technical Notes
Accessory Shoe Covers BS-3/BS-1 Accessory Shoe Covers: Accessory shoe covers protect the accessory shoe when no flash unit is attached. Body Caps BF-1B Body Cap/BF-1A Body Cap: Body caps prevent dust entering the camera when no lens is in place. Viewfinder Eyepiece Accessories · DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with
diopters of 5, 4, 3, 2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m1 when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the neutral position (1 m1). Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved. Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired focus cannot be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control (3 to +1 m1). The rubber eyecup cannot be used with eyepiece correction lenses. · DK-21M Magnifying Eyepiece: The DK-21M magnifies the view through the viewfinder by approximately 1.17 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity; 1.0 m1) for greater precision when framing. · DG-2 Magnifier: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center of the viewfinder for greater precision during focusing. · DK-22 Eyepiece Adapter: The DK-22 is used when attaching the DG-2 magnifier. · DR-6 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment: The DR-6 attaches at a right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed at right angles to the lens (for example, from directly above when the camera is horizontal).
Technical Notes 809
Filters · Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the lens. · The camera cannot be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL or
C-PLII circular polarizing filter instead. · Filters may cause ghosting when the subject is framed against a bright
light, or when a bright light source is in the frame. Filters can be removed if ghosting occurs. · RGB and 3D-RGB matrix metering may not produce the desired results with filters with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12); we suggest that [Center-weighted metering] be selected instead. See the filter manual for details. · Filters intended for special-effects photography may interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder. Wireless Transmitters WT-7 Wireless Transmitter *: Use the WT-7 to upload pictures over a wireless network or control the camera from a computer running Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately). You can also take and browse pictures remotely from a computer or smart device. * Requires a wireless network and some basic network knowledge. Be sure to update the wireless transmitter software to the latest version.
810 Technical Notes
Wireless Remote Controllers · WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller/WR-T10 Wireless Remote
Controller: When a WR-R10 wireless remote controller is attached to accessory terminal, the camera can be controlled remotely using a WR-T10 wireless remote controller. - The WR-R10 can also be used to control radio-controlled flash units. - For synchronized release involving more than one camera, ready
multiple cameras with paired WR-R10 units attached. * When connecting the WR-R10, be sure the covers for the accessory
terminal and the USB and HDMI connectors are fully open. · WR-1 Wireless Remote Controller: WR-1 units are used with WR-R10 or
WR-T10 wireless remote controllers or with other WR-1 remote controllers, with the WR-1 units functioning as either transmitters or receivers. When a WR-R10 or a WR-1 configured as a receiver is connected to the camera accessory terminal, a WR-T10 or a second WR-1 configured as a transmitter can be used to take pictures remotely. Camera settings can also be adjusted using a WR-1 configured as a transmitter. * Be sure the firmware for the WR-R10 and WR-1 has been updated to the latest versions (WR-R10 firmware version 3.0 or later and WR-1 firmware version 1.0.1 or later). For information on firmware updates, see the Nikon website for your area. Consult a Nikon-authorized service representative when updating the firmware for the WR-R10 from versions prior to version 2.0 to version 3.0 or later.
Technical Notes 811
Remote Cords MC-DC2 Remote Cord (length 1 m/3 ft 4 in.): When connected to the camera accessory terminal, the MC-DC2 can be used to release the shutter remotely. USB Cables · UC-E24 USB Cable: A USB cable with a type C connector for connection
to the camera and a type A connector for connection to the USB device. · UC-E25 USB Cable: A USB cable with two type C connectors. HDMI Cables HC-E1 HDMI Cable: An HDMI cable with a type C connector for connection to the camera and a type A connector for connection to HDMI devices. Microphones · ME-1 Stereo Microphone: Connect the ME-1 to the camera
microphone jack to record stereo sound. Using an external microphone also reduces the chance of picking up equipment noise, such as the sounds produced by the lens during autofocus. · ME-W1 Wireless Microphone: A wireless Bluetooth microphone. Use the ME-W1 for off-camera recording. Film Digitizing Adapters ES-2 Film Digitizing Adapter: The ES-2 film digitizing adapter is used to fix 35 mm film in place so it can be photographed. It can be used with Nikon lenses mounted on Nikon SLR cameras. For information on compatible lenses, see the manual for the ES-2.
812 Technical Notes
Accessory Terminal Accessories The following accessories can be connected to the accessory terminal. · WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller · WR-1 Wireless Remote Controller · MC-DC2 Remote Cord Close the camera connector cover when the terminal is not in use. Foreign matter in the connector could cause malfunction. D Compatible Accessories · Availability may vary with country or region. · See our website or brochures for the latest information. D Attaching and Removing the Accessory Shoe Cover The accessory shoe cover (available separately) slides into the accessory shoe as shown. To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly, press the cover down with a thumb and slide it in the direction shown.
Technical Notes 813
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter.
1 Open the battery-
chamber (q) and power connector (w) covers.
2 Insert the EP-5B power
connector.
· Be sure to insert the connector in the correct orientation.
· Using the connector to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side, slide the connector into the battery chamber until the latch locks the connector in place.
814 Technical Notes
3 Close the battery-
chamber cover.
Position the power connector cable so that it passes through the power connector slot and close the battery-chamber cover.
4 Connect the EH-5d/EH-5c/EH-5b AC adapter.
· Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on the AC adapter (e).
· Connect the power cable to the DC socket (r). · A P icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is
powered by the AC adapter and power connector.
Technical Notes 815
Charging AC Adapters
· When inserted in the camera, EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion batteries will charge while the camera is connected to an optional EH-7P charging AC adapter.
· Charging AC adapters cannot be used to charge EN-EL15a/ EN-EL15 batteries. Use the MH-25a battery charger instead.
· An exhausted battery will fully charge in about two hours and 35 minutes.
· Note that in countries or regions where required, charging AC adapters are supplied with a plug adapter attached; the shape of the plug adapter varies with the country of sale.
1 Insert the EN-EL15b into the
camera (0 24).
816 Technical Notes
2 After confirming that the camera is off, connect
the charging AC adapter and plug the adapter in.
1 EH-7P Charging AC Adapter
2 Charge lamp
· Insert the plug straight into the socket rather than at an angle.
· The charge lamp lights amber while charging is in progress. The charge lamp turns off when charing is complete.
· The battery will not charge while the camera is on. · Note that although the camera can be used while
connected, the camera will not draw power from the charging AC adapter while the camera is on.
Technical Notes 817
3 Unplug the charging AC adapter when charging is
complete.
Disconnect the charging AC adapter from the camera. D The Charging AC Adapter
If the battery cannot be charged using the charging AC adapter, for example because the battery is not compatible or the temperature of the camera is elevated, the charge lamp will flash rapidly for about 30 seconds and then turn off. If the charge lamp is off and you did not observe the battery charging, turn the camera on and check the battery level.
818 Technical Notes
Software
The following Nikon software can be used with the camera:
Computer Software · Camera Control Pro 2 (available for purchase): Control the camera
remotely from a computer and save photographs directly to the computer hard disk. If [PC] is selected as the destination in Camera Control Pro 2, a PC connection indicator (c) will be displayed in the camera control panel if Camera Control Pro 2 is launched while the camera is connected to the computer. · ViewNX-i *: More than a tool for viewing and editing photos and movies shot with Nikon digital cameras, ViewNX-i can be used in combination with other Nikon imaging applications to help you get the most from your pictures. It also offers smooth access to online services. * Existing users should be sure to download the latest version, as earlier
versions may not support the camera. · Capture NX-D: Fine-tune photos shot in Nikon's unique NEF/NRW
(RAW) formats or convert them to JPEG or TIFF (NEF/RAW processing). Capture NX-D can be used not only with NEF/NRW (RAW) pictures but also with JPEG and TIFF photos shot with Nikon digital cameras for such tasks as editing tone curves and enhancing brightness and contrast.
Technical Notes 819
· Wireless Transmitter Utility: The Wireless Transmitter Utility is required if the camera is to be connected to a network. Pair the camera with the computer and download pictures via Wi-Fi.
Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center. Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the latest version. https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/ Smartphone (Tablet) Apps SnapBridge: Upload photos and movies from the camera to a smart device via a wireless connection. · The SnapBridge app is available for download from the Apple App
Store® or on Google PlayTM. · Visit the Nikon website for the latest information on the SnapBridge
app.
820 Technical Notes
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery. Before removing the battery, confirm that the camera is off. Do not store the camera in locations that: · are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60% · are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios · are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
-10 °C (14 °F)
Technical Notes 821
Cleaning
The procedure varies with the part that requires cleaning. The procedures are detailed below. · Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
Camera body
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry the camera thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause product malfunction. Damage due to the presence of foreign matter inside the camera is not covered under warranty.
Lens, mirror, and viewfinder
These glass elements are easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid that could damage glass elements. To remove fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Monitor
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.
822 Technical Notes
The Low-Pass Filter
Dirt or dust entering the camera when lenses are exchanged or the body cap is removed may adhere to the low-pass filter and affect your photographs. The "clean image sensor" option vibrates the filter to remove dust. The filter can be cleaned at any time from the menus, or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
Technical Notes 823
Using the Menus
· For maximum effect, hold the camera in normal orientation (base down).
· Select [Clean image sensor] in the setup menu, then highlight [Clean now] and press J to begin cleaning.
· Camera controls cannot be used while cleaning is in progress. Do not remove or disconnect the power source.
· The setup menu will be displayed when cleaning is complete.
824 Technical Notes
Cleaning the Image Sensor at Startup and/or Shutdown
Option
Description
5 [Clean at startup]
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned on.
6
[Clean at shutdown]
The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each time the camera is turned off.
7
[Clean at startup & shutdown]
The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at shutdown.
[Cleaning off]
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
1 Select [Clean at startup/
shutdown] for [Clean image sensor].
Pressing 2 when [Clean at startup/ shutdown] is highlighted displays [Clean at startup/shutdown] options.
2 Highlight an option.
Press J to select the highlighted option.
Technical Notes 825
D Image Sensor Cleaning · Using camera controls interrupts any image sensor cleaning begun in
response to the operation of the power switch. · Image sensor cleaning may not fully remove all foreign matter from the
filter. Clean the filter manually (0 827) or consult a Nikon-authorized service representative. · If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera's internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.
826 Technical Notes
Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter cannot be removed from the low-pass filter using the "clean image sensor" option (0 823), the filter can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however, that because the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged, we recommend that manual cleaning be performed only by a Nikon-authorized service representative. · To prevent loss of power during the operation, use a fully-
charged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and power connector. · Manual cleaning requires use of the [Lock mirror up for cleaning] item in the setup menu. The [Lock mirror up for cleaning] item is not available at battery levels of J or below or if the camera is connected to a smart device via Bluetooth or other devices via USB.
Technical Notes 827
1 Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
After removing the lens, turn the camera on.
2 Highlight [Lock mirror up for
cleaning] in the setup menu and press 2.
The camera will prepare to lock the mirror up.
3 Press J.
· The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open. · The display in the control panel
will flash. The display in the viewfinder will turn off. · To restore normal operation without inspecting the low-pass filter, turn the camera off.
828 Technical Notes
4 Holding the camera so that
light can enter the camera, examine the filter for dust or lint.
If no foreign objects are present, proceed to Step 6.
5 Remove any dust and lint from
the low-pass filter with a blower.
· Do not use a blower-brush. The bristles could damage the filter.
· Dirt that cannot be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon-authorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter.
6 Turn the camera off and replace the lens.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close.
Technical Notes 829
D Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain caused by the shutter closing inadvertently during the operation, observe the following precautions: · Do not turn the camera off while the mirror is raised. · Do not remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is
raised. · If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and
the self-timer lamp will flash. The shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes; end cleaning or inspection immediately.
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine particles from the camera itself) may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions. To prevent entry of foreign matter when attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses, avoid dusty environments and be sure to remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera mount, lens mount, or body cap. To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the supplied body cap. Should you encounter foreign matter that cannot be removed using the image sensor cleaning option (0 823), clean the low-pass filter as described in "Manual Cleaning" (0 827), or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using the clean image options available in some imaging applications.
830 Technical Notes
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing; Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected once every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these services). · Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the
camera is used professionally. · Any accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or
optional flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
Technical Notes 831
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions
Camera Care
Do Not Drop Do not drop the camera or lens or subject them to blows. The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration. Keep Dry Keep the camera dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism caused by water inside the camera can not only be expensive to repair but can in fact cause irreparable damage. Avoid Sudden Changes in Temperature Sudden changes in temperature, such as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature. Keep Away from Strong Magnetic Fields Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor, corrupt data stored on the memory card, or affect the product's internal circuitry. Do Not Leave the Lens Pointed at the Sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for extended periods. Intense light may damage the image sensor or cause fading or "burn in". Photographs taken with the camera may exhibit a white blur effect.
832 Technical Notes
Lasers and other bright light sources Do not direct lasers or other extremely bright light sources toward the lens, as this could damage the camera's image sensor. Cleaning When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in fresh water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD display to light up or go dark; this does not indicate a malfunction. The display will soon return to normal. Cleaning the Lens and Mirror These elements are easily damaged: remove dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid that could damage glass elements. To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully. Cleaning the Low-Pass Filter For information on cleaning the low-pass filter, see "The Low-Pass Filter" (0 823) and "Manual Cleaning" (0 827). The Lens Contacts Keep the lens contacts clean.
Technical Notes 833
Do Not Touch the Shutter Curtain · The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged: under no
circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the curtain. · The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored; this does not indicate a malfunction. It also has no effect on pictures. Store in a Well-Ventilated Area To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store the camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls, next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic, or where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures, for example near a heater or in an enclosed vehicle on a hot day. Failure to observe these precautions could result in product malfunction. Long-Term Storage To prevent damage caused by, for example, leaking battery fluid, remove the battery if the product will not be used for an extended period. Store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals. To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a month, insert the battery, and release the shutter a few times.
834 Technical Notes
Turn the Product Off Before Removing or Disconnecting the Power Source
Removing or disconnecting the power source while the camera is on could damage the product. Particular care should be taken not to remove or disconnect the power source while images are being recorded or deleted. Notes on the Monitor · The monitor is constructed with extremely high precision; at least
99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01% being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black), this is not a malfunction. Images recorded with the device are unaffected. Your understanding is requested. · Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light. · Do not apply pressure to the monitor. The monitor could malfunction or suffer damage. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower. Stains can be removed by wiping the monitor lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass. Be careful that liquid crystal from the monitor does not touch the skin or enter the eyes or mouth. Bright Lights and Back-Lit Subjects Noise in the form of lines may in rare cases appear in pictures that include bright lights or back-lit subjects.
Technical Notes 835
Battery Care
Precautions for Use · If improperly handled, batteries may rupture or leak, causing the
product to corrode. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries: - Turn the product off before replacing the battery. - Batteries may be hot after extended use. - Keep the battery terminals clean. - Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment. - Do not short or disassemble batteries or expose them to flame or
excessive heat. - Replace the terminal cover when the battery is not inserted in the
camera or charger. · If the battery is hot, for example immediately after use, wait for it to cool
before charging. Attempting to charge the battery while its internal temperature is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not charge or charge only partially. · If the battery will not be used for some time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the camera for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F). Avoid hot or extremely cold locations. · Batteries should be charged within six months of use. During long periods of disuse, charge the battery and use the camera to run it flat once every six months before returning it to a cool location for storage.
836 Technical Notes
· Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use. The camera and charger draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that it will no longer function.
· Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F). Failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance. Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C35 °C (41 °F95 °F). The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F).
· Capacity may be reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C (32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F).
· Batteries in general exhibit a drop in capacity at low ambient temperatures. Even fresh batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary increase from "0" to "1" in the setup menu [Battery info] age display, but the display will return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
· Battery capacity drops at low temperatures. The change in capacity with temperature is reflected in the camera battery-level display. As a result, the battery display may show a drop in capacity as the temperature drops, even if the battery is fully charged.
· Batteries may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing batteries from the camera.
Technical Notes 837
Charge Batteries Before Use Charge the battery before use. The supplied battery is not fully charged at shipment. Ready Spare Batteries Before taking photographs, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice. Have Fully-Charged Spare Batteries Ready on Cold Days Partially-charged batteries may not function on cold days. In cold weather, charge one battery before use and keep another in a warm place, ready to be exchanged as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge. Battery Level · Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use. · A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement. Purchase a new rechargeable battery. Do Not Attempt to Charge Fully-Charged Batteries Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance. Recycling Used Batteries Recycle rechargeable batteries in accord with local regulations, being sure to first insulate the terminals with tape.
838 Technical Notes
Using the Charger
· Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging; failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again.
· Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
· Unplug the charger when it is not in use. · Use the MH-25a with compatible batteries only. · Do not use chargers with damage that leaves the interior exposed or
that produce unusual sounds when used.
Using the Charging AC Adapter
· Do not move the camera or touch the battery during charging. Failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the camera showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged. Disconnect and reconnect the adapter to begin charging again.
· Do not short the adapter terminals. Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the adapter.
· Unplug the adapter when it is not in use. · Do not use adapters with damage that leaves the interior exposed or
that produce unusual sounds when used.
Technical Notes 839
Specifications
Nikon D780 Digital Camera
Type Type Lens mount Effective angle of view
Single-lens reflex digital camera Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)
Nikon FX format
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
24.5 million
Image sensor Type Total pixels Dustreduction system
35.9 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor 25.28 million
Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data (Capture NX-D software required)
840 Technical Notes
Storage
Image size (pixels)
File format (image quality)
· FX (36×24) image area: - 6048 × 4024 (Large: 24.3 M) - 4528 × 3016 (Medium: 13.7 M) - 3024 × 2016 (Small: 6.1 M)
· DX (24×16) image area: - 3936 × 2624 (Large: 10.3 M) - 2944 × 1968 (Medium: 5.8 M) - 1968 × 1312 (Small: 2.6 M)
· 1:1 (24×24) image area: - 4016 × 4016 (Large: 16.1 M) - 3008 × 3008 (Medium: 9.0 M) - 2000 × 2000 (Small: 4.0 M)
· 16:9 (36×20) image area: - 6048 × 3400 (Large: 20.6 M) - 4528 × 2544 (Medium: 11.5 M) - 3024 × 1696 (Small: 5.1 M)
· Photographs taken while filming movies at a frame size of 3840 × 2160: 3840 × 2160
· Photographs taken while filming movies at other frame sizes: 1920 × 1080
· NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit (lossless compressed or compressed)
· JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1:4), normal (approx. 1:8), or basic (approx. 1:16) compression; size-priority and optimal-quality compression available
· NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Technical Notes 841
Storage
Picture Control System
Media Double card slots File system
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait, Landscape, Flat, Creative Picture Controls (Dream, Morning, Pop, Sunday, Somber, Dramatic, Silence, Bleached, Melancholic, Pure, Denim, Toy, Sepia, Blue, Red, Pink, Charcoal, Graphite, Binary, Carbon); selected Picture Control can be modified; storage for custom Picture Controls
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-II compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards
The card in Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for separate storage of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images; pictures can be copied between cards.
DCF 2.0, Exif 2.31
Viewfinder
Viewfinder Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder
Frame coverage
· FX: Approx. 100% horizontal and 100% vertical · DX: Approx. 97% horizontal and 97% vertical · 1:1: Approx. 97% horizontal and 100% vertical · 16:9: Approx. 100% horizontal and 97% vertical
Magnification Approx. 0.7× (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, -1.0 m-1)
Eyepoint
21 mm (-1.0 m-1; from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens)
Diopter adjustment
-3 +1 m-1
842 Technical Notes
Viewfinder
Focusing screen
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen (with AF-area brackets; framing grid can be displayed)
Reflex mirror Quick return
Depth-of-field preview
Pressing Pv button stops lens aperture down to value selected by user (A and M modes) or by camera (P and S modes)
Lens aperture Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Compatible lenses
· Types G, E, and D (some restrictions apply to PC lenses)
· Other AF NIKKOR lenses (excluding IX NIKKOR lenses and lenses for the F3AF)
· AI-P NIKKOR lenses · DX lenses (using [DX (24 × 16)] image area) · Non-CPU AI lenses (modes A and M only) · During viewfinder photography, the electronic
rangefinder can be used with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster. With lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/8 or faster, the electronic rangefinder supports 11 focus points.
Technical Notes 843
Shutter
Type
Speed Flash sync speed
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane mechanical shutter; electronic front-curtain shutter; electronic shutter
1/800030 s (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV, extendable to 900 s in mode M); Bulb; Time; X200
X=1/200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/200 s or slower · Auto FP high-speed sync supported
Release
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed), CH
Release mode
(continuous high speed), Q (quiet shutter-release), QC (quiet continuous shutter-release), E (self-timer), MUP
(mirror up)
Approximate frame advance rate
· CL: 1 6 fps (viewfinder photography); 13 fps (live view photography)
· CH: 7 fps; when shooting NEF/RAW pictures during silent photography, either 8 fps (bit depth 14 bits) or 12 fps (bit depth 12 bits)
· QC: 3 fps
Self-timer
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1 9 exposures at intervals of 0.5, 1, 2, or 3 s
844 Technical Notes
Exposure Metering system
Metering mode
Range *
· Viewfinder photography: TTL exposure metering using RGB sensor with approximately 180K (180,000) pixels
· Live view: TTL exposure metering performed by image sensor
· Matrix: 3D color matrix metering III (type G, E, and D lenses); color matrix metering III (other CPU lenses); color matrix metering available with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data
· Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm circle in center of frame; diameter of circle can be changed to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting can be based on average of entire frame (non-CPU and AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 815mm f/3.54.5E ED lenses use 12-mm circle)
· Spot: Meters circle approximately 4 mm in diameter (about 1.5% of frame) centered on selected focus point (on center focus point when non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 815mm f/3.54.5E ED lens is used)
· Highlight-weighted: Available with type G, E, and D lenses
· Matrix and center-weighted metering: -3 +20 EV · Spot metering: 2 20 EV · Highlight-weighted metering: 0 20 EV * Figures are for ISO 100 and f/1.4 lens at 20 °C/68 °F
Technical Notes 845
Exposure
Exposure meter coupling
Combined CPU and AI
Mode
b: Auto, P: programmed auto with flexible program, S: shutter-priority auto, A: aperture-priority auto, M: manual · EFCT Special effects modes: j night vision; f super
vivid; d pop; e photo illustration; k toy camera effect; l miniature effect; m selective color; 8 silhouette; 9 high key; ! low key
· U1 and U2: user settings
Exposure compensation
5 +5 EV; -3 +3 EV when filming movies (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV) available in P, S, A, M, and EFCT modes
Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO sensitivity (Recommended Exposure Index)
ISO 10051200 (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV); can also be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 50 equivalent) below ISO 100 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 204800 equivalent) above ISO 51200; auto ISO sensitivity control available
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, or Off
846 Technical Notes
Autofocus Type
Detection range Lens servo
Focus points
· Viewfinder photography: TTL phase detection performed using Advanced Multi-CAM 3500 II autofocus sensor module with support for 51 focus points (including 15 cross-type sensors; f/8 supported by 11 sensors); autofocus fine-tuning supported
· Live view: Hybrid phase-detection/contrast-detect AF performed by image sensor; autofocus fine-tuning supported
· Viewfinder photography 1: -3 +19 EV · Live view 2: -5 +19 EV; -7 +19 EV with low-light AF 1 Figures are for ISO 100 at 20 °C/68 °F. 2 Still photography using single-servo AF (AF-S) and
apertures of f/1.4 at dark end of range and f/5.6 at bright end of range; ISO 100; 20 °C/68 °F
· Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuousservo AF (AF-C); AF mode auto-switch (AF-A, still photography only); full-time AF (AF-F, movie recording only); predictive focus tracking activated automatically according to subject status
· Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be used
· Viewfinder photography: 51 points with [All points] selected for Custom Setting a6 [Focus points used], 11 points with [Every other point] selected
· Live view *: 273 points with [All points] selected for Custom Setting a6 [Focus points used], 77 points with [Every other point] selected
* Still photography, [FX (36×24)] image area, singlepoint AF
Technical Notes 847
Autofocus
· Viewfinder photography: Single-point AF, 9-, 21-, or 51- point dynamic-area AF, 3D-tracking, group-area AF, auto-area AF
AF-area mode · Live view: Pinpoint AF (still photography only, singleservo AF/AF-S), single-point AF, dynamic-area AF (still photography only, continuous-servo AF/AF-C), widearea AF (S), wide-area AF (L), auto-area AF
Focus lock
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button halfway (single-servo AF/AF-S) or by pressing A button
Flash
Flash control
· Viewfinder photography: TTL flash control performed by RGB sensor with approximately 180K (180,000) pixels
· Live view photography: TTL flash control performed by image sensor
· i-TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR available with matrix, center-weighted, and highlight-weighted metering; standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR available with spot metering
Flash mode
Front-curtain sync, red-eye reduction, slow sync, redeye reduction with slow sync, rear-curtain sync, off
Flash
3 +1 EV (choose from step sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV)
compensation available in P, S, A, and M modes
848 Technical Notes
Flash
Flash-ready Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged; flashes
indicator
after flash is fired at full output
Accessory shoe
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock
Nikon
i-TTL flash control, radio-controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting, optical Advanced Wireless Lighting, modeling
Creative Lighting System (CLS)
illumination, FV lock, Color Information Communication, auto FP high-speed sync, AF-assist for multi-area AF (viewfinder photography), unified flash control
Sync terminal AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)
White balance
Auto (3 types), natural light auto, direct sunlight, cloudy, shade, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), flash, choose color temperature (2500 K10,000 K), preset White balance manual (up to 6 values can be stored, spot white balance measurement available during live view photography), all except choose color temperature with fine-tuning
Bracketing Bracketing
Exposure and/or flash, white balance, and ADL
Live view Mode
C (photo live view), 1 (movie live view)
Technical Notes 849
Movie Metering system Metering mode
Frame size (pixels) and frame rate
File format Video compression Audio recording format Audio recording device
TTL metering using camera image sensor
Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
· 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p (progressive), 25p, 24p · 1920 × 1080; 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p · 1920 × 1080 (slow-motion); 30p ×4, 25p ×4, 24p ×5 * Actual frame rates for 120p, 100p, 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p,
and 24p are 119.88, 100, 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps respectively * Quality selection available at all sizes except 3840 × 2160, 1920 × 1080 120p/100p, and 1920 × 1080 slowmotion, when quality is fixed at m (high) MOV, MP4
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Linear PCM, AAC
Built-in stereo or external microphone with attenuator option; sensitivity adjustable
850 Technical Notes
Movie
Manual selection (ISO 100 to 51200; choose from step
ISO sensitivity sizes of 1/3 and 1/2 EV) with additional options available
(Recommended equivalent to approximately 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO
Exposure
204800 equivalent) above ISO 51200; auto ISO
Index)
sensitivity control (ISO 100 to Hi 2) available with
selectable upper limit
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Same as photo settings, Extra high, High, Normal, Low, or Off
Time-lapse movie recording, electronic vibration Other options reduction, time codes, logarithmic (N-Log) and HDR
(HLG) movie output
Monitor Monitor
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 2359k-dot (XGA) tilting TFT touchsensitive LCD with 170° viewing angle, approximately 100% frame coverage, 11-level manual brightness adjustment, and color balance control
Technical Notes 851
Playback Playback
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or calendar) playback with playback zoom, playback zoom cropping, movie playback, photo and/or movie slide shows, histogram display, highlights, photo information, location data display, picture rating, auto image rotation, and index marking
Interface
USB
HDMI output
Audio input
Audio output Accessory terminal
Type C USB connector (SuperSpeed USB); connection to built-in USB port is recommended Type C HDMI connector
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter; plug-in power supported)
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)
Built-in (can be used with accessories such as the MC-DC2 remote cord)
852 Technical Notes
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
· Standards: - IEEE 802.11b/g/n (Africa, Asia, and Oceania) - IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a/ac (Europe, U.S.A., Canada, and Mexico) - IEEE 802.11b/g/n/a (other countries in the Americas)
· Operating frequency: - 24122462 MHz (channel 11; Africa, Asia, and Oceania) - 24122462 MHz (channel 11) and 51805825 MHz (U.S.A., Canada, and Mexico) - 24122462 MHz (channel 11) and 51805805 MHz (other countries in the Americas) - 24122462 MHz (channel 11) and 57455805 MHz (Georgia) - 24122462 MHz (channel 11) and 51805320 MHz (other European countries)
· Maximum output power (EIRP): - 2.4 GHz band: 2.9 dBm - 5 GHz band: 5.7 dBm (Georgia) - 5 GHz band: 8.7 dBm (other countries)
· Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
Technical Notes 853
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Bluetooth
· Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification Version 4.2
· Operating frequency: - Bluetooth: 24022480 MHz - Bluetooth Low Energy: 24022480 MHz
· Maximum output power (EIRP): - Bluetooth: 2.6 dBm - Bluetooth Low Energy: 4.1 dBm
Range (line of sight)
Approximately 10 m (32 ft) * * Without interference. Range may vary with signal
strength and presence or absence of obstacles.
Power source Battery AC adapter
One EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion battery * * EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries can also be used. Note,
however, that fewer pictures may sometimes be taken on a single charge with the EN-EL15 than with an EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a. EH-7P charging AC adapter can be used to charge EN-EL15b batteries only.
EH-5d/EH-5c/EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5B power connector (available separately)
854 Technical Notes
Tripod socket Tripod socket 1/4 in. (ISO 1222)
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W× H × D)
Approx. 143.5 × 115.5 × 76 mm (5.7 × 4.6 × 3 in.)
Weight
Approx. 840 g (1 lb. 13.7 oz.) with battery and SD memory card but without body cap; approx. 755 g/1 lb. 10.7 oz. (camera body only)
Operating environment
Temperature 0 °C40 °C (+32 °F104 °F)
Humidity
85% or less (no condensation)
· Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines.
· All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery. · The sample images displayed on the camera and the images and
illustrations in the manuals are for expository purposes only. · Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of
the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Technical Notes 855
MH-25a Battery Charger
Rated input AC 100240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.230.12 A
Rated output DC 8.4 V/1.2 A
Supported batteries
EN-EL15b rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Charging time
Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes * Time required to charge battery at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge remains
Operating temperature
0 °C40 °C (+32 °F104 °F)
Dimensions (W× H × D)
Approx. 95 × 33.5 × 71 mm (3.7 × 1.3 × 2.8 in.), excluding projections
Length of power cable
Approx. 1.5 m (4.9 ft), if supplied
Weight
Approx. 115 g (4.1 oz), excluding supplied power connector (power cable or AC wall adapter)
The symbols on this product represent the following: m AC, p DC, q Class II equipment (the construction of the product is double-insulated)
856 Technical Notes
EN-EL15b Rechargeable Li-ion Battery:
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity 7.0 V/1900 mAh
Operating temperature
0 °C40 °C (+32 °F104 °F)
Dimensions (W× H × D)
Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)
Weight
Approx. 80 g (2.9 oz), excluding terminal cover
Technical Notes 857
D Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user's responsibility. Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices. Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another person, you should also use the [Reset all settings] item in the camera setup menu to delete network settings and other personal information.
858 Technical Notes
D Supported Standards · DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera. · Exif version 2.31: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.31, a standard introduced with the goal of improving the interoperability of printers and digital cameras, making it easier to produce high-quality prints. Information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers. See the printer manual for details. · HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices. This standard ensures that audiovisual data and control signals can be transmitted to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable connection.
Technical Notes 859
Approved Memory Cards
· The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards.
· UHS-I and UHS-II are supported. · Cards rated UHS Speed Class 3 or better are
recommended for movie recording and playback. Slower speeds may result in recording or playback being interrupted. · When choosing cards for use in card readers, be sure they are compatible with the device. · Contact the manufacturer for information on features, operation, and limitations on use.
860 Technical Notes
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 32 GB 1 card at different image area, image quality, and image size settings. Actual capacity varies with shooting conditions and the type of card.
Technical Notes 861
[FX (36 × 24)] Selected for Image Area
The following table shows the memory card and buffer capacity when [FX (36 × 24)] is selected for [Image area] > [Choose image area] in the photo shooting menu.
· This category also includes images taken with non-DX lenses when [On] is selected for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop].
Image quality Image size File size
Number of exposures remaining 2
Buffer capacity 2, 3
NEF (RAW),
Lossless compressed,
--
12-bit
Approx. 21.7 MB
1400 frames 100 frames
NEF (RAW),
Lossless compressed,
--
14-bit
Approx. 27.7 MB
1200 frames 68 frames
NEF (RAW),
Compressed,
--
12-bit
Approx. 19.4 MB
1800 frames 100 frames
NEF (RAW),
Compressed,
--
14-bit
Approx. 24.1 MB
1500 frames 100 frames
862 Technical Notes
Image quality Image size
Large JPEG fine 4 Medium
Small Large JPEG normal 4 Medium Small Large JPEG basic 4 Medium Small
File size
Approx. 9.8 MB Approx. 6.7 MB Approx. 4.1 MB Approx. 6.6 MB Approx. 4.0 MB Approx. 2.2 MB Approx. 2.3 MB Approx. 1.7 MB Approx. 1.2 MB
Number of exposures remaining 2
Buffer capacity 2, 3
3600 frames 100 frames
6000 frames 100 frames
11,200 frames 100 frames
7000 frames 100 frames
11,700 frames 100 frames
21,900 frames 100 frames
13,700 frames 100 frames
21,900 frames 100 frames
40,100 frames 100 frames
Technical Notes 863
[DX (24 × 16)] Selected for Image Area
The following table shows the memory card and buffer capacity when [DX (24 × 16)] is selected for [Image area] > [Choose image area] in the photo shooting menu.
· This category also includes images taken with DX lenses when [On] is selected for [Image area] > [Auto DX crop].
Image quality Image size File size
Number of exposures remaining 2
Buffer capacity 2, 3
NEF (RAW),
Lossless compressed,
--
12-bit
Approx. 9.9 MB
3000 frames 100 frames
NEF (RAW),
Lossless compressed,
--
14-bit
Approx. 12.5 MB
2600 frames 100 frames
NEF (RAW),
Compressed,
--
12-bit
Approx. 8.8 MB
3800 frames 100 frames
NEF (RAW),
Compressed,
--
14-bit
Approx. 10.8 MB
3300 frames 100 frames
864 Technical Notes
Image quality Image size
Large JPEG fine 4 Medium
Small Large JPEG normal 4 Medium Small Large JPEG basic 4 Medium Small
File size
Approx. 4.8 MB Approx. 3.5 MB Approx. 2.4 MB Approx. 3.2 MB Approx. 2.1 MB Approx. 1.3 MB Approx. 1.2 MB Approx. 1.0 MB Approx. 0.7 MB
Number of exposures remaining 2
Buffer capacity 2, 3
7600 frames 100 frames
11,700 frames 100 frames
19,200 frames 100 frames
14,600 frames 100 frames
21,900 frames 100 frames
34,400 frames 100 frames
26,700 frames 100 frames
40,100 frames 100 frames
60,200 frames 100 frames
Technical Notes 865
1 Figures are for a 32 GB SanDisk SD UHS-II memory card (SDSDXPK032G-JNJIP 32GB, measured in September 2019).
2 Number of pictures that can be saved to memory card or stored in memory buffer varies with scene recorded.
3 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. May drop in some situations, including when: · An optimal-compression (m) JPEG option is selected for [Image quality] · [On] is selected for [Auto distortion control]
4 Figures assume a size-priority option (an option not marked with m) is selected for [Image quality]. Selecting an optimal-compression option (m) increases file size; the number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly.
D Maximum Number of Photos per Burst The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100 using Custom Setting d2 [Max. continuous release].
866 Technical Notes
Battery Endurance
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with a fully-charged EN-EL15b (1900 mAh) rechargeable Li-ion battery is given below. 1 Actual endurance varies with such factors as the condition of the battery, the interval between shots, and the options selected in the camera menus. · Photographs, single-frame release mode: Approximately 2260
(CIPA standard 2) · Photographs, continuous release modes: Approximately 4570
(Nikon standard 3) · Movies: Approximately 95 minutes 4
Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance: · Using the monitor, for example for live view photography · Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway · Repeated autofocus operations · Taking NEF (RAW) photographs · Slow shutter speeds · Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features · Using the camera with optional accessories connected · Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses · Repeatedly zooming in and out with an AF-P lens · Taking pictures at low ambient temperatures
Technical Notes 867
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL15b batteries: · Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance. · Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose
their charge if left unused.
1 EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 batteries can also be used. Note, however, that fewer pictures may sometimes be taken on a single charge with the EN-EL15 than with an EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a.
2 Lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s. Live view not used. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24 120mm f/4G ED VR lens. Figures are for a 32 GB SanDisk SD UHS-II memory card (SDSDXPK-032G-JNJIP 32GB, measured in September 2019).
3 Image quality set to JPEG normal, image size set to large, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for 5 s and then turned off; no operations performed until stand-by timer has expired. The cycle is then repeated. Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 70200mm f/2.8E FL ED VR lens (VR off). Figures are for a 32 GB SanDisk SD UHS-II memory card (SDSDXPK-032G-JNJIP 32GB, measured in September 2019).
868 Technical Notes
4 Actual battery endurance as measured under conditions specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA). Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR lens. Figures are for a 32 GB SanDisk SD UHS-II memory card (SDSDXPK-032G-JNJIP 32GB, measured in September 2019). Measurement performed at default settings. · Each shot can be up to 29 minutes 59 seconds in length. · Each shot can be up to 4 GB in size. · If camera temperature rises, recording may end before maximum length or size is reached.
Technical Notes 869
Trademarks and Licenses
· The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. · Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. · Apple®, App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, iPod touch®, Mac, macOS, and OS X are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other countries. · Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC. The Android robot is reproduced or modified from work created and shared by Google and used according to terms described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution License. · IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the United States and/or other countries and is used under license. · HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
870 Technical Notes
· The Bluetooth® word mark and logo are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Nikon is under license.
· Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
· All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may affect wireless performance.
D FreeType License (FreeType2) Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project (https://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved. D MIT License (HarfBuzz) Portions of this software are copyright © 2018 The HarfBuzz Project (https://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights reserved.
Technical Notes 871
D Unicode® Character Database License (Unicode® Character Database)
The software for this product uses the Unicode® Character Database License open-source software. The terms of the software license are as follows: COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright © 1991-2019 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in https://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that either (i) this copyright and permission notice appear with all copies of the
Data Files or Software, or (ii) this copyright and permission notice appear in associated
Documentation.
872 Technical Notes
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. D AVC Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO
THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL
ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE https://www.mpegla.com
Technical Notes 873
Kit Lens Manual
Kit Lenses
AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual
This section is included as a lens manual for purchasers of the AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR lens kit. · Note that lens kits may not be available in some countries or
regions.
874 AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual
Parts of the Lens
The parts of the AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR are listed below.
12 3
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
14
15 16
1 Lens hood (0 882)
2 Lens hood alignment mark (0 882)
3 Lens hood lock mark (0 882)
4 Lens hood mounting mark (0 882)
5 Zoom ring
6 Focal length scale
7 Focal length mark
8 Focus distance indicator
9 Focus distance mark 10 Focus ring (0 162) 11 Lens mounting mark (0 25) 12 Rubber lens-mount gasket 13 CPU contacts (0 791) 14 Focus-mode switch (0 162) 15 Vibration reduction switch
(0 880) 16 Vibration reduction mode
switch
AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual 875
Focus
Supported focus modes are shown in the following table.
Camera focus mode
AF (A/S/C)
MF
Lens focus mode
M/A
M
Autofocus with manual override (manual priority)
Manual focus with electronic rangefinder
Manual focus with electronic rangefinder
For information on camera focus modes, see the camera manual. M/A (Autofocus with Manual Override)
1 Slide the lens focus-mode switch to M/A.
2 If desired, autofocus can be over-ridden by
rotating the lens focus ring while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway or the AF-ON button is pressed.
3 To refocus using autofocus, press the shutter-
release button halfway or press the AF-ON button again.
876 AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual
Zoom and Depth of Field
Before focusing, rotate the zoom ring to adjust the focal length and frame the photograph. If the camera offers depth-of-field preview (stop down), depth of field can be previewed in the viewfinder. · The lens uses Nikon's Internal Focusing (IF) system. Focal
length decreases as the focus distance shortens. · The focus distance indicator is intended only as a guide and
may not accurately show the distance to the subject. In addition, the focus distance indicator may, due to depth of field or other factors, not show when the camera is focused on a distant object.
Aperture
Aperture is adjusted using camera controls.
AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual 877
Using the Lens on Cameras with a Built-in Flash
When using the camera's built-in flash: · Be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0.6 m (2 ft). · Remove lens hoods to prevent them casting shadows in
pictures taken with the flash.
* If the flash is partially obscured by the lens hood or the tip of the lens, shadows will appear on subjects close to the camera.
1 Shadow 2 Shadow
878 AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual
· When the lens is mounted on the following cameras, the builtin flash may be unable to light the entire subject at ranges less than those given below:
Digital SLR camera
D750 (FX format)/ D610 (FX format)/ D600 (FX format) D810 series (FX format)/ D800 series (FX format)
D700 (FX format)
D300 series/D200/D100
D90/D80/D70 series/D50
D5600/D5500/D5300/D5200/ D5100/D3300/D3200
D5000/D3100/D3000/D60/ D40 series
D3400
Zoom position/minimum distance without shadows
· 24 mm/2.0 m (6 ft 7 in.) · 28 mm/1.0 m (3 ft 4 in.) · 50 mm and up/no shadows
· 28 mm/1.0 m (3 ft 4 in.) · 35 mm and up/no shadows
· 24 mm/3.0 m (9 ft 11 in.) · 35 mm and up/no shadows
· 24 mm/1.0 m (3 ft 4 in.) · 35 mm and up/no shadows
· 24 mm/1.5 m (5 ft) · 35 mm and up/no shadows
· 24 mm/1.5 m (5 ft) · 28 mm and up/no shadows
· 24 mm/2.5 m (8 ft 3 in.) · 35 mm and up/no shadows
· 24 mm/1.5 m (5 ft) · 28 mm/1.0 m (3 ft 4 in.) · 35 mm and up/no shadows
AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual 879
Vibration Reduction (VR)
Using the Vibration Reduction Switch ON: Enable vibration reduction. Vibration reduction is activated when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, reducing the effects of camera shake for improved framing and focus. OFF: Vibration reduction off. Using the Vibration Reduction Mode Switch The option selected with the vibration reduction mode switch takes effect when the vibration reduction switch is in the ON position. NORMAL: Compensate chiefly for normal forms of vibration. Vibration reduction also applies when the camera is panned. ACTIVE: Reduce the effects of vibration when shooting from a moving vehicle, and in other situations with active camera motion. The camera does not detect panning motion.
880 AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual
D Using Vibration Reduction: Notes · When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down. · When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may jiggle after the shutter is released, but this does not indicate a malfunction. · Slide the vibration reduction mode switch to NORMAL for panning shots. In NORMAL mode, vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of a pan. If the camera is panned horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake. · Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect. If power to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken, but this does not indicate a malfunction. The rattling will end when the lens is reattached and the camera turned on. · If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will be disabled while the flash charges. · In the case of cameras equipped with an AF-ON button, vibration reduction will not be performed when the button is pressed. · Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod. Note, however, that ON is recommended if the tripod head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod.
AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual 881
The Lens Hood
The lens hood protects the lens and blocks stray light that would otherwise cause flare or ghosting. Attaching the Hood
· Confirm that the lens hood mounting mark (I) is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (--K) as shown in the illustration (e).
· When attaching or removing the hood, avoid gripping it too tightly. When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the hood alignment mark ( ).
· Vignetting may occur if the hood is not correctly attached. · The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not
in use.
882 AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual
Supplied Accessories
· LC-77 Lens Cap (front cap) · LF-4 Lens Cap (rear cap) * · HB-53 Lens Hood · CL-1218 Flexible Lens Pouch
* A different cap may be supplied with lens kits.
Compatible Accessories
· 77 mm screw-on filters
AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual 883
Specifications
Type
Type G AF-S lens with built-in CPU and F mount
Focal length
24120 mm
Maximum aperture
f/4
17 elements in 13 groups (including 2 ED lens Lens construction elements, 3 aspherical lens elements, and lens
elements with Nano Crystal Coat)
Angle of view
84° 20° 20´ (Nikon FX-format D-SLR cameras) 61° 13° 20´ (Nikon DX-format D-SLR cameras)
Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters (24, 28, 35, 50, 70, 85, 120)
Distance information
Output to camera
Zoom
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing
Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Focus distance indicator
0.45 m to infinity ()
Minimum focus 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane at all zoom
distance
positions
884 AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual
Diaphragm blades 9 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm
Fully automatic
Aperture range f/422
Metering system Full aperture
Filter-attachment size
77 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions
Approx. 84 mm maximum diameter × 103.5 mm (distance from camera lens mount flange)
Weight
Approx. 710 g (1 lb 9.1 oz)
· Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice.
· Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual 885
D Lens Care · Keep the CPU contacts clean. · Should the rubber lens-mount gasket be damaged, cease use
immediately and take the lens to a Nikon-authorized service center for repair. · Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers. · Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzine to clean the lens. · Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the front lens element. The lens hood can also be used. · Attach the lens caps before placing the lens in its case. · When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the hood. · If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool, dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls. · Keep the lens dry; rusting of the internal mechanism could damage the lens. · Do not leave the lens near heaters or in other hot locations. Extreme heat could damage or warp parts made from reinforced plastic.
886 AF-S NIKKOR 24120mm f/4G ED VR Lens Manual
Index
Symbols
b (Auto mode) ...........................................36 P (Programmed auto)....................... 109 S (Shutter-priority auto) ................. 110 A (Aperture-priority auto)............. 111 M (Manual)................................................... 113 EFCT (Special effects)........................... 119 U1/U2................................................................... 115 j (Night vision)...................................... 119 f (Super vivid) ........................................ 119 d (Pop).......................................................... 119 e (Photo illustration) ...........119, 122 k (Toy camera effect)...........120, 123 l (Miniature effect).............120, 124 m (Selective color)...................120, 126 8 (Silhouette) .......................................... 120 9 (High key) .............................................. 120 ! (Low key)................................................ 120 S (Single frame) .............................73, 179 CL (Continuous low speed) 73, 179 CH (Continuous high speed) ....... 74,
179 Q (Quiet shutter-release) .....74, 180 QC (Quiet continuous shutter-
release).............................................. 74, 180 E (Self-timer).......................74, 180, 183 MUP ...............................................74, 180, 185 3 (Pinpoint AF)............................80, 150 d (Single-point AF)........78, 80, 145 f (Wide-area AF (S)) .............80, 150 g (Wide-area AF (L))..............80, 150 e (Dynamic-area AF) ...78, 80, 145 T (3D-tracking)...........................79, 146 N (Group-area AF) ...................79, 146
h (Auto-area AF) 79, 81, 147, 151, 155
L (Matrix metering) . 100, 166, 603 M (Center-weighted metering)100,
166 N (Spot metering)...................100, 167 t (Highlight-weighted metering)
100, 167 d (Help) ............................................................ 62 R button....................................68, 69, 474 A AE-L/AF-L button.............................. 82 Q/g (U) button.................................. 86 E button .......................................................... 94 X (T) button ..........................95, 376 W (Y) button....................99, 282, 376 N (Y) button...............................101, 103 i button................................................63, 361 i menu ..................................................63, 347 t (Memory buffer)............................... 181 D switch........................................................ 642
Numerics
1 : 1 (24 × 24)............................................. 130 16 : 9 (36 × 20)..........................................130 3D-tracking........................................79, 146 3D-tracking face-detection ........ 592
A
AC adapter ......................................808, 814 Access-point mode.................431, 433 Active D-Lighting ................................. 254 ADL bracketing....................................... 238
Index 887
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing set) ..................................................................238
AE & flash bracketing........................226 AE bracketing ...........................................226 AE lock ....................................................83, 173 AE-L indicator.....................................84, 173 AF activation..............................................597 AF fine-tuning options ....................663 AF mode auto-switch . 77, 140, 142 AF speed........................................................650 AF tracking sensitivity......................652 AF-A.............................................. 77, 140, 142 AF-area mode..................................78, 145 AF-C.............................................. 77, 140, 142 AF-C priority selection .....................590 AF-F ...........................................................77, 143 AF-mode button.............. 76, 144, 154 AF-ON button.................................................. 82 AF-S .............................................. 77, 140, 142 AF-S priority selection......................591 After delete.................................................539 Airplane mode.........................................691 All (Delete)...................................................388 Angle of view............................................789 Aperture................................111, 113, 638 Aperture-priority auto .....................111 Assign remote (WR) Fn button 691 Attaching a lens ........................................ 25 Attenuator ...................................................582 Auto (Set Picture Control) ............243 Auto (White balance)...............88, 195 Auto bracketing ............104, 224, 567 Auto bracketing set............................224 Auto c ISO Sensitivity Control .621 Auto distortion control...................560 Auto DX crop.............................................133 Auto ISO sensitivity control93, 190 Auto send .....................................................449 Auto-area AF ..............79, 81, 147, 151
Auto-area AF face/eye detection .... 593
Autofocus mode...........................77, 140
B
Backup (Role played by card in Slot 2) .......................................................................279
Battery........................................................22, 24 Battery charger...........................................22 Battery info..................................................701 Beep options .............................................684 BKT button ..104, 226, 232, 238, 295 Black-and-white (Monochrome)......
733 Bluetooth ...................................................... 415 Bracketing ...........................226, 232, 238 Bracketing order....................................622 Brightness ....................................................247 Bulb.....................................................................170 Bulb photography................................170
C
Calendar playback ...............................355 Center-weighted ...................................166 Center-weighted area ......................603 Center-weighted metering........100,
166 Charging AC adapter ........................816 Choose color temp. (White
balance) ............................................89, 197 Choose image area .............................551 Choose start/end point...................271 CL mode shooting speed..............607 Clarity................................................................247 Clean image sensor ............... 673, 823 Cloudy (White balance) .........88, 196 Color space .................................................554
888 Index
Color temperature...................204, 206 Compatible lenses............................... 786 Conformity marking .......................... 700 Connect to PC.......................................... 696 Connect to smart device..409, 416,
422, 429, 692 Continuous AF....................77, 140, 142 Continuous high speed.........74, 179 Continuous low speed ...........73, 179 Continuous release mode ........... 178 Contrast ......................................................... 247 Copy image(s).......................................... 532 Copyright ..................................................... 682 CPU lens.............................................786, 791 Creative Picture Control ................ 244 Custom controls ........................628, 645 Custom Settings .................................... 586 Customize command dials ......... 637 Customize i menu. 347, 623, 626,
643 Cyanotype (Monochrome).......... 733
E
Easy connect ............................................. 440 Easy exposure compensation .. 602 Edit movie........................................271, 277 Effect level ................................................... 247 Electronic front-curtain shutter609 Electronic rangefinder.....................164 Electronic VR ............................................. 580 Encryption key.............................433, 442 EV steps for exposure cntrl ......... 601 Exposure comp. for flash ..............620 Exposure compensation ......94, 175 Exposure delay mode....................... 608 Exposure indicator .............................. 114 Exposure preview (Lv) .....................614 Extended shutter speeds (M).... 610 External microphone ...............49, 812 Eye-detection AF...................................155
F
D
Delete..........................................56, 383, 530 Depth of field ...............................111, 112 Destination ................................................. 572 Detaching lenses ......................................26 Diffraction compensation559, 578 Diopter adjustment control...........11 Direct connection to PC................. 433 Direct sunlight (White balance) 88,
196 Distortion control................................. 730 D-Lighting ................................................... 726 DX (24 × 16) ...................................130, 133 DX format..................................................... 130 DX-based movie format ................ 263 Dynamic-area AF.... 78, 80, 145, 151
Face detection......................................... 155 File information...................................... 367 File naming.....................................550, 572 File number sequence.....................611 Fill flash...............................................102, 465 Filter effects................................................ 247 Fine-tune optimal exposure......604 Firmware version..................................708 Flash................................................................... 460 Flash (White balance)..............89, 197 Flash bracketing ....................................226 Flash compensation .......................... 469 Flash control..................................463, 563 Flash info...........................................474, 507 Flash mode .....................................101, 465 Flash off..............................................102, 467 Flash shutter speed ............................620
Index 889
Flash sync speed....................................618 Flash-ready indicator ........................849 Flat (Set Picture Control) ...............244 Flexible program...................................109 Flicker reduction....................... 561, 579 Fluorescent (White balance)........89,
196 Fn button .......................................................106 Focal plane mark...................................165 Focus lock........................................................ 83 Focus mode................................... 139, 162 Focus point .................................... 145, 159 Focus point options ...........................598 Focus point wrap-around.............597 Focus points used ................................594 Focus ring........................................ 162, 875 Focus shift shooting...........................328 Focus tracking with lock-on.......592 Focus-mode selector............ 139, 162 Format memory card........................656 Frame rate....................................................264 Frame size/frame rate ......................264 Framing grid display..........................615 Frequency response ..........................582 FTP server .....................................................454 Full-frame playback............................353 Full-time AF .......................................77, 143 FV lock..............................................................471 FX (36 × 24).................................................130 FX format ......................................................130 FX-based movie format..................263
G
HDMI..................................................................396 HDR (high dynamic range)..........256 Headphone volume ...........................583 Hi (Sensitivity)...........................................189 High Dynamic Range (HDR) .......256 High ISO NR ................................... 557, 578 High key (Special effect) ................120 Highlight display...................... 368, 653 Highlight-weighted metering.100,
167 Histogram...............................................69, 70 Hue......................................................................247
I
Image area...................................... 129, 262 Image comment ....................................681 Image Dust Off ref photo..............675 Image overlay...........................................734 Image quality...................................95, 134 Image review................................ 357, 538 Image size ...........................................97, 137 Incandescent (White balance) ...88,
196 Information display ............................662 Infrastructure mode.............. 432, 439 Interval timer shooting ...................569 IP address......................................................443 S (Q) button.................. 91, 93, 656 ISO sensitivity ..................... 91, 187, 190 ISO sensitivity settings........ 553, 575
L
Group-area AF.................................79, 146
H
H.264 .................................................................850
L (large) ..................................................97, 137 L (Preset manual) ..................................209 Landscape (Set Picture Control).......
244 Language ...................................................... 657
890 Index
LCD illumination ................................... 616 Live view in continuous mode 616 Live view selector........................... 40, 45 Lo (Sensitivity) ......................................... 189 Location data................................373, 687 Lock mirror up for cleaning........ 827 Long exposure NR ............................... 556 Long time-exposures ....................... 170 Low key (Special effect).................. 120 Low-light AF .............................................. 599 Low-pass filter ......................................... 823
M
M (Manual focus) .................................. 162 M (medium) ......................................97, 137 MAC address ............................................. 699 Manage Picture Control................. 250 Manual (Shooting mode) ............. 113 Manual focus ............................................ 162 Manual focus ring in AF mode 600 Matrix metering ............ 100, 166, 603 Max. continuous release................ 607 Maximum aperture.................349, 788 Maximum sensitivity......................... 191 Memory card capacity..................... 861 G button.....................................................57 Metering............................................... 99, 166 Microphone sensitivity ................... 581 Mid-range sharpening .................... 247 Miniature effect (Special effect).......
120, 124 Minimum aperture.............................. 108 Minimum shutter speed................ 192 Mired................................................................. 203 Mirror up mode.................74, 180, 185 Mode dial................................................ 36, 71 Mode dial lock release.........................72 Modeling flash ........................................ 621
Monitor brightness............................. 658 Monitor color balance .....................659 Monitor off delay ..................................606 Monochrome............................................ 733 Monochrome (Set Picture Control)
244 Movie file type......................................... 574 Movie quality................................264, 574 Movie shooting menu .....................571 Movies ...........................................45, 53, 271 Multiple exposure................................ 569 My Menu ....................................................... 744
N
Natural light auto (White balance) 88, 196
NEF (RAW) processing .....................713 NEF (RAW) recording ........................ 552 Negative digitizer................................. 343 Network settings.......... 433, 439, 696 Neutral (Set Picture Control).....243 Night vision (Special effect) ....... 119 Non-CPU lens .................. 349, 792, 795 Non-CPU lens data..... 349, 351, 672
O
OK button..................................................... 635 Optical VR..................................................... 617 Overflow (Role played by card in
Slot 2)........................................................... 279 Overview data..........................................374
P
Pairing.............................................................. 692 Peaking highlights .............................. 615 Perspective control............................. 732
Index 891
Photo illustration (Special effect) ... 119, 122
Photo information .................. 366, 371 Photo shooting menu......................544 Picture Controls......................................243 Picture size ..................................................789 PIN-entry WPS..........................................440 Pinpoint AF ........................................80, 150 Pitching ..........................................................661 Pixel mapping..........................................679 Playback.......................................51, 53, 353 Playback display options...............531 Playback folder........................................530 Playback menu........................................529 Playback zoom ........................................376 Pop (Special effect) .............................119 Portrait (Set Picture Control) .....244 Power connector...................... 808, 814 Predictive focus tracking...............141 Preset manual (White balance).89,
197, 209 Press the shutter-release button all
the way down......................................... 38 Programmed auto ...............................109 Protect .............................................................378 Push-button WPS..................................440 Pv button .......................................... 105, 112
R
Rating .................................................. 380, 543 RAW Slot 1 - JPEG Slot 2 (Role
played by card in Slot 2)............279 Rear-curtain sync...................... 102, 467 Recent settings........................... 744, 750 Red-eye correction..............................728 Red-eye reduction .................. 102, 465 Release button to use dial............641 Release mode ..................................73, 178 Release mode dial ...................................73 Release mode dial lock release .. 73 Remote flash photography.........477 Remote photography.......................404 Reset ..................................................................282 Reset all settings....................................708 Reset custom settings......................590 Reset movie shooting menu .....572 Reset photo shooting menu......545 Reset user settings...............................118 Resize ................................................................ 720 Retouch menu .........................................709 Reverse indicators................................642 RGB histogram.........................................369 Role played by card in Slot 2 .....279 Rotate tall .....................................................540
Q
S
Quick crop....................................... 362, 377 Quick retouch...........................................727 Quick sharp.................................................247 Quiet continuous shutter-release ..
74, 180 Quiet shutter-release...............74, 180
892 Index
S (small) .................................................97, 137 Saturation.....................................................247 Save original (EFFECTS) ..................613 Save user settings.................................115 Save/load menu settings ..............703 SD memory card ...........................27, 860 Search for Wi-Fi network...............440 Select date (Delete) ............................387 Select to send (Bluetooth) ...........693
Select to send/deselect.................. 381 Select to send/deselect (PC)...... 448 Selected (Delete)................................... 386 Selective color (Special effect) 120,
126 Self-timer ..........................................183, 606 Send while off.......................................... 695 Sepia (Monochrome)........................ 733 Setup menu ............................................... 654 Shade (White balance) ...........88, 196 Sharpening ................................................. 247 Shutter speed...............................110, 113 Shutter-priority auto......................... 110 Shutter-release button AE-L...... 605 Silent live view photography ... 340 Silhouette (Special effect)............ 120 Single AF ..................................77, 140, 142 Single frame............................................... 178 Single-point AF........ 78, 80, 145, 150 Slide show ................................................... 540 Slot empty release lock .................. 702 Slow sync..........................................102, 466 Slow-motion movie............................ 266 SnapBridge ................................................. 403 Specifying the focal length......... 349 Spot metering..............................100, 167 Spot white balance............................. 216 SSID ........................................................433, 441 Standard (Set Picture Control) 243 Standby timer .................................39, 605 Storage folder .......................................... 545 Store points by orientation ........ 595 Straighten .................................................... 729 Subject tracking AF ............................ 158 Super vivid (Special effect).......... 119 Sync. release mode options....... 608
T
Thumbnail playback.......................... 354 Time photography .............................. 170 Time zone and date ...........................658 Timecode...................................................... 584 Time-lapse movie................................. 315 Timer................................................................. 183 Toning ............................................................. 247 Touch controls ............................358, 686 Touch screen................................................ 14 Toy camera effect (Special effect)..
120, 123 Trim .................................................................... 719 Trimming movies ................................. 743 Two-button reset..................................282 Type D lens ................................................. 791 Type E lens .................................................. 791 Type G lens ................................................. 791
U
USB cable.............................................................ii User settings.............................................. 115
V
Viewfinder eyepiece cap.................. 10 Viewfinder mask display................ 133 Vignette Control....................................558 Virtual horizon.......................69, 70, 661 Vivid (Set Picture Control)............243
W
WB bracketing ......................................... 232 White balance.................................86, 195 Wide-area AF (L)............................80, 150 Wide-area AF (S) ...........................80, 150
Index 893
Wi-Fi connection ..........625, 694, 696 Wi-Fi mode..................................................406 Wind noise reduction.......................583 Wireless remote (WR) options..688 Wireless transmitter...........................430 Wireless transmitter (WT-7)........700 Wireless Transmitter Utility.........430 WR-R10............................................... 479, 688 WT-7...................................................... 453, 810
894 Index
895
896
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
SB0A01(11) 6MB45911-01
index.html
Nikon Consumer
SnapBridge Help | Nikon
Nikon | Support
GitHub - harfbuzz/harfbuzz: HarfBuzz text shaping engine
The FreeType Project
mpegla.com
Nikon Asia - Explore the World of Imaging Technology | Nikon Asia
Nikon | Shop & Explore Cameras, Lenses, and Accessories
Unicode Terms of Use